Home

CamControl PRO 4.41 Manual - bei der HeiTel Digital Video GmbH

1. The Keyword allows you filter the data These rows contain the keyword identifying the beginning of a new transaction The row with the keyword appears in blue when you are accessing this data Via the following options All and 1 up to 2 4 or 10 you can determine to what camera tracks the individual keywords apply Camera allocation The assignment of transaction data to the respective camera tracks is performed via the configuration of the POS ATM Adapter 7 13 6 Adapter You can call up the Adapter dialogue window via the selection menu under the POS ATM IBIS node which is subordinate to Site archive This menu item is only available for devices of the CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer and CamDisc SVR series 188 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual POS ATM IBIS Keywords Adapter M IP Port of all connected adapters Port 5000 Name amp Version IP address Type POS Adapter 2 31 NA719005 192 168 317 176 POS 1 POS Adapter 2 31 NB724003 192 168 31 180 ATM 4 Site archive state Help Port With Port you can set the IP port which your CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer or CamDisc SVR device expects as recorder for establishing the connection Up to ten POS ATM Adapter can be connected with the recorder For a
2. Archiving Recording quality 720 208 RD DU Rt oon A LILI I of Pel 400 y Select the desired image quality for archive video images from the Recording quality drop down list for each camera Remember that high recording quality produces far more detailed images for later evaluation However more detailed images require more storage capacity and a correspondingly longer transmission times for remote access The following table provides an overview of typical storage capacity requirements for the different 176 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual recording qualities of the CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series It will help you find a suitable compromise between image quality storage capacity and transmission time The information refers to operation with fullscreen images Conditional refresh mode not activated Conditional refresh mode allows you to reduce storage capacity requirements considerably Quality and resolution pixel Capacity requirement KB 720 x 288 approx 46 720 x 288 approx 34 512 x 256 approx 23 The average picture size very much depends on image content and video or camera signal quality Images from high resolution cameras with high contrast and detail require more storage capacity than low contrast images with many uniform areas IP cameras When IP cameras record image
3. OK Cancel Help Site archive state Generic GET command 1 User Manufacturer Protocol IP address Date amp Time Connections 1 DYNACOLOR Type Camera settings Camera groups 2 DYNACOLOR gt Type 192 168 35 71 8008 Configure Motion Privacy zones 3 or gt f192 168 31 119 Alarms Site archive 4 DYNACOLOR _ Type 1 192 168 35 74 Configure Audio Bhai 5 GRUNDIG v Type 7 x 192 168 35 76 8008 80 Configure PTZ control Serial channel 6 faxis Type 7 192 168 35 96 Configure Alarm panel al 7 GENERIC 1 gt fo22146 3 2080 Configure xiras maoe Upload Download F 7 62 214 6 3 8080 Configure Fimwareiupdde 8 GENERIC 2 xi Type1 onfigure z 79 255 59 249 HYBRID Card 4 9 for a Ej ali 10 lof f f 62214 6 3 8080 GET cam_5 jpg HTTP1 14rhn rin Generic GET command 2 GET cam_3 jpg HTTP1 1 n rhn On the IP Camera dialogue box you assign a network camera to a video channel and where necessary to the relevant recording track 2 4 or 10 channels will be available depending on the device used In the example a device with 10 channels has been chosen 1 10 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Manufacturer You select the Manufacturer of your IP camera see Supported IP cameras from a pull down menu
4. Camera 4 Adjust zones Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Adjusting zones Clicking Enabled allows you to activate motion detection for individual cameras Click Adjust zones to open the Configure Motion Detection Zones dialogue box containing the live image of the camera in question 150 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Configure Motion Detection Zones E x moa A eet cot Coa ey BAPUUNRNENEERENENANEN Panna aoe nna JR r Active zone Select zones with your mouse e Left click to activate zones Active zones appear in red e Right click to deactivate zones When you select On a green grind i appears on the image One grid field corresponds to one zone field Once you have confirmed the zones with OK only movement in the blue zone will trigger motion events Movements outside the active zones do not trigger events Note If Enabled is not selected the entire image is used for motion detection regardless of the zones selected 7 9 Privacy zones analogue cameras The VG SVR or Cam4mobile series devices and CamServer support the definition of up to five Privacy zones per camera input This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Recorder settings CamDisc HNVR Demo
5. PC Archive Setup Intuitive operation All major functions are clearly organised and easy to use If you have already worked with CamControl LITE then you ll recognise a familiar user interface Multiple simultaneous In standard configuration CamControl PRO allows you to simultaneously connections process up to four different connections to different transmitters in four connection windows and to receive live images pre alarm images an archive image and status information from the CamDisc SVR or CamTel SVR devices for example No alarm is lost even during routine inspections such as carrying out tours By using an appropriate configuration by means of the CAMCTRL INI you can increase the number of simultaneous connection channels to nine The individual connections are displayed in a main window and in additional side windows Central management Although CamControl PRO provides you with a separate control window for each of the four connection channels Port A D shared data and settings are centrally managed In such a way you can clearly save all received images in one receiver archive All the connection channels also share a central transmitter directory which stores telephone numbers or IP addresses reference images and other parameters Main panel In the main panel you can fully control the active transmitter switch cameras select multi image displays control PTZ devices change transmitter configuration and much
6. H a CamDisc svr 4 2 CO500003 H A CamDisc svri0 1 CY500004 H A CamDise svr4 3 CQ500001 H t CamDisc svr4 4 CO500002 H A CamTel svr 10 3 TY500003 47 CamTel svr 4 4 TQ500003 H 1 CamTel svr 4 Kiel TQ516007 lt CamTel svit 1 CY500005 05 09 05 06 09 05 07 09 05 08 09 05 09 09 05 as 2 a CamTel svr10 2 TY500002 He CamTel svr4 3 TO500001 You can select individual calls from a transmitter a selection of calls from a transmitter all the calls from a transmitter on a particular day or all the calls from a transmitter in this dialogue box You can select multiple files for deletion at the same time Just press the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting You then delete the selected files by clicking the Delete toolbar button or by selecting File Delete 5 3 Accessing other archives In addition to being able to access receiver archives created with CamControl PRO you can also edit both CamControl PRO receiver archives and HeiTel export archives It is also possible to access CamDisc SVR archives offline In order to be able to access the removable hard disk drives on the receiver PC you need either an internal or external HDD rack to take the removable hard disk drive You can obtain both articles from HeiTel as accessories a Click the Open individual archive Lar button or select File Load archive to open the backed up archive files export archives and CamDisc archives on removable hard disk drives You cannot open
7. o bil eal So So Camera 10 aay Co EREE PRES EE IEE BES EL RE PRES Ee verg EE IEE EE EE VEE IEE EE VEE EET EE Select the check box directly in front of the camera name to enable the corresponding input and transmit an associated video signal Use only registered inputs for optimum efficiency If a camera input is deactivated no pictures will be recorded for the camera in question and potential video signal failure will not be monitored Enter the name of your cameras in these fields CamControl PRO will use the name entered here as the camera name This name is used to label camera buttons on the central control panel and to allocate images in the archives 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Brightness and contrast Colour CamControl PRO Software Manual Brightness and Contrast can be adjusted in a value range of between 0 and 200 On principle all devices adjust themselves to the video signal received In certain cases however you may need to adjust brightness and contrast to get a satisfactory image quality Select On in the Colour column to transmit and archive the video signal in colour Deselect this option for black and white transmission and archiving Note Black and white operation e Black and white images require less storage space e Video signals from B W cameras should always be transmitted and saved in black and white
8. 3 Mega pixels 4 Mega pixels 5 Mega pixels default setting bile Reducing IPCAMSIZE from 5 to lower values reduces the need for RAM and reduces the load on the processor imposed by the CamControl PRO software Images from IP cameras that exceed the defined maximum size are displayed as plain white images in the Live view These images are available in the Receiver archive See Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 When using more than 9 connection channels with CamControl PRO then it might be required to reduce the IPCAMSIZE value See above to a value smaller than 5 in order to be able to start the software correctly Optimised image display of PAL and NTSC cameras Optimised display of IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 0 optimised image display of PAL and PAL and NTSC NTSC cameras mer ea e Range O default setting 1 variant 1 2 variant 2 The two alternative methods also require processing capacity from the receiver system Variant 1 requires less processing capacity and subjectively gives the better result 27769 02 263 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras Dynamic PTZ control DYNAMICPTZSPEED 1 Dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras for IP cameras e Range O Dynamic PTZ control disabled 1 Dynamic PTZ control enabled default setting 20 404 BOS a Be w Default In general dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras permits dynamic
9. Note Please note that all connection windows share the transparent serial channel For this reason the transparent serial connection always exists between the transmitter active in the main panel of CamControl PRO and the serial terminal connected to the receiver PC If you want a transmitter currently open in a side panel to use the transparent channel all you have to do is switch this transmitter to the main panel by clicking the side panel in question 92 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 6 8 Tours CamControl PRO allows you to automatically dial into certain transmitters at preset times and to receive a configurable number of video images from selected cameras If the receiver archive is active on the PC all the images received are saved In such a way you can automate routine checks and assess the received images at a later point in time You can program up to 100 tours each with up to 100 transmitters in this way Receiver options Tour Options Warning signal Port D 00i M On Time 11 55 M M MT IV w MV Th M F M Sa Ms Time limit of connection fi 0 min Camera 1 2 Camera 2 4 Camera 3 lo Camera 4 fo Camera 5 fi 0 Camera 6 jo Cancel Camera 7 fo Camera 8 fo Camera 9 fo Help Camera 10 fo Configuring tours Warning signal You have the option of having the start of tours notified To do this select Warning signal In addition to acoustic
10. 0 100 Status Exporting pictures Estimated file size Exported pictures 3 Elapsed Time 00 00 31 Available pictures 241 Remaining Time 01 03 25 Actual track 1 Dome Camera Kiel Start export Export settings Configure the following settings to export image sequences 1 Select the file type AVI Clip or Export archive under Target If you select AVI as the export format a preview of the current image being exported is shown If you select the HeiTel export archive the selected image sequence is written to a file that can be accessed as usual with the CamControl PLAYER 2 When exporting AVI files the transmitter name and camera name can also be displayed in the image as additional information To do this click Add on screen information When exporting to the hpx format select the option Create Self Playing archive This will create an executable exe file containing the CamControl PLAYER software for playback 3 Select a compression type when exporting an AVI file 4 Enter the start and end time of the image sequence to be exported under Select export time window If you already set export marks while accessing the archive see Setting export marks for the image sequence on page 73 this range is applied in the Export to file dialogue box 5 Select the cameras to be included in the export if necessary The camera is preselected when exporting from camera tracks When exporting more than one camera track an
11. 0 00 020002 11 At OCE Stat tacks 25 2 Sa aha aca sba Ge nceacst hu a a NN 12 4 2 Starting the program 2c ccc ec cece cece eee e ccc eccecceeceeceeccecceceeees 16 4 3 The Program Interface _ 22 2 l lee c cece eee c cece ec ceceeceeeseeeeeees 17 4 4 Establishing a connection 2 02222 cece cece cece eee c eee eeeceeeeeeeeeees 20 4 5 Software screen displays 0 2 22 c cece eee cee cece eee cee cee cee eeeee 23 4 6 Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer 35 4 7 Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG 2 02 22 cece eee eee cece ee 52 4 8 PTZ control and remote adapter 00aaaa0aaaaa0 cele cece eee cece cece eeeeees 54 4 9 Audiotransmission _ 2 2 2 0 22 e eee cece cece cece eee e cece cece ceecceceececeeseees 60 9 OMMNNG ACCESS 245 4555 s ay ee eee ena ee eee 63 5 1 Receiver archive PC archive 0 0 2 02 c cece cece eee cece cee cece ee ceeeee 63 5 2 Deleting archive files 0 0 0 llc c ccc cece cece cee ccecceccecccecceccecees 14 5 3 Accessing other archives 2 00000000000000000000000 0000000000000 cece ccecerceeces 19 6 Receiver Software Settings _ 00 lec c cece cece cece eee e cee cecceeeeeseeees 77 D AKG a Cai seo ie dee he eae eee Gtte eee e eee leek ee Gees 78 Da Ne aes Saat ee ee 80 Cot Ea teeta eee eee de ee ees ae Sa ee ene a N 81 OA TITCOMMECE 552000 cok sient esetduaduneas bbadasudsats
12. If your PTZ camera has additional functions such as fixed positions automatic camera tours configuration commands or such like you can select these from a list box CamControl PRO automatically opens an operating panel when you select a relevant camera Button panel A button panel with up to 16 buttons can also be configured for special functions this panel is displayed when you select the associated camera You can trigger a variety of remote control commands with these buttons which you can label as you wish Configuring list box and button panel You can configure and customise the list box and button panel using socalled R01 files See Function and structure of R01 files on page 272 2 7 69 _02 57 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 4 8 2 Using the R16 Adapter You have the option of connecting a R16 Adapter to devices in the CamDisc HNVR CamServer CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR series The remote adapter has 16 relays for remotely controlling additional switching functions Button panel Camera 4 Street lights Barrieri down Barrier down A button panel with up to 16 buttons can also be configured for special functions this panel is displayed when you select the associated camera You can trigger a variety of remote control commands with these buttons which you can label as you wish A number of additional functions are also available e Youcan configure different commands for clicking and
13. L The potential free input circuit enables the status input for camera 1 Control in1 to be switched to earth when the momentary switch is closed switch to event recording for the relevant camera track The input is now closed An event is triggered if in the dialogue Recorder settings Site Archive Video 1 in Event recording 1 you set the option Trigger via contact on Normally opened After the event has been processed recording reverts to continuous recording Since ongoing continuous recording for the recording of an event has been interrupted with alarm image and post alarm images no pre alarm images are recorded These images are available as part of long term recording CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer devices are equipped with a timer that can be adjusted for each camera individually In this operating mode images are only recorded at preset times No images will be recorded outside of these times Regardless of this it is still possible to connect to the image archive receive live images access the image archive and change the configuration Timer operating mode can control both event recording and continuous recording Moreover two independent sets of holiday rules can be defined in line with the two holiday types see Date and time on page 126 Timer operation Timer operation is active for every camera track by default You can define recording times a
14. 27769 02 303 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Select Network Adapter ve Click the Network Adapter that matches your hardware then click OK If you have an A installation disk for this feature click Have Disk Manufacturer Network Adapter EIRAS Async Adapter Marvell Gl Remote NDIS based Internet Sharing Device Microsoft Motorola Inc Remote NI ci EQ USB RNDIS Adapter EIEND maimice A ss ompatibdie Device ote E This driver is digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important Step 8 Press Yes on the following dialogue Installing this device driver is not recommended because Windows A cannot verify that it is compatible with your hardware If the driver is not compatible your hardware will not work correctly and your computer might become unstable or stop working completely Do you want to continue installing this driver After successful installation of the driver one can now build up a connection via USB to the HeiTel device 304 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Driver installation in Windows 7 Step 1 CamControl PRO Software Manual Before you connect one of the appropriate HeiTel devices with a USB interface of your receiver PC please install CamControl LITE PRO software version 4 07 or higher Step 2 Switch on your VG device also applies to SVR SVR s HNVR devices and wait until the device is started completely Plug the USB cable in the fr
15. 3 Use the controls to find a suitable image A Refer to the illustrations further above 4 Click on Set image A and then on Height A 27769 02 157 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 5 Drag the reference line to the size of the person in the image or to the size of the reference object respectively 6 Use the controls to find a suitable image B 7 Click on Set image B and then on Height B 8 Drag the reference line to the size of the person or reference object in the image To apply the calibration to the camera click on Accept The dialogue window is closed 7 11 3 Mask zones Mask zones are used to ensure privacy in potentially sensible areas of the video image or to avoid false alarms due to irrelevant parts of the image e g flashing light on screen display of time trees cars etc E LA Intrusion configuration Select camera Selected Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Sp fee Side Entrance f Demo Video 1 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Custom Config Drawing tools Q Q New Area New Mask Mask areas define the regions that will not be processed by the analytics module A maximum of 5 polygon areas can be drawn These areas can overlap Save settings a Calibration Note Th
16. CamControl PRO does not support the direct use of ISDN cards via the CAPI interface With a driver that allows the ISDN card to be accessed via virtual COM ports however you can use your ISDN card to transmit images with CamControl PRO see Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers on page 293 Note When using the Windows Vista operating system please note the following points e If you are using a first generation Audio V2 x Audio Card ina SVR device a TrueSpeech Audio Codec must be installed e When using cFos a software driver version approved for Windows Vista must be used where applicable e f using a Moxa Serial interface where applicable a driver version approved for Windows Vista must be used Recommended software e Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat to display the online help in PDF format see PDF manuals for online help on page 9 27769 02 7 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 3 2 Licensing regulations The purchase of one CamControl PRO entitles installation and operation on one PC workstation see Software Licence Contract on page 329 3 3 Installing the Software Proceed as follows 1 Start Windows 2 Insert the CamControl PRO installation CD into your CD ROM drive The CD starts automatically depending on how Windows is configured 3 Follow the menu structure and from the Installation menu select the CamControl PRO software 4 From the subsequent menu select
17. Configuration of control elements Global switching procedures are configured in a transmitter specific R01 file See Function and structure of R01 files on page 272 4 8 3 1 CIO Adapter relays as global switching elements Relay 1 oe Relay 2 Relay 1 lf a CIO Adapter is connected to the video system the eight ClO Adapter relays are displayed as global switching elements Relay selection Using the dropdown menu you select the relay concerned and switch it using the button below as described above Designation of the relay buttons The standard naming the relay buttons for the CIO Adapter is relay 1 to relay 8 However you can change the naming of the buttons in the R01 file See Variables to rename the relay of the CIO Adapter on page 276 27769 02 59 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 4 9 Audio transmission The SVR devices CamServer and Cam4mobile can be equipped with the optional Audio Card In such a way you can use a push to talk function to converse talk and listen with the object under surveillance simply through a sound card installed in the receiver PC because the bidirectional digital audio signal is transmitted in voice quality For CamDisc HNVR and CamDisc VG HNVR devices audio functionality is implemented in the basic version Duplex audio live audio transmission and audio recording is possible with the use of firmware V1 92 or higher and CamControl PRO V3 92 or hi
18. PTZ control on page 210 PTZ control operation CamControl PRO automatically provides you with easy to use control elements for various remote options 4 8 1 1 PTZ control in full format and zoom view CamControl PRO now also offers direct PTZ control by means of the Windows mouse pointer in the full format and zoom views in addition to the controls in the PTZ window see Classic PTZ control on page 56 i4 CamControl PRO 3 xx CamDisc svri0 1 Hang up View Setup Site Archive Log file Offline Camera 2 Error relay Device armed a GZ 02 01 06 11 24 50 1500 C 542016 CamDisc svr10 1 Online a HeiTel Digital Video GmbH P 02 01 06 11 28 52 0002 Program over by HeiTel Stuthagen 25 PC Archive A 02 01 06 12 13 43 0001 Program started by HeiTel 24113 Molfsee Mouse pointer appearance Offline When you move the mouse pointer over the live image in full format Fullscreen or zoom view the appearance of the mouse pointer changes depending on where it is located e Direction arrows When the mouse pointer is displayed as one of the eight possible direction arrows the connected PTZ camera will be tilted or panned in the indicated direction when the left mouse button is pressed e Z and Z The camera zoom functions are controlled by pressing the left mouse button when these pointers are shown 5A 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Man
19. Please check all settings after the update After the firmware file has been verified successfully you can start the programming of the transmitter by clicking OK Message xl Transmitter will now be programmed Please wait appr 25 sec In exceptional cases the message Transmission error Device is not being programmed will appear during the verification of the firmware file You should still continue the process after the device has restarted automatically you should select the firmware version again to see if your device now reports the correct firmware version see Device on page 122 The device is reset automatically and then restarted The whole process takes several minutes Check the settings after selecting the device again 27 69 _02 231 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 24 Cl Adapter and CIO Adapter The Cl Adapter tab offers you the option where applicable of programming actions for changes of specific control inputs of a connected CI Adapter Control Input Adapter or CIO Adapter Control Input Output Adapter The Cl Adapter menu entry is only displayed if a CI Adapter or a CIO Adapter has been recognised on the serial interface of your device Configuration Serial channel Extending the alarm functions Adjusting to the CIO Adapter 232 In order for the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter to work with your HeiTel transmitter it is necessary to configure the se
20. The current version of CamControl PRO replaces all previous versions The software has been approved for the following Microsoft operating systems Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista and Windows XP 1 1 Guide on how to read this guide This guide for the CamControl PRO software addresses various target groups Operators Operators are generally normal software users They will receive all necessary information in the following sections of this guide e Working with CamControl PRO page 11 e The Program Interface page 17 e Establishing a connection page 20 e Software screen displays page 23 e Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer page 35 e Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG page 52 e Offline Access page 63 Installers Installers require general instructions on handling this application as well as information about the software installation including update and configuration They will receive all necessary information in the following sections of this guide e Installing the Software page 8 e Receiver Software Settings page 77 e Working with CamControl PRO page 1 If additional adjustments are necessary information on INI files additional drivers and supplementary software in section Configuration configuration files and configuration examples on page 253 For more information regarding the programming of the HeiTel devices refer to section Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mob
21. Track division You can define the memory capacity of each track individually Adjust the size using the relevant slider If a track is set to 0 no images at all will be recorded on this track 2 7 69 _02 191 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Note All images stored in the device will be deleted if you change the track division because the image archive will be re initiated Images on tracks that have not been changed will be deleted as well If the total size of all tracks is under or over 100 an error message will be displayed Invalid values 110 4 exceeds 100 As long as maximum capacity has been exceeded you will not be able to close dialogue box by clicking OK You must configure capacity to 100 or below If overall track capacity is under 100 it will not be corrected and your settings will be applied directly To avoid misconfiguration ensure a total track size of exactly 100 Click Default to reset track sizes to the factory settings Number of tracks cameras Default value 7 13 9 Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in Open the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab from the menu under the Site Archive node These menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices You can configure each of the two four or ten camera tracks individually regarding both event and continuous recording Settings include e Defi
22. on page 120 Select Load configuration profile to immediately load saved profile data during an active connection Click OK to apply the modified settings to your device Click Cancel to exit this dialogue box and return to the Recorder settings without applying any changed device settings Save Recorder Settings xX Do you really want to save the new settings Save as configuration profile Cancel Load configuration profile 2 7769 _02 119 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Activating settings Note that some settings will only take effect after the current connection has been terminated or the next time a connection is established Configuration profile for video systems with removable hard drives A stored configuration profile for HeiTel video systems with removable hard drives such as CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile is of special significance Requirements The following minimum requirements apply to the device series mentioned above e Firmware 1 76 or newer e To reset the configuration profile e CamControl PLAYER 3 48 or newer e alternatively CamControl PRO 3 85 or newer or CamControl PRO 3 85 or newer either one with the integrated PLAYER software 3 48 or newer Saving as configuration profile Save the current configuration profile after closing the device parameters in the dialogue box Save Recorder Settings by selecting
23. BN Do you really want bo sek user archive settings All images will be deleted and passwords will be overwritten x Ll r _l Configuration profile successfully written After finishing this procedure the removable hard drive will be close to delivery condition This means that neither a valid configuration profile nor configuration data from previous installations nor valid image data will be found in the given storage medium Note If you access the hard drive with a file browser such as Windows Explorer the file structure of a HeiTel removable hard drive will be displayed If you attempt an evaluation of these archive data with the CamControl PLAYER software you will receive an error message stating that this is nota valid archive file SS t C SK amp 3 File Me W814003 C00 is not a valid archive File You can use a hard drive prepared in this way in other HeiTel video systems with removable hard drives Provided that the device has firmware version 1 76 or newer and a configuration profile has been saved see Saving as configuration profile on page 120 this profile will be used for configuring this hard drive 2 7 69 _02 121 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Note For video systems with device firmware 1 74 or older a stored configuration profile for configuring the recording tracks will not be used Instead the recording tracks will be configured according to the factory set
24. CamControl PRO Software Guide July 2015 Documen t 27769 02 Software Version 4 41 HEITEL by xtralis HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Intellectual Property and Copyright This document includes registered and unregistered trademarks All trademarks displayed are the trademarks of their respective owners Your use of this document does not constitute or create a licence or any other right to use the name and or trademark and or label This documentis subject to copyright owned by Xtralis You agree not to copy communicate to the public adapt distribute transfer sell modify or publish any contents of this document without the express prior written consent of Xtralis Disclaimer The contents of this document is provided on an as is basis No representation or warranty either express or implied is made as to the completeness accuracy or reliability of the contents of this document The manufacturer reserves the right to change designs or specifications without obligation and without further notice Except as otherwise provided all warranties express or implied including without limitation any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are expressly excluded General Warning This product must only be installed configured and used strictly in accordance with the General Terms and Conditions User Manual and product documents available from Xtralis All
25. Enabled Date amp Time H Connections 1 1 BF547 01 02 700 01 701 01 Analogue Video Camera settings Camera groups 2 2 BF547 7 01 02 00 01 01 01 Analogue Video Motion detection zones Privacy zones 3 3 BF54 7 01 02 00 01 01 01 Analogue Video Alarms Site archive 4 4 BF547 01 02 00 01 01 01 Analogue Video Audio i Relays Serial channel EMA Extras Upload Download HYBRID Card 4 2 Function Analogue Video Firmware update Analogue Video IP Camera HYBRID Card 4 Analogue Video Analogue Video Site archive state Help The individual analogue video channels are activated via the HYBRID Card 4 dialogue window Each installed HYBRID Card 4 enables four analogue video channels to be activated HYBRID Card 4 1 With the HYBRID Card 4 correctly initialised for each video channel the DSP information is displayed e g BF547 01 02 00 02 01 00 e If in place of a code similar to this there is only a hyphen displayed it means the DSP in question was not recognised If only a hyphen is displayed for each of the four channels then no expansion card has been installed or the expansion card in question is not correctly installed e The HYBRID Card 4 1 provides DSP support for analogue video channels V1 to V4 on the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR HYBRID Card 4 2 With the HYBRID Card 4 correctly initialised for each video c
26. Help EMA Messages tobe sent Messages to be received Events to be received from GMZ Address fi or joo ings ction zones e to be sent Here you specify the base address of the alarm system in accordance with VdS protocol requirements from which your HeiTel device receives the relevant messages These messages are used to control certain device functions You input the address using hexadecimal values Composition of address Single contact single transmitter Device Address supplement Address sub address On de actyation On Goth In the Enabled column you specify under what conditions this message is to trigger additional functions of the relevant line Off On activation On de activation or On both The standard setting is Off In the Camera column you assign a camera number ranging from 1 to 10 to the individual control inputs to which the triggering of the respective control input refers The camera number is selected via a rocker switch The range of values comprises the number of camera inputs on your image transmitter The standard setting is 1 221 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel CamControlPRO Software Manual ee ssi i i isSCSCSCSC TI by Xtralis Xtralis 222 Alarm Trigger event You allocate presets to the individual control inputs via the Preset column An allocation only makes sense for connected PTZ systems or dome cameras for which the presets have be
27. Popup menu With a right click on the list of transmitters a context sensitive popup menu is opened which may contain the following entries e Add new group e Add new transmitter e Cut checked transmitter Ctrl X e Paste cut transmitter Ctrl V e Add new transmitter to group e LAN device autodetection see Device detection in local area network on page 108 e Show transmitters with equal serial number see Multiple transmitter entries on page 116 Group allocation of existing transmitter data In order to allocate existing transmitter data to the respective groups or to cancel its allocation you have other methods available besides the popup menu 1 Mouse controlled allocation Dial a transmitter with a left mouse click and hold down the mouse button Now drag the transmitter to a position within a group or to a group node and release the left mouse button The transmitter is assigned to this group In order to cancel the allocation of a transmitter to a group 104 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual follow the same steps however position the transmitter outside of a group before releasing the left mouse button 2 Keyboard controlled allocation Using the cursor buttons select a transmitter and cut it using Ctrl X The transmitter symbol is displayed in grey Thereafter using the cursor keys choose the new position and insert the transmitter using Ctrl V Note Within the transmitt
28. Reduce the port speed at the receiver modem Test another type of modem Reset the device to the factory settings Using the null modem connection set the port speed to 115200 baud Before installing the system inform yourself thoroughly regarding the ISDN connection e Which MSN has been assigned for the picture transmission system if applicable e Have all connected data devices been assigned an MSN If the transmitter is operated at a PABX system find out about any peculiarities involved in connecting data devices e Does the device demand the use of an MSN e Must the branch line be released for data communication e Does the system have any other peculiarities 27769 02 325 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Using special commands many ISDN TA s provide you with the opportunity of obtaining exact information regarding aborted dial attempts see TA manual you should also evaluate this information when available Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection No Carrier 1 Incorrect and or defective ISDN or V24 cable Incorrect TA configuration TA not set to Euro ISDN DSS1 Incorrect MSN entered in TA Port speed at the transmitter has incorrectly been set to 230400 baud TA defective or No connection No Answer Connect message black screen No Carrier incorrect Firmware PABX system not configured for data servic
29. e The receiver PC has an ISDN card e The CAPI driver 2 0 included with the ISDN card has been correctly installed e AFossil driver to connect CAPI to virtual serial interfaces has been correctly installed e You have an ISDN connection e The desired transmitters can be reached via ISDN For more information refer to your ISDN card s manual or the Quick Start guide see Dial up connection with internal ISDN card or LAN CAPI quick start on page 13 Operation via serial PC interface modem Configure the serial interface of your PC with the following settings If you contact your transmitters via TCP IP then in the Mode dropdown list select Off This releases the serial interface for other applications Mode The Mode drop down list allows you to specify particular properties for operation via serial interface 88 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Switching off automatic null modem detection Leased line Off Deactivating serial interface Port CamControl PRO Software Manual Mode Hormal Leased line Mullmodem In this mode CamControl PRO automatically detects whether there is a null modem at the selected interface of your PC or not If a null modem cable is detected a connection can be immediately established to the directly connected transmitter device If a modem is connected to your PC and not a null modem cable the receiver software initialises this modem and is then available for dial up connecti
30. 10060 connected to the network Telnet or at MSDOS prompt using the command ping lt TCP IP address Transmitter gt Establish the connection End of Step 2 TCP IP 9 5 4 Error at Transmitter Outgoing Call Step 4 This chapter contains help and instructions in case your transmitter can not call your receiver You should first have checked that your transmitter can be called by the receiver and that your receiver can be called by another transmitter No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue Telephone Networks Please first check your analogue modem at the receiver by calling the receiver with a mobile telephone or a normal telephone Some of the following errors faults can be excluded by making this check Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Call is accepted by 1 Transmitteris setto At the transmitter end and during telephone alarm call is Waiting for outside picture transmission not received by line Enter the AT command X3 in transmitter PABX system the modem init string requires a number tor Enter the dial prefix1 ATD outside line Check the entered telephone l ain CONACH number is a number required EE anS for the outside line i
31. 3 02 Camera settings Camera groups V Listening Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms Line Site archive C Microphone I Speaking Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Download Firmware update OK Cancel Site archive state Help Audio Card with Speex Codec Audio V3 xx or Audio V4 xx The current Audio Card uses a Speex Codec You can identify the model from the version number Audio V3 xx CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices also use a Speex Codec for the integrated audio function The version number Audio V4 xx is displayed Select this option if you want to listen in on the monitored object from your receiver PC e Select the input according to the connected signal source on the HeiTel transmitter choosing between the options Microphone and Line e Ensure that your signal source has been connected according to the output signal either with the Mic or Line in jack These sockets are on the rear of your HeiTel device 206 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Select this option if you want to talk to the monitored object from your receiver PC Selecting both options enables simultaneous listening and speaking push totalk from your receiver PC Note If no Audio Card is installed you will receive the following message instead of the version number No Audio Card installed The Listening and Speaking opt
32. 305 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install diver software manually __ Saneel Step 5 Select Browse and select the subdirectory Drivers which is located in the installation directory of your CamControl LITE software Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location C Users v Browse Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category asthe device Select the fokber that contains drivers for your hardware a J CCLITE d AudioTracks p CasCam J CBLOG d de di DeviceUipdates LD HELPFILES a Install _GPSDataViewer The previously selected subdirectory is now entered as the location Confirm your selection with Next gt Step 6 This dialogue box provides information about the status of the driver installation 306 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Installing driver software If you receive a message regarding the Window
33. 7 6 Camera groups The Camera groups tab allows you to group several camera inputs These camera groups allow you create customised sets of overviews which you can then call up in the central control panel up by mouse click See Changing screen view on page 29 For devices with up to two camera inputs such as CamServer no camera groups are available Maximum number of groups The maximum number of groups depends on the number of camera inputs Number of camera inputs Maximum number of camera groups 27769 02 Recorder settings a a x E 5 E Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Z Download Firmware update OK Cancel Site archive state Help Camera groups Poot Group names 1 Camera 1 2 Camera 2 Group 1 Entrance areas 3 Camera 3 AEA Group 2 Exterior shell 5 Camera 5 E 3 6 Camera 6 Gtoup 3 sia Camera 7 Group 4 Group 4 8 Camera 8 9 Camera 9 Group 5 Group 5 10 Camera 10 147 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Creating camera groups Pol The Pool contains all the cameras not assigned to a Group Group names Creating a group Quadscreen Ten Fullscreen Mainscreen Entrance areas Exterio
34. Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series CamDisc SVR as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile or CamServer logs the most important device states and events in a logfile with a capacity of up to 1 000 entries The oldest entries are automatically overwritten on a FIFO first in first out basis The file is stored on the removable hard disk It can by displayed by CamControl PRO software during an active connection or by CamControl PLAYER software in offline mode Certain logfile entries are system entries and beyond the control of the user Other messages are optional and must be specified in the device settings of CamControl PRO under Recorder settings Extras These messages are identified with Yes in the Optional column of the following table Critical messages are indirectly connected to the error relay and identified with Yes in the Error relay column Logfile entries The logfile entry column contains the messages in plain text and depending on the message additional information identified by square brackets in the table The additional date and time information applies to all entries Each logfile entry therefore starts with D amp T Letters e g x have been used for all other pieces of additional information and are explained in the Description column Logfile command overview General messages D amp T Initialisation of The hard disk was re formatted This was no no hard disk drive either triggered by the corresponding funct
35. CamServer 2c CamServer 2 CamDisc HNVR CamServer VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamTel VG 4 CamTel VG 10 Cam4mobile VG 2c 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s CamDisc VG HNVR ipVG CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx February 2014 Installation of the USB device driver Short description Installation of the USB device driver for use of the USB direct connection Download Current SVR SVR s VG Series Firmware Version http www heitel com en service downloads dir 02 firmware updates 02 firmware updates Download http www heitel com en service downloads dir 01 demosoftware 01 CamControl LITE camcontrol lite 01 demosoftware Demo Version Download http www heitel com en service downloads dir 01 demosoftware 03 CamControl PRO camcontrol pro 01 demosoftware Demo Version 8 9 1 1 Introduction The use of the USB direct connection for connection to the HeiTel devices requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface Depending on the Windows operating system device series and CamControl LITE PRO software version the driver installation can be different Therefore please consider the driver installation instructions that are described in this document 294 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Configuration Start CamControl LITE Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens Now in the Options li
36. Completing the GPS Data Viewer Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing GPS Data Viewer on your computer Click Finish to exit Setup 8 10 1 1 Additional information regarding Google Earth If you chose Google Earth as the map representation during the installation procedure described above it is mandatory that you install the Google Earth application on your CamControl PRO PC Note The licence terms and conditions of use for Google Earth Please consult the relevant software documentation 310 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Possible display problems The Google Earth application accesses data on the Internet and hence requires an Internet connection If display problems occur check the internet connection and the availability of the Google Earth servers 8 10 1 2 Additional information regarding OpenStreetMap If you chose OpenStreetMap as the map representation during the installation procedure the display will take place in a separate program window with the label GPS Data Viewer which can be closed if necessary together with the CamControl PRO software Note The licence terms and conditions of use for OpenStreetMap Please consult the relevant software documentation Possible display problems The OpenStreetMap application accesses data on the Internet and hence requires an Internet connection If display problems occur check the internet connection and the availability of the following
37. E Mail HTconnect M HT connect only TCP IP Port 2333 Port 3000 and Port 80 are already in use IP address 1 IP address 2 connect Camera settings IP address 3 Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones H Alarms Site archive Audio Relays IP address 4 www yourdomain com IP address 5 192 168 131 79 PTZ control Cancel Site archive state Help e Check whether the Port number for the leased line corresponds with the settings specified in Step 1 The standard setting is Port 3333 112 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e Using the On option activate the receivers to which a leased line is to be established by the transmitter e The address entries for IP address 1 to IP address 4 cannot be changed in this configuration menu since these addresses are transferred from the menu Recorder settings Connections Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 e The only freely selectable address is IP address 5 Step 3 Modify an existing transmitter entry or create an entry for the corresponding transmitter The dialogue box Transmitter index is accessed via Port 1 Transmitter index and then either via the Modify button for existing entries or via Add for new entries e Complete the entries and activate the HT connect option in the Serial number section The serial number can now be edited Transmitter index i x
38. If you are using a DNS service you may enter a symbolic address here For the system to recognise the entry as asymbolic IP address the address must be set in quotation marks e g Www your_domain com The IP addresses of your DNS service must be entered in the Network TCP IP tab see Network TCP IP on page 129 For network alarms you can complete the alarm call number by adding a port number Here the port number must be separated from the alarm call number by a colon Phone number IP address f 92 168 31 66 3001 a your_domain com 10000 Please ensure that symbolic addresses are enclosed in quotation marks and that the port number is then added outside the quotation marks separated by a colon 139 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 140 Alarm by ISDN If the internal ISDN card is built into your device you can choose connection between two independent methods of transmission If you have connected an external modem ISDN TA in addition to the internal ISDN TA see Internal ISDN TA Modem on page 137 it must be possible to differentiate between the two transmission paths So that the transmitter can determine which path to use to dial telephone numbers insert a small i or capital I in front of the number to be dialled by the internal adapter If an external modem ISDN TA is not connected you don t need to identify the number in this way Alarm by network Sending an alarm to
39. Image transmission via network LAN 100 MBit s TCP IP Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Image size 20 Approximately 512000 bytes of image data per second are received over kilobytes 25 images s a network connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 512000 bytes s 600 s 292 97 MB Network connection Image transmission via network LAN 100 MBit s TCP IP Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Image size 5 kilobytes 25 images s Approximately 128000 bytes of image data per second are received over a network connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 128000 bytes s 600 s 73 24 MB 27769 02 85 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis ISDN connection PSTN connection Image transmission via ISDN 1 B channel Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Approximately 8000 bytes of image data per second are received over an ISDN connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 8000 bytes s 600 s 4 8 MB Image transmission via PSTN analogue telephone line Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Approximately 3000 bytes of image data per second are received over a PSTN connection
40. Privacy zones p Device User Date amp Time Camera name Active Privacy zones E Connections Camera settings 1 PTZ Camera Always v Adjust zones L Camera groups E Motion A Cry trotamed IB 3 Privacy zones 2 Main Entrance Only if not armed v djust zone E Alarms H Site archive 3 Xtralis Building Off after alarm until disarm Adjust zones Audio i Relays PTZ control 4 Xtralis Parking Always x djust zone Serial channel i E Alarm panel Log Be 5 PTZIP cam backyard Always Adjust zo Extras j Upload Download 6 PTZ Strecke 1 aways sf Adjust zor Firmware update JE aE IP Camera HYBRID Card 4 7 Always jjust zone PIR 8 Always Adjust zo OK o Coed e bar z O Adutzones e Site archive state 10 aways gt jjust zo Help The privacy zones function can work in three different modes Always Means the adjusted zones are active at any time e Only if not armed Means in case the device is armed the privacy zones are deactivated Off after alarm until disarm The complete image is visible after an alarm until device is disarmed 2 7 69 _02 151 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Configuring Privacy After selecting a camera to configure by clicking Adjust zones the zones Configure Privacy Zones window opens Defining zones Privacy z
41. Soyal Card Reader in conjunction with a HeiTel video system on page 215 The IBIS and Soyal parameters are only available for data track 1 Track size Via Track size you can perform a percentage distribution of memory available for the transaction data and thus carry out an individual assignment for the specific tracks Regardless of the device type of the digital frame recording system by HeiTel 150 MB of hard disk capacity is reserved for the transaction data e VG video systems All video gateways of the VG Series reserve one percent of their hard disk capacity for transaction data e SVR video systems Irrespective of the device type of the digital frame recording system from HeiTel 150 MB of hard disk capacity are reserved for transaction data The sum of individual tracks must not exceed 100 as the track distribution would otherwise be reset to the device specific standard value per track 27769 02 185 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Cam4mobile VG 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4c CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamServer 2 CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamServer 2c CamServer VG 4c Cam4mobile 4 Cam4mobile 10 CamServer 2 CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc HNVR 10 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10 CamDisc SVR 10s Number of 4 4 10 2 tracks Standard 25 25 10 50 value per track Note For changes to the track division of the POS ATM IBIS archive the archive
42. Sum of individual camera values for x e Only camera 1 x 1 e Camera 1 and 2 x 3 e Camera 1 to 4 x 15 e Camera 1 to 10 x 1023 e Inthe event of changes to the presets a corresponding entry in CAMCTRL INI may need to be added PTZ control via USB joystick PTZ control via USB JOYSTICK 1 Joystick PTZ control disabled joystick CamControl RU e Range O Off disabled default 1 On enabled for joystick 1 2 On enabled for joystick 2 e Inthe basic configuration PTZ control via USB joystick CamControl RU is disabled Red frame In multi image displays Quadscreen 10 image camera group in the software triggered camera alarm inputs are indicated by a red frame around the triggered camera image Using the following parameters you control the conditions under which the red frame should be displayed Red frame REDFRAME 1 red frame in multi image displays e Range O only display red frame for armed video systems 1 always display red frame default e Inthe basic configuration the red frame is shown regardless of whether the video system is armed disarmed 262 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Upper limits for the display of live images from IP cameras Upper limits for the IPCAMSIZE 5 display of live images Defines the upper limit for the display of live images from IP cameras from IP cameras in mega pixels e Range 1 1 Mega pixel 2 Mega pixels
43. e Close the text editor e Restart the receiver software Note Once you have saved the configuration file CAMCTRL INI you must restart the receiver software for the changes to take effect 8 2 3 Overview of modifiable keys PORT Specify port number for TCP IP FASTMODE Deactivate operating mode FASTMODE ONLPLPORT Specify TCP IP port for Online PLAYER 254 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Section key peeo PORTA B C D MAXONLINETIME Specify maximum connection duration 5 6 7 8 9 NONULLMO Deactivate automatic null modem detection in Normal operating mode Archive individual calls in FIFO mode A m O O vy U TYPE Specify connection type NIGA for the respective connection channels A_ ALARMS Specification of the acceptance of an incoming alarm call for the respective port No relevance for CamControl PRO Specification of outgoing calls initiated via command for the respective port A REMOTE No relevance for CamControl PRO Specification of outgoing patrols initiated via command for the respective port A_AUTOALARMENABLE ARCHIV SNAPSHOTPATH EXTRA AUTODISCONNECT No relevance for CamControl PRO Specification of arm disarm function initiated via command Specify the directory path for saving pictures from the transmitter archive Deactivate automatic disconnection in the event of an alarm a gt Cc a O A m Z O m REFIMAGEWIDTH Specify the size a
44. of the CamDisc HNVR IP addresses are assigned to the two network interfaces Ethernet 10 100 MBit s 192 168 31 95 e IP Camera 10 100 1000 MBit s 192 168 32 95 An adapted Network TCP IP dialogue box takes into account the two network interfaces of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR j x Network TCP IP Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai 4l gt 100 MBit 00 03 1d 03 1d cf 1 GBit 00 30 26 d9 00 be J Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP address 19 116 Subnet Mask 25 425 Gateway 19 116 Pim Obtain DNS server address automatically DNS Server 1 i a2 a a4 DNS Server 2 1 A 2 N 3 _14 Maxi t at Maximum transmission speed gt 400 KB s 3 13 MBit s x Maimun ea 9 MBit s JV Web Server Automatic disconnect after 30 min x Port eo V Web API JV LAN auto detection support 100 MBit and 1 GBit You select the interface to be programmed via the 100 MBit the Ethernet device network interface and 1 GBit the IP Camera device network interface buttons The relevant MAC address for the network interface in question is also displayed For the interface selected you can select the Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP option or set the parameters manually for IP address and Subnet Mask For a detailed explanation of these parameters please refer to the previous section see Network TCP IP
45. on page 129 Global network The other network parameters such as Gateway Port DNS Server 1 parameters DNS Server 2 Maximum transmission speed Web Server Automatic disconnect after Web API and LAN autodetection support are configured globally for both network interfaces The Obtain a DNS server address automatically option can only be enabled if for at least one network interface the option Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP was enabled see 100 MBit and 1 GBit on page 133 For a detailed explanation of these parameters please refer to the previous section see Network TCP IP on page 129 27769 02 133 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 4 2 Wireless WAN Open the Wireless WAN dialogue window from the menu under the Connections node If necessary you can configure an internal WAN card via Wireless WAN This option is currently only available for the CamServer VG 4c with 3G 4G module and the CamDisc Cam4mobile VG 4c with 3G 4G module This device is equipped with an internal 3G 4G module fora WAN connection 3G 4G programming The 3G 4G modem manufacturer and type will appear in the upper status window In addition you will be notified whether a connection to the provider exists The graphic below shows information on the signal quality and or the power level Recorder settings x Network TCP IP Wireless WAN Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconne
46. one of these entries also starts dialling the transmitter in question See Dialling into a transmitter on page 97 20 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Direct connection If your transmitter is connected directly to the receiver PC by means of the special null modem cable or a dedicated line the Transmitter index does not appear Once you click the relevant Port button the process of establishing a connection starts immediately Dedicated line If the transmitter is connected via a dedicated line and the receiver software is correspondingly configured an attempt is made to establish a connection every 20 seconds even if the relevant Port button has not been clicked see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 4 4 2 Automatic tours CamcControl PRO allows you to access certain transmitters automatically at preset times in one of the connection windows and to receive a configurable number of video images from selected cameras You also have the option of receiving acoustic and visual notification when a tour is carried out Tours are controlled automatically If you move the tour from a side panel to the main panel the Manual button in the main control panel gives you back full control of the procedure Note Once you switch to manual operation you have to carry out all aspects of operation including establishing a connection You cannot switch back to automatic operation Tours
47. s If the relay is to operate as a Momentary specify how long the relay is to be switched before it reverts to idle Note If you require more than two relays the optional R16 Adapter offers an 16 additional relays for your HeiTel device 27769 02 209 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 16 PTZ control The devices have an internal PTZ control system for controlling an external device via CamControl PRO see PTZ control and remote adapter on page 54 The following requirements must be met e Your external device is supported You can find a constantly expanding list of supported devices on our website or in the product guide e Your external device is correctly connected to the transmitter unit For more information refer to your product guide This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 x PTZ control Device User Date amp Time l Connections LOADER Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Sensormatic 1 00 Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays Serial channel Video out Extras Update internal PTZ control Upload 7 Download Firmware update Cylindercamera 1 02 No control file R01 installed OK Cancel V Update control file R01 Site archive state Deactivate PTZ Help Update internal PTZ Select this option to transmit t
48. see CIO Adapter relays as global switching elements on page 59 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Configuring the link In addition to giving an alarm for external camera control inputs or motion between internal detection under the specified conditions a combination of camera alarm motion detection and inputs or inputs to the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter and to the internal camera control inputs motion detection can result For more information on this topic please refer to the section Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs on page 168 Recorder settings CI Adapter User 1 Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms W Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out H EMA Extras Upload Download Firmware update Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene IP Camera OK Cancel Site archive state Help Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Mn eS Ss SS as Ss es es J alol Normally opene Normally opene zi By adding more alarm functions t
49. see User on page 80 the user will be prompted for their user name and password when a connection is being established CamControl PRO will not establish a connection if a non registered user or a wrong password is entered User name Password Cancel Help Note The user is logged on automatically if the user logged on in CamControl PRO is set up in the User Management of the device User password This entry field allows you to define a password for the user max length 10 characters You must re enter your password in the Password confirmation box for verification If your entries do not match an appropriate message will be displayed when you click OK Note If using HeiTel video systems internationally refrain where necessary from using country specific special characters for user name and password 27769 02 123 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Define the term of validity of user passwords All devices of the VGseries and also the CamTel SVR CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs CamServer Cam4mobile and CamDisc HNVR series user passwords with a limited term of validity can be defined minimum requirement Firmware 1 88 CamControl PRO 3 88 The validity of the user passwords is monitored by the device A relevant note is displayed once after every connection where applicable see Warning window on expiry of a password s term of validity on page 124 Password expires af
50. therefore be specified in the following column Alarm enable input A change was detected on the Al a d alarm enable input HDD error The HeiTel device all except CamTel SVR CamTel VG has detected a hard drive error Note These events represent the appropriate device functions in the manner usual for the device You may need to enable the specific device function For CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices without HYBRID Card 4 all messages listed above can be programmed Specific messages such as Motion and Camera position authentication may not be performed because the device does not have the relevant functions Camera In the Camera column the relevant camera must always be specified for all camera specific events such as Motion Video loss or Camera input 220 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 19 2 Messages to be received Your alarm system communicates with the HeiTel device via Messages to be received Individual alarms are selected from a list of possible events that were communicated via the VdS 2465 protocol You can define a maximum of 40 messages to be received x Address Enabled Camera 27769 02 Device User Date amp Time H Connections Camera sett Camera groups Motion dete Privacy zones E Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out EMA Messag Extras Upload Download Cancel Site archive state
51. transmitted per image and the lower the refresh rate Select a suitable quality level to achieve the appropriate balance between refresh rate and image quality For IP cameras the Live transmission quality cannot be programmed because the images supplied are transferred in the original resolution This option is not enabled for these cameras In the drop down lists for Groups Quad and Ten you can select the desired resolution and quality for the various multiple image views as per the live cameras images The same principle applies here The higher the transmission quality the greater the amount of data to be transmitted per image and the lower the refresh rate 141 CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 4 7 E Mail Conditional refresh mode IP cameras HeiTel by Xtralis Select On if you want the live images to be transmitted in conditional refresh mode Conditional refresh mode only requires the differences between successive images to display the full image In many cases only parts of a scene changes Certain areas of the image such as a background wall do not change at all or only very little e g due to changes in lighting This reduces the size of the image considerably which in turn may increase transmission speed by up to twice as much in some cases When transferring images from IP cameras the following conditions apply e CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Images are transferred depending on the progr
52. 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 Sa a 00099 Text amp price search Date amp time search Date 22 12 2005 z Time 16 50 50 Syncronization E Update picture from receipt C Update receipt from picture Enter the Date of the search start or select it using the calendar function You can enter the Time of the search start in hours minutes and seconds using the buttons next to the time input box or using the keyboard Click Search to start the search The first sales receipt recorded after the specified search start is returned If there are no sales receipts after this specified time the last most recent sales receipt recorded is returned You can navigate the search result using the toolbar buttons First receipt Previous receipt Next receipt and Last receipt 41 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 42 Text amp price search POS data Transaction data of camera 1 k x Transaction data Date amp time lt 4 EF 22712705 17 14 Order 0519 22 12 2005 1 Nails 2 59 22 12 2005 1 Cake 1 79 22 12 2005 1 Cake 1 79 22 12 2005 1 Beer 14 89 22 12 2005 1 Water 11 59 22 12 2005 1 Beer 14 89 22 12 2005 1 Nails 2 59 22 12 2005 1 CamDisc 4213 39 22 12 2005 1 Screws 14 95 a at 00 Text amp price search Date amp time search Time window r Search parameter Start t Came Date V Price gt 999 21703 2005 v i M 2 Operator02 Time 0
53. A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 3000 bytes s 600 s 1 8 MB Archiving individual calls in FIFO mode In CamControl PRO s default configuration video images received are saved from the start of the connection until the maximum file size for individual archives is reached When the maximum size of the archive is exceeded then those video images received at the start of the connection are kept and those images received last are no longer saved due to the size restriction FIFO mode Particularly for dedicated lines it may be desirable to archive individual calls in FIFO mode so that the oldest pictures are gradually overwritten when the maximum size of the archive file is reached You can also activate this mode for the individual connection channels separately if necessary in the CamControl PRO configuration file CAMCTRL INI see Archiving individual calls in FIFO mode on page 258 86 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 6 6 Port Ato Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 CamControl PRO can establish a connection to HeiTel devices through various communication paths e Network TCP IP protocol also Internet via network card or remote data transmission network e Internal ISDN card or CAPI sharing over the network using Fossil drivers only in both cases through virtual serial interfaces e Serial interface COM
54. AVI files in the access program Backing up data If you want to back up the entire receiver archive permanently you can do so in three ways e Copy the archive file to another directory or drive see Updating the Software on page 8 e Rename the archive files in Windows Explorer e Give the archive a different name under Receiver options PC Archive see Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 Exiting the archive Click the Close button in the toolbar or select Close from the File menu to exit the receiver archive The receiver software is opened automatically after the access software is closed 27 69 _02 19 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 76 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 6 Receiver Software Settings You can configure CamControl PRO to suit your application in the receiver side settings You can specify the response to incoming alarms configure the receiver archive add users and much more When image transmission is not running offline click iia in the lower control panel to open Receiver options _ CamContra PRO diam are kaprina ATD 2906 10 06210515 000 Prerana i 290 Oe Coe Galie ELL 1 Grina PE Arhive 21 08 10 0649 13 Oe Program ever 0509 10 019535 000 ogra shorted Setup LF E A OL z oote Pres an ower l WE DA 1 iai iii ran started 050A 10 Di n Z Prerana _ Chose da
55. Adapter Input combined via logical OR The camera control input and CI Adapter CIO Adapter input depending on first and second trigger level e The recording control remains unchanged and is not influenced by expanding the alarm functions e In order for a combined alarm from motion detection and signal input to occur the motion detection see Motion detection on page 171 must be activated and configured for the camera channel in question e The option of alarms from a combination of motion detection and signal inputs is not available for IP Cameras e Motion detection as an individual function can only be used in Alarm or Off mode In combination with signal inputs the motion detection for the modes Entry Exit Arm delay and Fire Panic Continuous armed are considered for relevant configurations Configuring camera control inputs From CamControl PRO software V3 85 on the dialogue box Camera control inputs has been redone as a result of the expansion of alarm functions Compared to the previous diagram the camera name has been removed The first unlabeled column gives information on the number of cameras made available by the HeiTel video system that is being used Depending on the device used 2 4 or 10 camera inputs can be configured Trigger level In the Trigger level column select between the options Normally opened and Normally closed default setting a change in this condition may trigger an alarm 2776
56. BS 8418 Besides the conventional wiring of the following control inputs as normally closed contact and normally open contact CamServer 2c and the video systems of the VG series also support the voltage monitored circuit variants resistance monitoring 10k and the BS 8418 compliant normally closed contact For more information refer to section Specification of the control inputs on page 312 Control and monitoring functions Every camera control input designation on the video system Control in 1 to Control in 10 if applicable can independently trigger receiver dial up CamcControl PRO reports this alarm cause in the event tree See Event tree on page 22 in the bottom control panel and automatically activates the corresponding camera 27 69 _02 167 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Alarm triggering video If there is no active connection to a receiver a video image from the image relevant camera is recorded for CamTel VG and CamTel SVR transmitters when a camera control input is enabled This alarm image will be transmitted first if the transmitter subsequently establishes an alarm connection to a receiver that was triggered by this camera control input or the alarm input In the case of CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices recording with an active camera control input depends on the
57. CamControl PRO and then decide the language you want to install the software in 5 Activate installation by clicking OK 6 Click Next to start installation 7 Accept the suggested target folder for installation or specify a different folder of your choice by clicking Next 8 Specify the Start menu folder by clicking Next 9 Confirm selection of other details by clicking Next 10 The installation program provides you with an overview of all selected options Click Install to start the installation process The individual components will be installed on the computer 11 Click Finish to conclude installation Uninstalling the software There are two ways to remove the program from the computer e Click Start and select Programs CamControl PRO Uninstall CamControl PRO or select the path you chose during installation Programs Yourname Uninstall CamControl PRO e Remove the program installation in the Add or Remove Programs item of the Control Panel Starting the software You can start the program from the Start menu by selecting Programs CamControl PRO CamControl PRO or by selecting the path you chose during installation Programs Yourname CamControl PRO Alternatively you can start the program by double clicking the icon on your desktop if you chose to add an icon to your desktop during installation 3 4 Updating the Software Before installing an update it is recommended that you back up the receiver archive and the configuration fil
58. CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices and HeiTel VG VideoGateways the settings for transmission are made independently of those for archiving See Video settings on page 176 Recorder settings Device User Date amp Time Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Internal ISDN T4 Mode Phone amp IP numbers E Mail HTconnect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Cancel Live quality for multi view Conditional refresh Groups Quad Ten Fo Site archive state 512 256 512 256 256 128 x a Help x Network TCP IP External modem IntemalISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_ gt Camera name Live transmission quality Camera 1 720 288 x s Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 720 288 Camera 5 720 288 Camera 6 720 268 Camera 720 288 Camera 8 i 720 288 l Camera 9 j ZEN Camera 10 720288 Live transmission quality Live quality for multi view 27769 02 For each camera you can select seven levels of image quality for live image transmission from the Live transmission quality drop down list The preset value is the quality 720 288 The higher the transmission quality of the video images the greater the amount of data to be
59. CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices You can configure the recording resolution and quality individually for each camera You can also specify whether you want to record in conditional refresh mode For CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 you can only program the Conditional refresh option see Conditional refresh on page 177 Note Archiving settings are made independently of transmission settings for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices see Live video settings on page 141 Recorder settings T x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Device User Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Camera name Recording quality Camera 1 720 288 Camera 2 i 720 268 Camera 3 720 208 Camera 4 720 208 Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Passwords HDD Camera 5 720 288 E POS A amp TM Audio Track settings Camera 6 720 288 E Wideo 1 in H Video 2 in Camera 7 720 288 E Video 3 in J H Wideo 4 in Camera 8 720 288 Wideo 5 in Camera 9 720 288 b OK Camera 10 720 288 s Cancel Conditional refresh Bf 2U 200 MV On Site archive state Help
60. CamServer on page 175 in the Recorder Settings drop down menu allows you to modify the archive settings of the CamDisc SVR device e Please note that this menu item is not available for CamTel SVR devices which have pre alarm storage instead see Pre alarm CamTel VG and CamTel SVR only on page 164 In terms of configuration the Cam4mobile devices behave like the CamDisc SVR models in that they also have a removable hard drive The CamServer 2 devices have a permanently installed hard drive for local image archiving and are only available with two camera inputs The CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices differ greatly from the previous devices in the SVR series e Inthe basic system these devices are designed for image recording by an IP camera on up to ten camera tracks e The use of an optional HYBRID Card 4 allows four camera tracks per device to be used to record analogue camera signals A maximum of two of these extension cards per CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR can be used If a CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR is used without HYBRID Card 4 all of the settings options relating to the use of analogue cameras will be missing Starting transmitter configuration Heilel DIGITM4 amp l IOEO Hang up View setup Site Archive Log file First establish a connection to your transmitter Switch to the main panel if necessary Then click setup 2 7 69 _02 117 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtra
61. Configure Yes No M On Serial channel Video out x E gt 7 Configure Yes No On 8 Configure Yes No M On 9 Configure No No M Gn Cancel Site archive state Configure No No M Gn Help New reference image Camera 1 x J Examine current image Lo Reference image 1 e g by day Reference image 2 e g by night Applicable Yes Applicable No Store Store Close Click the button Configure in the column New reference image to open a camera specific configuration dialogue for the camera position authentication If you activate the option Examine current image the live image of the selected camera is examinded every two seconds for camera position authentication applicability The applicability is shown as a percentage The indicated percentage is only an evaluation of the current scene at a given point in time The 4x2 matrix symbolises the eight detection areas of the video image According to the current analysis the individual fields of the matrix are marked in different colors in certain circumstances 2 7 69 _02 173 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis e Red Red fields are used to mark image areas that are not applicable to the camera position authentication check e Yellow Yellow fields are used to mark image areas that provide a low but sufficient number of usable edges for vector analysis These areas are only applicable to the camera positi
62. Entry an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful disarming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered camera control input as the reason for the alarm Arming When the monitored area is exited Exit an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful arming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered camera control input as the reason for the alarm Note that for multiple camera control inputs to monitor the armed disarmed area the configuration for the signal inputs in question must be configured appropriately 170 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Linked with Motion By activating the On option in the Linked with Motion column the camera control inputs are linked via a logical AND with the device internal motion detection for interior spaces see Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs on page 168 Only when the motion detection see Motion detection on page 171 has already been activated for the camera channel in question is it possible to activate this option If this is not done the option On remains inactive and is greyed out So that a connection can be established to your receiver if the camera control inputs change status you must save the telephone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 7 12 5 M
63. EtV GmbH cmds O Hayes prot L0ex 75 isdn O DSoL PLCS 2 ecus il Cded 1 Cders 2 Caors g bsize 2048 start 1 dbibe g sbauss J precy O brs 6 115200 or O adaptive A s bee g9 90 dres O ble 2 2 AORE 7 Function Description O dial hayespar Export content of adapter register 002B0D0A08031E010400 8 8 3 Installing and using ISDN cards If you are using an internal ISDN card instead of or in addition to external ISDN terminal adapters a CAPI driver is installed Your operating system accesses the ISDN resources through this CAPI driver Programs configured to use internal cards also use the CAPI interface to communicate with these devices CamControl PRO does not support the direct use of ISDN cards via the CAPI interface With a driver that allows the ISDN card to be accessed via virtual COM ports you can also use your ISDN card to transmit images with CamControl PRO see Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers on page 293 Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers CamControl PRO currently does not support the direct use of internal ISDN cards via CAPI With a driver that allows the ISDN card to be accessed via virtual COM ports it is easy to use your ISDN card for image transmission with CamControl PRO Even if these COM ports don t really exist as hardware they can be configured and used in the same way as normal serial interfaces A tried and tested software solution is the use of the F
64. For calibration either position a reference object near to and far from the camera or ask a person to assist with the calibration and to move from image position A to B during calibration Calibration can be carried out using the live video or a recording 7 11 2 1 Calibration using live video To calibrate using the live video and a person proceed as follows Click the Live video button to display the live video When the person is clearly visible at the close position click on Set image A and then on Height A Drag the reference line to the size of the person in the image see figure above After the person has moved to the position far from the camera click on Set image B and then on Height B Now drag the reference line to the size of the person in the image see the below figure Calibration A Unit of measure Metres Height of object 1 9 x Live video To apply the calibration to the camera click on Accept The dialogue window is closed 7 11 2 2 Calibration using video recording In the Recording panel of the dialogue window the following controls are available for recording and playing back video sequences p 00 25 01 07 Position display with slider Using the mouse the slider can be dragged to the desired position Proceed as follows when calibrating using a video recording 1 Click on the Record button to start recording 2 Complete the recording by clicking on the Record button again
65. ISDN TA It is also possible that the ISDN connection is not a basic connection and is configured for telephone systems direct inward dialling with two or three numbers In this case the ISDN TA can only be operated via the telephone system Checking transmitters with ISDN TA PPX PP2 PPP or integrated Incorrect MSN Incorrect initialisation Once you are using a TA PPX TA PP2 or TA PPP on the receiver PC side you can remotely configure all of the terminal adapters listed above in use on the transmitter side This also includes all HeiTel devices with internal ISDN card For example you assign MSNs and configure the protocol to X 75 in this way Proceed as follows e Connect the ISDN TA to the PC and establish a connection using a terminal program e g the terminal software located on the installation CD e Dial into the transmitter with the command ATDnnnnnnE n call number e Once successfully connected confirm the password prompt with Enter The version number of the adapter is then automatically displayed Once a connection has been established several commands are available These are described in detail in the ISDN adapter manual The following functions are described in the following Function Description msn Query set MSN reset Reset ISDN TA Automatically reset ISDN TA every x minutes 292 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual TATPPP VowZ24o ec Copyrazghn Stolilmann
66. If individual regulations within this contract are ineffective this does not result in the rest of the contract being ineffective The parties agree to replace the ineffective agreement with a legally valid regulation that comes as close as possible to the intended and economic reason of the ineffective regulation The same also applies when gaps in the contract requiring to be filled arise in the execution of the contract No oral agreements exist in addition to this contract Changes and additions to this contract must be made in writing 27769 02 331 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 332 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 11 Addendum For late breaking information that could not be included in the manual at the time of printing refer to the Hei Tel Internet pages www heitel com under Service Downloads There you may download the complete CamControl PRO Software History http www heitel com upload downloads en 01 demosoftware 03 camcontrol pro sh_cc_pro_gb paf 27769 02 333 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 334 27769 02 www xtralis com UK and Europe 44 1442 242 330 D A CH 49 431 23284 1 The Americas 1 781 740 2223 Middle East 962 6 588 5622 Asia 86 21 5240 0077 Australia and New Zealand 61 3 9936 7000 A Disclaimer about this document statements about Intellectual Proper
67. Information Entrance area September 4th 2005 06 17 55 Security firm disarms alarm system Configure Add on screen information Print Cancel CamControl PRO allows you to add more information in the Print options dialogue box that subsequently opens Add on screen information includes camera name number and transmitter name serial number on the image to be printed You can also include up five lines of additional text on the image printout by selecting Add user information in the Printer options dialogue box Clipboard Select Picture Copy to clipboard or click the Copy picture to clipboard toolbar button if you want to copy and paste the current individual image into another program If you want to check the authenticity of the image later the archive image must be saved as an image file with the archive access software Checking individual images for authenticity Authenticity check for individual images When you save individual images with CamControl PRO CamControl PRO or CamControl PLAYER a checksum is included in the picture file You can check the authenticity of these images with the archive access software 70 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual x r ee er ii i Br l cado 10 30 09 CH EE g riches coe 4 m We ee ges _ vail on of wie in d Check image Cancel To open the dialogue box for checking individual images select Tools
68. On a Propam started m Fir for hep mon of e Take call Response to incoming calls alarms as discussed on page 78 e User User configuration as discussed on page 80 e Extras Additional functions as discussed on page 81 e HTconnect Configuration of the HTconnect function as discussed on page 83 e PC Archive Receiver archive configuration as discussed on page 84 e Port A to Port D Configuration of communication settings for the individual ports as discussed on page 87 e Serial channel Configuration of the transparent channel as discussed on page 92 e Tours Program automatic calls to various transmitters as discussed on page 93 e Configure transmitter index Maintain transmitter list and supplement reference images as discussed on page 96 You can make a few additional settings in the CamControl PRO configuration file CAMCTRL INI see Program parameters CAMCTRL INI on page 253 Further functions for selected transmitters can be configured in the R01 and R02 files see Transmitter specific configuration files starting on page 271 Note If the Setup button is not available grey the current user does not have system access see User on page 80 27769 02 77 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 1 Take a call In the Take call dialogue box you can adjust CamControl PRO s response to incoming calls and alarms in line with your application Receiver options m Automatic operation Opti
69. Preset commands of IP cameras can be configured via Recorder settings IP Camera Configure Number of Resets Normally the software will use preset 1 up to the chosen number max 16 If other presets are requested they can be configured via the r01 file that is created automatically in the subfolder RMCTRL using the device serial number as name If the lt SWNUMx gt entry ends with a number between sqaure brackets this number will be used as preset number This allows to reach special functions that often are accessible by higher preset numbers The preset number must consist of three numbers e g 008 021 If there is no number in square brackets the preset number corresponds to the usual numbering Example SF990101 R01 CAM 1 SWNUM 4 SWNAME 1 Light on 098 SWNAME2 Light off 099 SWNAME3 Wiper 081 SWNAME4 Preset 4 252 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 Configuration configuration files and configuration examples The following sections contain information on additional configuration options using program and transmitter specific configuration files The configuration of various data transmission devices will also be explained by means of examples 8 1 Overview of the used IP Ports If when configuring the Recorder settings the option to change the address of IP ports exists Network TCP IP page 129 HTconnect page 145 Web Server page 131 POS ATM Adapter page 188 and A
70. Reference images Transmitter name Erone svr 10 1 IP address Phone number dial pretis fi 32 168 31 170 3000 f Frefis 7 CPI f Pretiz 2 Serial number jevea7on 5 f HTconnect Usemame amp password Auto passwords Username OK Cancel Help eee e If you are changing an existing transmitter entry check whether the serial number noted down previously in Step 2 matches the existing entry e Foranew entry enter the serial number previously noted down in Step 2 in the corresponding field e Complete entry by clicking OK 6 9 6 2 General information about HT connect Please take note of the following information regarding HT connect e All connections to transmitters which have been configured in the manner described above have been initiated by the respective transmitter as a standing connection However for the user these alarm connections present themselves as receiver calls Under some circumstances the details may deviate from a regular receiver call e CamControl PRO does not support any tours for transmitters connected to the receiver software via HT connect e Transmitters connected via HT connect are not automatically switched to the current selection window when selected manually but rather to the first free connection window Upon starting the connection an HTconnect connection is always displayed in the main window e During this quasi receiver dialling in exception
71. Software Manual Choosing between Google Earth and OpenStreetMap map display HeiTel by Xtralis Starting with CamControl PRO software V3 85 the control elements described below for the extended GPS window are deactivated for a new installation of the CamControl software and are greyed out If with the installed CamControl PRO software you want to use the additional control elements from the GPS window please install the GPS Data Viewer See Installation of the GPS Data Viewer on page 308 During the installation you can choose whether to use Google Earth or OpenStreetMap to represent the position data on the map If necessary prior to usage install the following Google Earth controls 32 GPS Live 2009 03 17 12 37 32 D416 0556 N 010 04 32637 E cs Ed gt 0 0 mph i T Auto 4s Clear Track Close Map 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Show Click Show Position to open Google Earth or OpenStreetMap and position display the current position of the video system You may need to press this button twice A yellow arrow indicates the current location of the sender according to the GPS data transferred The serial number of the video system is displayed prefixed with the device name if necessary Cam4mobile MQ912091 For OpenStreetMap a green arrow indicates the current location of the sender according to the GPS data transferred In addition the serial number of the v
72. TCP IP ee a ee ee PC as I O terminal Recorder settings x Serial channel Device User Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Baud rate Mode Camera groups 3600 eN Al 7 Motion detection zones Privacy zones H Alarms Function Site archive Transparent Y Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channe Video out H EMA Extras Upload Download Firmware update IP Camera OK Cancel Site archive state Help Baud rate Select an appropriate transmission speed for the external serial interface from the drop down list Refer to the manufacturer s specifications for the external device you want to connect 212 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Mode You can choose from a variety of transmission data formats Mode Transmission data format 8 N 1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 8 N 2 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 8 E 1 8 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 8 O 1 8 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit 7 N 1 7 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 7TIN 2 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7 E 1 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 7 O 1 7 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit Function On the CamTel SVR you can use the serial interface as a transparent interface or for serial control On devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer series the POS function is also available while the IBIS function and the GPS function ha
73. Testthe ISDN adapter at an system and the ISDN connection without ISDN adapter PABX system End of step 1 ISDN network TCP IP Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No network connection TCP IP or subnet Check the network system possible mask computer settings settings are not correct No IP address entered at the PC No connection error PC is not connectedto Test network access e g at MS message 10060 the network DOS prompt using the ping lt TCP IP address e g of a second registered network PC gt If you receive an error message timeout then your PC does not have network access Establish the connection End of Step 1 TCP IP 9 5 2 Error at Receiver PC Incoming Call Step 3 This section deals with cases when CamControl PRO can call a transmitter and receive pictures but can not accept any alarm call from a transmitter If your PC is also not able to call any transmitter then you should consult the chapter specified in the following See Error at Receiver PC Outgoing Call Step 1 on page 319 No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Checklist First check the following frequent sources of error e Is call acceptance
74. The standard value for all video channels is Off Unbekannt After selecting the manufacturer select the Protocol for your camera type via a pull down menu The types listed stand for different video protocols from the respective manufacturer A tabular type allocation of compatible camera models can be obtained from the IP camera list which you can access via the Button Additional information on this topic can be found in the section Help button for retrieving the IP camera list see page 240 27769 02 239 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis IP address Help button for retrieving the IP camera list 240 Enter the IP address or the symbolic name in the IP address column From device firmware V1 92 you can add a port if necessary in addition to the IP address or to a symbolic name Hence you can address several cameras behind a router or you can make use of the abilities of an IP camera which can provide different image sections under different ports If no port is stated a connection to the camera via port 80 is assumed In general depending on the video format selected a port other than the standard port 80 may also be used For example many manufacturers use port 8008 for video format MJPEG while port 554 is generally used for H 264 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Port specification is essential in these cases For PTZIP cameras one port must additionally be specified for PTZ functionali
75. This dialogue box also lets you know which tracks are completely full and which tracks have reached their storage warning threshold If at least one of these criteria applies then this status window is displayed when you open the Recorder settings Site archive state a UU Zj Continuous recordreg Event recoding Track 1 Mon Tus fed Thu Fa Sat Type 1 Tyt OF Track 2 Mon Tus Wied Thu Fr Sat Type 7 Tyf oF Track 3 Sum Hon Tues Wed Thu Fri Ss bion Tus Wed Thu Fin Track 4 Mon Tus Wied Thu Fra Sa Typa 1 Tyf oi Track 5 Mon Tue wed Thu Fr Sat Type i Typ on Tireck amp Mon Tue Wed Thu Fo Sat Type 1 Typ Or Track 7 Mon Tue Wied Thu Fo Sat Type 1 Tyf Dif Track amp Mon Tue Wied Thu Fo Sat Typs 1 Typ Dit Track 3 Mon Tue Ved Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Tir on Track 10 Mon Tue Wied Thu Fa Sat Type 1 Typ oi BB Track is completely hull ii pou want again to record pictures pou have to dalele the relevent tack is emg Geshotd has been reached If mecessany delete the track OM No diik apece socmed lor thm recerdesg moda cf the back of lhe Gamers ni fetched ol Pruse Wih the Tima thee it mo paiod of recording ceefirend Saving settings and saving or loading configuration profile You must confirm changes to the settings of your transmitter by clicking OK You can save your preferred settings permanently in the device by selecting Save as configuration profile See Configuration profile for video systems with removable hard drives
76. Wrong New password Enter any new password in the New password box It can havea maximum of 8 characters Confirm password You must re enter your password in the Confirm password box for verification If your entries do not match an appropriate message will be displayed when you click OK Re enter the password in the Confirm password box g New password and confirmation are different Note You cannot access the CamDisc VG archive if you forget the passwords If you do you must delete all images and all passwords before you can work with the image archive again see HDD on page 178 7 13 3 HDD Open the HDD tab from the menu under the Site Archive node This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices Recorded images are saved on the hard disk drive of your CamDisc SVR or CamDisc HNVR or Cam4mobile or CamServer This tab provides you with general information regarding your hard disk drive You can configure several parameters 178 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio E a e Camera settings 4 Camera groups HDD Motion Privacy zones Type WDC WD1601A4BS 010040 Alarms Total Size 153 39 GB Site archi
77. a danger to equipment The danger could be loss of data physical damage or permanent corruption of configuration details Warning This icon is used to indicate that there is a danger of electric shock This may lead to death or permanent injury Warning This icon is used to indicate that there is a danger of inhaling EN dangerous substances This may lead to death or permanent injury Contact Us UK and Europe 44 1442 242 330 The Americas 1 781 740 2223 D A CH 49 431 23284 1 Middle East 962 6 588 5622 Asia 86 21 5240 0077 Australia and New Zealand 61 3 9936 7000 www xtralis com www heitel com ii 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Table of Contents 1 How to Use this Guide ois choke see eh ee ea te eo eee ee Bahan 3 1 1 Guide on how to read this guide 2 2 eee eee ce cee cece cee cecceeceeceeces 3 2 NV OCQUCUONN sso oo faci tet oe can chae ds laa edo a T a Aa a unum oeee tea dtadeadnivineeetaneeaes 5 3 Installing the software _ 220 00 oo cece ccc ccc cece ccc ceceecceeceeceecees 7 3 1 Hardware and Software Requirements 2 0 2 eee eee eceecceceececceceeees T 3 2 Licensing regulations 0 00000000000000 0000000000000000 eee c ccc ceeeeeccecceceeeese 8 3 3 Installing the Software _ 2 202 2 o lice cece cece eee oaoa aonan rann 8 3 4 Updating the Software 0 0 0 2 0 o lec cee cee cece eee eee eeees 8 4 Working with CamControl PRO
78. access the PC Archive function after selecting the desired archive the GPS archive dialogue box may be displayed The display of the dialogue box is not compulsory when accessing archive images with valid GPS data e Use the GPS Viewer button or the View GPS Viewer function to show or hide the GPS dialogue box 5 2 Deleting archive files The function for deleting archives is deactivated by default in CamControl PRO for security reasons You cannot select the Delete archive command from the File menu Alternatively you can activate the delete function fully or with password protection The delete function and its password protection are configured in the configuration file SERVICE INF see Password protecting the delete function on page 283 Deleting an archive Once the delete function has been activated select File Delete archive to open the relevant dialogue box If a password is required to delete an archive the Enter password dialogue box opens before the CACO4 Archive Browser Enter password Password Cancel As long as the CAC O4 Archive Browser remains open in delete mode you do not have to re enter the password A confirmation prompt appears before the archive in question is deleted 74 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual amp CACO4 Archive Browser x ae Load Call CamTel svr10 1 CY500005 09 09 05 Transmitter F CamDisc svr 10 1 CV500006
79. accordingly Optimised image recording Conditional refresh is set by default for CamDisc SVR devices This means that only those parts of the video images that have changed are recorded Recording conditional refresh images considerably reduces the required storage capacity Conditional refresh is also advantageous because it allows more images to be saved on the data carrier compared to full images and it facilitates more effective data transmission to the receiver PC at narrow bandwidths Note Images are formed gradually in conditional refresh mode Under certain conditions this could result in black blocks appearing in the image These blocks are successively completed as the image continues to be expanded 4 6 1 Accessing the Site Archive The devices in the CamDisc SVR series have a removable hard disk for multi track recording The images for the individual camera tracks are saved as continuous recordings and or event recordings in the Transmitter archive Transaction data can also be recorded If the receiver software is connected to the CamDisc SVR CamDisc HNVR CamServer or Cam4mobile via a TCP IP connection clicking the Sue ene button opens a pop up menu in which you can select between Evaluation with optimal functionality and Evaluation with optimal speed Evaluation with optimal Functionality Evaluation with optimal speed Note Using Recorder settings User you can define the authorisations for the different evaluation fo
80. additional progress window opens 72 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual S3 Export status log 5 x 29 10 2007 if 21 33 Camera 5 Exporting pictures 29 10 2007 14 22 48 Camera 1 Area succesfully exported 29 10 2007 14 21 53 Camera 1 Exporting pictures 6 Start the export by clicking Start export Select all The entire range of the recording is selected if you select Select all Setting export marks for the image sequence The export range can be set in the File Save sequence dialogue box or directly while viewing the recording Setting export marks allows you to precisely specify the range of the sequence to be exported Export marks are set as follows 1 Position the slider at the desired starting image for the sequence export and then click Set start mark The starting image is marked with a turquoise frame Position the slider at the desired end image for the sequence export and then click Set end mark The end picture of the export sequence is marked with a blue frame The marks for the image sequence export are shown in the graphical elements of image access The marks look different depending on the archive and the recording mode If you want to change the selected image sequence later you must either reset the export marks as described above or delete the marks and then reset them Select File Save sequence or click the Save sequence toolbar button after you hav
81. again to insert the image again in the intended location If the space available is sufficient to display the image in full no switch takes place If the image of the IP camera is displayed in its original size the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol am when held over the image section of the IP camera With this hand and by simultaneously holding down the left mouse button you can move the image section within the display field 27769 02 25 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Side Entrance A Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Parking Space 2 Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Video 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden E AXIS 35 99 Garden W Camera selection Underneath the displayed image you can switch between the cameras of the active transmitter by clicking the various camera buttons In Recorder settings you can enter transmitter specific camera names to be used as labels for the Camera buttons see Camera settings on page 146 Live camera with no video signal If a camera is selected when no video signal input is connected the missing video picture is indicated by the HeiTel device with the symbol shown here Covered live camera If a camera is selected where its lens is covered the missing video picture is indicated by the HeiTel device with the symbol shown here No live image of an IP camera If a camera channel is selected whose live image is to be supplied by an IP camera and its HeiTe
82. allow transmission of live images as well as archive access to HeiTel VideoGateways You can use the following HeiTel devices with CamControl PRO HeiTel Video Gateways Note IntrusionTrace is only available with CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx as well as ipVG and only in combination with JPEG MJPEG cameras not H 264 When using analogue cameras we highly recommend using the analogue realtime cards in the equipment Digital video transmission systems CamTel VG Digital image transmitter with up to ten video inputs Multi Unicast server for CamTel SVR network and dial up connections and access via the communication connections CamTel V 24 Digital image transmitter with ten video inputs integrated alarm image storage and transparent serial interface for operation with external modem null modem analogue ISDN TCP IP CamTel ISDN As for CamTel V 24 but with integrated ISDN TA instead of a serial interface for external modem operation CamTel PSTN As for CamTel V 24 but with integrated analogue modem instead of a serial interface for external modem operation CamLine V 24 Digital image transmitter with two video inputs for operation with external modem null modem analogue ISDN TCP IP CamLine ISDN As for CamLine V 24 but with integrated ISDN TA instead of a serial interface for external modem operation 6 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 3 Installing the software CamControl PRO is an
83. are described in more detail in the chapter on Receiver options See Tours on page 93 4 4 3 Accepting calls processing alarms or Ignore You have four ways of accepting calls which you can configure in Receiver options e Do not accept call The receiver PC does not accept any calls e Accept call manually When a call is incoming null modem cable modem or ISDN TA a dialogue box reports which port is receiving the call e g Port A Call If a sound card has been installed an alarm Signal is also given via the connected speaker If there is no sound card incoming calls are notified by means of short warning signals through the PC speaker You can Accept or Ignore the call Notes e Manual call acceptance is not available for network connections TCP IP e Accept call automatically Incoming calls alarms are accepted automatically You have the option of receiving visual and acoustic notification In the case of transmitters with camera inputs configured accordingly the camera allocated to the alarm triggering input is switched on e Accept call and auto operation In this operating mode alarm processing takes place fully automatically You have the option of receiving visual and acoustic notification If you click Manual in the main control panel after having switched the call alarm from a side panel to the main panel if necessary you receive fully control of the procedure once again e Once you switch to man
84. be used with standard PC without any problems Foes SSCS 64 000 Bit s X 75 V 120 Included in delivery ISDN adapter ISDN connection cable modem cable data medium with manual plug in power pack included in delivery for PPX Approvals German BZT approval European approval Receiver Initialisation for receiver PC ATE1V1B10S0 0 ATD establish connection Dial D 27769 _02 291 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis MSN Setting the MSN Multiple Subscriber Number e If several ISDN TAs or devices with the ISDN service attribute data service are connected to your ISDN SO bus then every device must be assigned an MSN i e a telephone number at which it can be reached This number must be at the end of the initialisation string Connecting the adapter to the transmitter Transmitter Initialisation with MSN for current devices e ATEOVIB10S0 0 2Z123456 M 123456 is the MSN Status of the LEDs on the TA PPX TA PP2 TA PPP sas SC id LEDs off No current or device defective L1 flashing L2 off ISDN SO bus not ok L2 flashing Device defective L1 on DTR on Correct status If the green LED L1 flashes for an extended period of time the connection to the SO bus is not ok Solution e The Western plug is probably not connected or there is no SO bus available at the connected jack e Determine what protocol is available at the ISDN connection Euro ISDN DSS 1 is the standard protocol for the
85. bus The following programming is a requirement for this e Baud rate 1200 e Mode 8 N 2 up to firmware V1 68 7 E 1 e Function IBIS Synchronise device When the Synchronise device time to IBIS time option is enabled the time to IBIS time device time is synchronised with the time transferred from the IBIS vehicle bus The following requirements apply for time synchronisation A valid date is transferred at least once A valid time is transferred at least six times e The device time varies by at least one minute not taking seconds into account Note If time synchronisation can take place via alarm panel or IBIS the deviceinternal automatic summer winter time changeover is not carried out See Summer time settings on page 126 If consecutive IBIS data records are receive d with valid date and valid time the time is synchronised once a minute For devices with a hard drive CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer or Cam4mobile a logfile entry is written for every time synchronisation IBIS data records Complete IBIS data records contain Date Time Wagon number Line Course and Station GPS function for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG The GPS Global Positioning System function was primarily designed for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG devices A GPS receiver is connected to a Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG via the serial interface Note The GPS receiver must supply data with the GPRMC data record according to the NMEA 0183 stan
86. button or menu are blocked during playback on site e Audio button or menu are blocked in case of a lack of user rights e This function need firmware releases VG 4 18 or higher other 2 30 or higher e Supported are only wav files with PCM 8 kHz sampling rate 16 bit 1 channel up to 10MB file size Configuration file CamControl 4 ini 27769 02 51 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis All keys to configure HT connect have been transferred from section EXTRA to section HTCONNECTCTRL In case the configuration file already exists the following key are copied automatically an marked as obsolete EXTRA HTCONNECTSVR OBSOLETE HTCONNECTSVRPORT OBSOLETE In any case it is recommended to check the settings in dialog windows lt receiver settings htconnect gt 4 6 4 Accessing CamDisc archive offline If you have removed the removable hard disk of your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile transmitter or if you have replaced it you can access the saved image data and logfile offline The functions available here are generally the same as for accessing the receiver archive see Offline Access on page 63 The CamControl PLAYER guide describes how to access all HeiTel archives in detail Note An offline evaluation is only possible on devices with removable hard drives such as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and Cam4mobile On CamServer this evaluation option is not available because the hard drive is permanently installe
87. camera e viathe associated camera control input e via internal software supported motion detection e viaaserial channel command see Serial channel on page 212 The triggering cause is recorded in the event list for archive access I control input M motion detection and S serial Trigger via contact The camera control input of the camera in question can report two states Trigger via contact Normally opened al Normally opened Hormally closed closed switched to ground and open unswitched Select Normally opened from the drop down list to trigger an event when the input is closed Select Normally closed from the dropdown list to trigger an event when the input is open Select Off to switch off control input triggering 27769 02 197 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Trigger via motion detection Trigger via serial command Retrigger at 198 Trigger via motion detection Motion Motion The integrated software motion detector can be set to three levels of sensitivity Select Motion for maximum sensitivity and Motion for minimum sensitivity The image is then checked for movement every 300 ms An event is triggered when the device detects motion in the video image or in the defined motion zones Select Off from the drop down list to switch off the motion detector for triggering Note You can limit motion detection by defining detection zones
88. camera control input connection type BS8418 ona CIO interface e Size of the last picture received in kilobytes e Percentage indication of the progress of current image transmission for Port A to D from left to right e Number of users currently dialed in only for HeiTel VG device series and for CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile CamServer CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR e Camera number image format image quality 27769 02 19 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 4 4 Establishing a connection With CamControl PRO you can establish a connection to transmitters carry out tours automatically and process incoming calls alarms or have them processed 4 4 1 Establishing a connection through multiple channels CamControl PRO has multiple connection channels called Port A Port B Port C and Port D as well as Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 and Port 9 in the software s basic settings The main panel and the respective side panels have a button for each of these ports You can configure and name the individual ports in Receiver options see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 A connection is established in the connection window where you clicked the button Dial up and TCP IP connections For ports with dial up ISDN and analogue communication settings clicking the connection button opens the Transmitter index see Configuring the transmitter index on page 96 dialogue box Direct connections If cer
89. combining several HeiTel devices into one group within the list of transmitters This grouping is meaningful for example if several devices are used for video monitoring of an object and these present to the user practically one functional unit Transmitter index E x Transmitter list 27768000 Reference images i Gy Demo CamDisc svrl 0 2 IPP Add new group m Demo CamDise svrd 3 IF Add new transmitter ae T Demo CamDise svrd H4 IP Cut transmitter Demo CamDisc swr10 1 IP Ctri s Demo CamTel syri0 H IP LAN device autodetection Se Demo CamTel svr10 2 IF H tma Demo Caml el svr4 3 IP a Es z T Demo CamTel svrd 4 IF i ee El a Demonstration Kiel IF ai E ER bo G8 Demo Kiel CamDise svr IP PTZ Dba Se Demo Kiel CamTel evr IP Fa Demonstration Moltsee ISON es O EP Demo CamBise svr10 1 ISDN CGE Demo CamDise svr 4 1S0N iLL OBR Meron CamT el swr indi ISN a Modify Add Delete Cancel amDise Device or group dial gly Demonstration Kiel IF ER Demo Kiel CamDisc evr IP PTZ ae on Demo Kiel CarnTel evr IP To dial a transmitter or a group you start by double clicking on the transmitter or on the group node or ona transmitter of the respective group Alternatively you can also check first a transmitter a group or the transmitter of a group and then start the dialling process by clicking the Dial button If a group is dialled then the checked transmitter is always dialled first
90. connected to the receiver software via HTconnect see General information about HTconnect on page 113 Follow up processing of tours If tours overlap Tour 001 starts at 11 55 a m and lasts 10 minutes and Tour 002 starts at 12 00 p m or are interrupted for some other reason they are post processed as long as e No settings have been changed on the receiver side in the meantime e The program has not been ended and restarted in the meantime e Thenext tour will be continued on the same day A tour that had already started will however also be continued on the next day 27769 02 95 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 9 Configuring the transmitter index Central transmitter index The Transmitter index manages the names and telephone numbers IP addresses of all the transmitters that you can use with CamControl PRO centrally for all connection windows The individual transmitter entries also form the basis for tours Opening the transmitter index x E L EA K srPrerIAaAe Transmitter list 27 6000 amp USB direct connection Fi Demo CamDisc svr10 1 ISDN Ta Demo CamDise svr10 2 IP PTZ Sy Demo CamDise svr10 2 ISDN PTZ GH Demo CamDise svr4 4 1P POS T Demo CamDisc svr4 4 ISDN POS T Demo CamDise svr4 s 3 IP T Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 ISDN Demo CamTel svr10 1 IP Demo CamTel svr0 1 ISDN Demo CamTel svrl0 2 IP B Demo CamTel svr10 2 ISDN a Demo CamTel svr4 3 IP Demo C
91. connection is included in the configured duration Switching off NONULLMO 0 Deactivate automatic null modem detection automatic null modem e Range O off check for null modem cable detection 1 on no null modem cable connected e It may be necessary to deactivate automatic null modem detection in Normal operating mode under Receiver options Port A Port B Port C or Port D etc to ensure correct operation with certain modems see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 Note The entry for deactivating automatic null modem detection only effects the Normal operating mode It does not apply to any other operating mode Archiving individual LRECORD 1 Activate FIFO mode cals PO mode Range O off default 1 0n In FIFO mode the images from individual calls are archived in such a way that the oldest images are gradually overwritten when the maximum size of the archive file is reached This recording procedure can be configured differently for each of the available connection windows FIFO mode is recommended for dedicated lines Specifying the TYPE NIGA defining possible connection types connection types for e Range of values NIGA standard the respective port e N connection via network e connection via ISDN e G connection via GSM obsolete due to discontinuations or major technical changes by the network operators concerned e A connection via analogue modem e Using the parameters N I G A y
92. correctly This process is logged in the event tree See Event tree on page 22 together with the user name User logoff or change To exit the software click Close If User Management is active the User identification dialogue box prompts you to re enter your password before the program closes It is also possible to switch users by entering another valid user name and password Both program end and user change are logged in the event tree Note If there is one or more active connections to transmitters the first time you click Close all connections are closed 4 2 2 initialisation Error Port amp x X The COM identifier is invalid or unsupported All important system components are configured and initialised as far as possible on program start If an error occurs the corresponding message will appear Do not ignore these messages Deal with the underlying cause Possible causes include e Selected COM interface does not exist e COM ports have be multiply assigned by other programs ports or the serial channel e CAPI driver not installed e Fossil driver not installed or incorrectly installed for an internal ISDN card or LAN CAPI e Incorrect AT command during initialisation of modem or ISDN TA e Modem or ISDN TA not switched on during initialisation or connected to a different COM port 16 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Modem and ISDN TA initialisation Port A Initialise mode
93. devices Since the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series is equipped as standard with an integrated audio function audio recording is possible with these devices If you have installed an Audio Card then you can save voice quality audio data on the hard drive of your CamDisc SVR device in addition to image data Your device needs at least firmware version 1 34 or 1 40 for audio recording Duplex audio live audio transmission and audio recording is possible with the use of firmware V1 92 or higher and CamControl PRO V3 92 or higher 27769 02 189 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This tab provides you with general information regarding audio recording and allows you to configure several parameters Recorder settings i x Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms Site archive Video settings Passwords HDD POS ATM Audio Track settings Video 1 in Video 2 in E Video 3 in E Video 4 in Video 5 in OK Cancel Site archive state Help Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Recording duration Total period of audio recording approximately 108 days Audio recording Iv On C Record all time Recording only while image recording Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Camera 8 Camer
94. drive on which the archive is stored Additional files are created with each new connection occupying additional hard drive space Maintain your archive directory on a regular basis therefore and check the remaining storage Space on your hard drive When the storage capacity is 30 MB or less you receive a warning message from CamControl PRO You should start backing up your archive files to other data media or delete unnecessary data when you receive this warning at the latest In addition to the display in MB the available storage space is also shown in GB Delete all recordings older than x day s When this option is selected CamControl PRO will delete all archives that are older than the specified number of days You can define any period between 1 and 9999 days The archive dates are checked to determine if they are older than the specified time period five minutes after the program is started Any archives that are older than the specified period are deleted automatically This procedure is repeated every 24 hours Note If you use this automatic deletion function be sure to copy any recordings that you need toa different medium before the specified number of days pass Deleting archive files You can delete archive files in the usual way in Windows Explorer or using the archive access software see Deleting archive files on page 74 Sample calculations for determining archive size for individual calls Network connection
95. e When setting parameters for an IP camera and enabling an analogue video channel for the same camera channel or the same recording track the analogue signal takes priority e If the Analogue Video function can no longer be executed in this setup e g due to uninstalling the HYBRID Card 4 if applicable the corresponding IP camera is displayed and recorded In this case disable the analogue video channels which are no longer being used e Only enable the analogue video channels which are being used 27769 _02 247 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 2 7 PIR Integration PIR High Level Integration Devices running firmware version 2 32 old series or 4 20 VG or higher are supporting a PIR High Level Integration for up to 20 PIRs This integration allows to detect connected PIRs configure PIRs in detail and checking the actual PIR state The devices are supporting the walk test function using iPIR In case of alarms caused by a PIR alarm details are available Details concerning PIR configuration different PIR types Walk test should be found within the ADPRO PIR documentation Recorder settings Die gute 106 gt ied be q eee ee a ee ee le PIR Device PIR mode Walk test User Serial channel Date amp Time iv On one On Port 55557 Connections Camera settings Camera groups a FE a a ke i ce Motion On ae 0 Privacy zones Alarms 2 No 5 Site archive No 5 Audio Rel
96. eaten NOt toe ee Ahh eu et on the a 161 7 13 Site archive only CamDisc VGHNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG and CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CAMSeIVen x2 525snctusivenentch cua retansguectiaulas bons sedechan aus Gensepedse assdund 175 Tee Sy ENG o 0 em 206 27769 02 1 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis TAD HROIAV Scot nek EEE tins Hetats erated tates arnt Satan GLa acne bose ne eee aa AN E 208 RAG PITZ COMMON 2 43 tesco teresa es es sy cease a A eee neces 210 7 17 Serial channel 02 2 2 e cece cece cece cece cece ee ceeceecereeceeceececeeseeee 212 TWO NWIGCOOUN ans alr Sauda bre a oecingseeed aco a EX ade wissen dogs 216 TAD Alam Panel f c2205 320 te tet nos sha kas daeustobbus cecuasulee niacun etl stds ueteasc aah 218 Le Z0 SOON ae Bh a he lc agaist eee ec cuetoun ewes taka A 223 Re c lt 4 aa TO he EA SC Snee e A eRe ED T RO 224 E22 JPIGAdGOWNIOAG eeaeee r a aa a a E Sects 229 7 23 Firmware update _ rosies eee cee cece eee e E E ASAE 230 7 24 Cl Adapter and CIO Adapter 0 00 0202 cece cece cee cee eee cece ee eeee 232 De Zke UR CAME i ott cst acteristics cm ag ws or aise ea an Bt ht BR eel Oat ea 237 7 26 HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR oaa 22222222 ee 246 P20 PIRIntegraton ss enna e a aa a a a kaia 248 8 Configuration configuration files and configuration examples _ 253 8 1 Overview ofthe used IP POM
97. fault HeiTel by Xtralis Check the serial number of the transmitter and name the R01 control file after the serial number of the transmitter Check the MS DOS name of the file mark using Windows Explorer right click with mouse button properties Xx 123456 r01 Check whether the control file is stored in the receiver software directory Check whether the correct R01 file for the remote system is being used Check the R01 entries Has the assignment been made to the correct camera Are the addresses in the file and the remote hardware correct Activate the archive in the receiver setup Make sure that there is sufficient free hard disk space Reselect the frame storage unit and play the required sequences using the Play button double arrow Select the correct archive file or Start picture transmission The Play button must be re pressed The software does not carry out any fault correction 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 9 3 General Evaluating Contents of CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer Error Fault Possible Causes Device can not even be 1 The very first time 1 Allow the device to run for 15 addressed using the null the system is minutes and then re attempt modem cable switched on the hard to connect disk is initialised 2 Carry out a hardware reset This procedure can see product guide take up to 15 minutes and during this time the disk can
98. field When you activate the archive for the first time and do not enter anything in this field a sub directory ARCHIVE is created in the program directory of CamControl PRO C CamControl PRO ARCHIVE If you did not select the suggested program directory during installation the directory name may be different than CamControl PRO Note If possible only use directory names with a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters even if your operating system supports longer names Archive capacity MB Specify the maximum size of the individual archive files in the Archive capacity MB or GB field The archive size can be between 1 MB and 2000 MB for hard drive partitions formatted in FAT format For hard drive partitions formatted in NTFS format the maximum archive size is 512 GB In addition to the display in MB the 84 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual archive size is also shown in GB Note The one time initialisation of the PC Archive takes place immediately after confirmation of the changes made with OK For small archives this process takes only a few seconds The initialisation of a very large archive may take up to several minutes The status window provides progress information Unused capacity MB Remember that the overall receiver archive with the individual files containing the individual calls only grows gradually over time The Unused capacity MB lets you know how much storage space is left on the
99. fields of an entry date time event are separated by spaces Each entry concludes with lt CRLF gt CR go to beginning of line hex OXOD LF line break hex OXOA 264 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 2 4 6 View during active connection ONLINESCR Specifying the initial view MODE Q Initial view CAMO 1 Camera for normal Zoom viewing mode CAM1 2 Camera for live image 1 for quadscreen viewing mode CAM2 3 Camera for live image 2 for quadscreen viewing mode CAM3 4 Camera for live image 3 for quadscreen viewing mode CAM4 5 Camera for live image 4 for quadscreen viewing mode e Range for the initial view when establishing a connection Normal viewing mode default Quadscreenviewingmode Ja You can also specify a different initial view for image transmission for example Quadscreen Ten or Zoom viewing mode This setting applies to all transmitters Once the connection is established the receiver software switches to the configured viewing mode automatically This applies in the same way to outgoing and incoming calls and alarms Notes e This setting has no effect on tours and the automatic processing of alarms If you select Ten screen viewing mode as the initial view this viewing mode will only be used for transmitters with ten camera inputs The connection will be opened in Quadscreen viewing mode for transmitters with fewer camera inputs The entry CAMO specifies which camera s
100. file CTWNDPOS INI is divided into various sections for the individual windows Each section starts with the internal program window name in square brackets Then the top left corner of the window is defined using the variables LEFT and TOP Example RMLISTPOS _1 LEFT 384 TOP 884 Comment The position 0 0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the first monitor 8 3 2 Window position Image Viewer VIEW10 INI The Image Viewer window is displayed in the basic configuration for alarm messages The configuration file stores the last position and size of this window even after the program has been exited File structure The VIEW10 INI file lets you define the position of the top left corner of the window LEFT TOP and the window size WIDTH HEIGHT 27769 02 269 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Example POS LEFT 829 TOP 643 WIDTH 450 HEIGTH 380 Comment The position 0 0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the first monitor Function of the Image Viewer The window is divided into four quadrants to display the alarm images Top left The image triggering the alarm is displayed Top right The first image transmitted following a successful connection is displayed Bottom left The second image transmitted following a successful connection is displayed Bottom right A sequence of up to 15 images is displayed starting with the alarm triggering image and followed by a maximum of 14 tr
101. for current operation see Event recording 1 2 4 10 on page 196 and see Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 on page 201 7 13 9 1 Combined continuous and event recording Unlike the familiar timer controlled switching between continuous and event recording as of firmware version V1 76 see Timer operation on page 194 the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices offer contact controlled switching Starting with firmware V4 02 CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG devices also have this contact controlled switch Event recording If you enable the Event recording always enabled option you turn on this always enabled function for the selected camera track After the adjusted recorder settings have been transmitted with OK this switching takes place ona contact controlled basis via a control input on the device Note The Event recording always enabled function requires you to program at least a part of the selected recording track for an event recording If this is not done the function remains inactive and is greyed out The recording parameters for continuous and event recording of the selected recording track can be adjusted on the dialogue box of the same name Note If the Event recording always enabled function is used the extended configuration of the continuous recording can only be set to a limited degree see Advanced configuration on page 202 How combined con
102. for the period of time specified in the settings If the user uses one of these functions then he can continue to use that function for the defined period of time calculated from the time he last used the function If the first user doesn t use the audio function for example the next user in line can use that function after the specified period of time If a user is using a function then the next user in line is notified accordingly The message is shown for approx 2 5 seconds FTZ and remote functions are at e PTZ functions present blocked Audio i at present blocked e Audio function Internal relays are at present e Internal relays e As of the device firmware V1 96 the Preemption option is available If the Preemption option is enabled the usual behaviour up to device firmware V1 94 is retained i Preemption e A manual connection that is initiated from the receiver software attempts to obtain all rights PTZ relay and audio when the connection is established as long as the user has the necessary rights and depending on the existing connections of other users In the event of an alarm connection the associated rights PTZ relay and audio of a connection that exists in parallel are withdrawn in favour of this alarm connection If the Preemption option is disabled the procedure described above can be suspended Preemption 27 69 _02 22 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Software video
103. general sources of error see General Errors Faults on page 319 your PC is obviously able to communicate with the connected ISDN TA or ISDN card Check ISDN You should first test the ISDN connection when possible with the application software for the ISDN device or with a terminal program see Testing the Data Transmission Equipment on page 319 Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection possible not even to demo transmitters error message No Dialtone or No Carrier depending on the type of TA used No ISDN MSN available Defective connection or connection cable ISDN light at TA is out or flashes No dial line available or other ISDN 27769 02 characteristics such as closed user group is set Get an ISDN MSN Check the ISDN cable Check the connection using an ISDN telephone Check the telephone number 321 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver When operating an ISDN 1 Number for outside 1 Check the telephone number telephone system you line has not been 2 Check the settings of the are not able to dial out but entered PABX system incoming calls are PABX system has 3 Usethe ISDN adapter with recognised not been configured another program Hyper for data Terminal Fritz Data and Incompatibility evaluate the error messages between the PABX 4
104. index window until you click the button again The state of this button is saved when the Transmitter index is closed Transmitter index Tranemither list 276000 Reference images CamDise svr10 1 IP gt USB direct connection T Demo CamDisc swi O 1 IP Demo CamDise svrl 1 ISDN 2 ma Demo CamDisc sv 2 IP PTZ Fm Demo CamDisc svri0 2 15DN PTZ Demo CamDisc svr4 4 IP POS Demo CamDise svrd 4 ISDN POS ma Demo CamDisc svrd s 3 F FS Demo CamDisc evrd s 3 ISDN a Se Demo Camel svii 1 IF Demo CamTel svr10 1 ISDN Ge Demo CamTel svi 2 1P Demo CamTel svi 2 1SDN oF Demo CamTel svr4 3 IFP i Demo CamTel svd 3 ISDH 2 m Demo Camel svd 41P Ft Dema Camel swnd HA ISON z Modify Add Delete Bi aliens Frant li a mee Dial Cancel Help SV ii You can add up to eleven reference images for every transmitter entry in the Transmitter index see Inserting and editing reference images on page 101 6 9 2 Adding changing or deleting transmitter entries The Transmitter index dialogue box has three buttons with which you can add a new transmitter to the list change an existing entry or delete an existing entry Modity Add Delete These buttons may be greyed out and inactive indicating that the user currently logged in is not authorised to modify the transmitter index see Modify transmitter index on page 80 Supplementary information Please make sure to note
105. individually and each will generate its own receiver archive e When recreating a group the transmitter names in the camera list are displayed instead of the camera names of the transmitter After dialling the respective transmitter the camera list is updated accordingly e Tomake sure that the grouping will also function smoothly in the event of an alarm all transmitters must be dialled once by the receiver side 2 7769 _02 107 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis e If atransmitter exists in the transmitter list multiple times redundancy IP ISDN then the entry created in a group is taken into consideration when establishing a connection from the transmitter side If this criteria is not unique then the entry found first is taken into consideration Multiple entries should be avoided If for reasons of redundancy transmitters are entered multiple times then the entry with the main connection path in the group should be taken and the redundant back up connection as an individual transmitter 6 9 5 Device detection in local area network With the function Device detection in local area network the CamControl PRO software offers you a comfortable option e to detect newly installed HeiTel devices within a local network and to add these to the transmitter list or e to update in the transmitter list the IP address entries of transmitters that automatically obtain an IP address DHCP in the local network or where its IP
106. is not saved Playback speed Clicking the arrow between the Playback and Last image buttons opens a list in which you can set the playback speed The ability to adjust the playback speed is particularly useful for fast TCP IP connections In such a way you can adjust the playback speed and also archiving if necessary in line with your needs The system and the bandwidth of the connection to the transmitter are the decisive factors influencing playback speed The settings in this menu do not generally affect the actual playback speed when working with low bandwidth connections Status bar with operating status and number of images Ok 40048 The operating status of the transmitter archive is shown on the left of the status bar The number of images in the currently active sequence is shown on the right e images from continuous recording multi track recording e images from event recording multi track recording Image number Date amp Time When playing back image archives the camera name is shown on the left underneath the image in the main panel while the current image number with respect to the total number is shown on the right underneath the image in the main panel together with the time and date of the current image An asterisk in front of the image number indicates that an archive image is in the process of being transmitted Event list of the transmitter archive In the case of multi track recording the camera trac
107. last most recent sales receipt recorded is returned You can navigate the search result using the toolbar buttons First receipt Previous receipt Next receipt and Last receipt 44 2 769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Text amp price search IBIS data Saving IBIS data m Printing a data 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual 5 090090 Text amp price search Date amp time search IBIS search J Wagon number 0003 Line m Course poera AND M Syncronization Update picture from data C Update data from picture m Time window l Start Date IV Select all Items combined by In the Time window area you can define both the Start and End of the search period by entering the Date and Time Alternatively you can select all IBIS data allocated to the relevant camera track by clicking Select all Using IBIS search you can define the criteria Wagon number Line Course Station you would like to use for the search For the selected search options you can also define text strings as filters You can link all the selected parameters for the IBIS data search using the logical operators AND or OR from the Items combined by dropdown list In addition to this combined search you can also search using individual criteria station only for example Now use the First receipt or Last receipt toolbar buttons to jump to the first or last IBIS data record that fulfils these sear
108. major technical changes affecting GSM data services by the relevant network operators the current documentation no longer contains any sample AT commands for initialising GSM adapters ISDN terminal adapter Model o AT command initialisation prefix Stollmann ATE1V1B10S0 0 2123456 TA PPX PP2 PPP 3COM U S Robotics ISDN Sportster ZyXel Omni net plus ATE1V1B00S0 0 amp Z1I 123456 amp Z0 123456 ZyXel Omni net ZI Z in incoming MSN LCD M ZO Z out outgoing MSN ZyXel Omni net D Prefix 1 Prefix 2 In these boxes you can enter two dialling strings that are sent to the modem GSM adapter ISDN TA before the actual number and that control the dialling procedure In most cases you will only need one dialling string In this case enter ATD default setting in the Prefix 1 box Prefix 1 is used as the dial command for all transmitter entries by default If you want to reach both analogue transmitters and ISDN transmitters and are using an ISDN adapter that supports both analogue and ISDN connections you can configure one prefix for the analogue connections and the other for the ISDN connections You then allocate them to the relevant transmitters in the Transmitter data dialogue box see Configuring the transmitter index on page 96 Consult the manual for your ISDN TA to find out whether such dialling control is possible and how to use it Refer to your modem manual for further dialling controls Sample prefix ZyXel Omni
109. manipulated The image file is saved by default in the SNAPSHOT sub directory of the CamControl PRO program directory The image name contains the name of the transmitter the serial number the Camera name and number and the time and date For example CamDisc SVR 10 1 CV500006 2 camera2 29 08 0509 15 47_ 01 JPG Print picture This function allows you to print the current image to your computer s default printer with the following information Software name and version number Transmitter name serial number Camera number Camera name date and time of image recording Printing date 27769 02 37 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Configuration parameters and image information Image search according to time and date 25 Movember 2005 14 00 00 H If you know the time and date of the recording you are looking for then you can access the relevant image in a sequence directly by entering this information Preview I Preview slowest qk slower slow normal Fast Faster fastest The sequence is not saved in Playback mode if the Preview option is selected If the Record preview images option in Recorder options Video X in see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 is selected the sequence is shown at the lower resolution of 256 x 128 pixels for a faster overview If the Record preview images option is not selected in Recorder options the sequence is played back at normal resolution but
110. min 7 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 25 min and 30 min Note Disarming When the monitored area is entered Entry an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful disarming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered signal input as the reason for the alarm Arming When the monitored area is exited Exit an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful arming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered signal input as the reason for the alarm Note that for multiple inputs to monitor the armed disarmed area the configuration for the signal inputs in question must be configured appropriately In the Linked with motion column you choose between the options On or Off default setting By activating the On option the signal inputs in question are linked with a logical AND to the device internal motion dection for interior spaces see Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs on page 168 Only when the motion detection see Motion detection on page 171 has already been activated for the camera channel in question is it possible to activate this option Otherwise the Off setting cannot be changed Select in the Trigger event column between the options On or Off standard setting If the On option is activated then event controlled recording of video images takes place in accordance
111. not be addressed 2 Incorrect baud rate Archiving Pictures onto the Hard Disk at the Transmitter 9 4 Error Fault Possible Causes Frame storage unit is Frame storage unithas Check the archive settings in the entirely full too many been switched off during frame storage unit Has the pictures for the hard disk initialisation e g when a required recording method been new hard disk is first put set Has the memory been into operation accidentally divided into rings No null modem connection possible You can only establish a connection between the transmitter and receiver systems using the original null modem cable recognisable by the orange red sticker on the cable Commercially available null modem cables can not be used The pin assignment for the null modem cable is specified in the manual of the appropriate transmitter 9 4 1 Troubleshooting for Direct Connections Error Fault at Receiver Possible Causes at PC Remedy PC Receiver The transmitter list 1 The null modem 1 Receiver settings Port A to appears after the Dial cable has not yet D Deactivate TCP IP and button is pressed been recognised by set Mode to normal Select the program the correct COM port under Incorrect receiver Port modem settings Check the null modem cable Incorrect or defective The transmitter list must not null modem cable appear when the Dial button Incorrect or defective is pressed when the null COM port mode
112. of the transaction data is deleted across all tracks Line length Via the Line length you can specify the maximum line length for incoming data records with transaction data For the POS ATM Adapter the preset value of 57 must be selected For IBIS data the line length of 121 characters should always be selected If the line length is shorter parts of the transferred data record could get cut off The correct selection of the line length has an immediate effect on the quantity and quality of the saved data records e If too high a value is selected for the line length the available storage is not used optimally and the number of possible data records is reduced e If too small a value for the line length is selected part of the data is cut off and certain date records may be incomplete Note When changing the line length the transaction data is deleted for the respective track Delete track Via the Delete track option you can select one or several tracks which are deleted after confirming by pressing OK After performing the procedure the option is set back Note As the POS ATM Adapter communicates with the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG or CamServer devices via TCP IP the POS function see Serial channel on page 212 has no influence on the transaction data of this device The transparent data interface Transp data Control interface on the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG or CamServer can be used for other purposes Set values fo
113. operation alarm verification and configuration program for all HeiTel devices CamControl PRO is an operation alarm verification and configuration program with multi site functionality for all HeiTel devices 3 1 Hardware and Software Requirements In order to be able to install and operate the CamControl PRO software the receiver PC must fulfill the following minimum requirements Minimum requirements for up to two or three connection channels e Intel Pentium processor 1 GHz or comparable AMD processor e 512 MB memory e Operating system Microsoft Windows 8 7 Vista XP e 60 MB free hard disk space e Graphics card with 32768 or 65536 colours and a resolution of 1024x768 pixels small fonts for optimal image display If only 256 colours are used images will be displayed in grey scale e COM port with UART 16550 or a multiple interface card e External ISDN terminal adapter TA and or internal ISDN card with fossil driver virtual COM port driver and or modem and or network card e Sound card Soundblaster compatible for audio transmission with the Audio Card and speakers if acoustic signals are desired e CD ROM drive Minimum requirements for up to four connection channels CamControl PRO with up to four connection channels e Intel Pentium Processor from 1 7 GHz e 1GB RAM Recommended hardware CamControl PRO with more than four connection channels e Intel Pentium Processor from 3 GHz e 2GBRAM Use of ISDN cards
114. or deleting transmitter entries on page 98 The IP address for the USB connection via port 3011 to the transmitter for instance is 192 168 138 95 301 1 You can adjust the IP port according to your transmitter s requirements Device grouping Er sta Demonstration Kiel IP fe fag Demo Kiel CamDise swr IP PTZ 7 Demo Kiel Camel evr IP By grouping the devices or cascading you receive the option of combining several HeiTel devices into one group within the list of transmitters see Device grouping cascading on page 104 This grouping is meaningful for example if several devices are used for video monitoring of an object and these present to the user practically one functional unit Using different transmission networks CamControl PRO with default settings allows you to establish four connections to four different transmitters at the same time In principle two different configurations are possible 1 All connection channels are configured identically and each transmitter can be accessed from each connection window 2 Theconnection channels are configured differently and some transmitters can only be accessed from specific connection windows Configuring the connection channels differently is only necessary in rare situations for instance if some transmitters are to be accessed via an analogue connection and others via an ISDN connection but hybrid terminal adapters are not being used In this case you could si
115. part of the scope of delivery are found in the subdirectory Drivers in your CamControl LITE PRO software After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 9 7 MBit s Driver installation in Windows 8 and 8 1 The USB driver is essentially installed in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 in the same way as the installation described in the chapter relating to VG series page 301 Driver installation in Windows 7 The USB driver is essentially installed in Windows 7 in the same way as the installation described below for Windows XP Driver installation in Windows Vista Install the USB driver in Windows Vista in the same way as you would in Windows XP following the steps described below Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions A reconnection of the USB cable might be necessary after having run the driver installation manually Driver installation in Windows XP Please install the USB driver as follows Step 1 Before you connect one of the appropriate HeiTel devices with a USB interface of your receiver PC please install CamControl LITE PRO software version 3 74 or higher Step 2 Switch on your HeiTel device and connect the USB cable to the corresponding USB socket on the front of
116. passwords for the image archive and the transmitter logfile are also deleted during formatting Notes e If you have previously saved your archive settings by selecting Save as configuration profile it is a good idea to select Load configuration profile in addition to Format HDD Without a saved profile the factory settings of the device will be loaded If you reset your image archive to its factory settings refer to the relevant information in your product guide the saved configuration profile will be deleted Delete logfile Select Delete logfile to immediately delete the transmitter logfile during an active connection and to create Logfile cleared as the first entry The option external RAID allows you to use an external RAID system via the eSATA interface depending on the VideoGateway Please note that you need the additional product key RAID ID to have this option available Boot mode With the introduction of firmware 4 02 and the CamControl LITE software version 4 12 the option boot mode is Supported for CamDisc VG CamServer VG CamDisc VG HNVR and Cam4mobile VG 2c These VideoGateways can support HeiTel coded external hard drives alternatively Boot mode jv Search for internal HDD first The option search for internal HDD first defines the order for the boot mode The following options are possible e Option Search for internal HDD first activated The video system is using the internal hard drive for stor
117. see Motion detection zones analogue cameras on page 150 This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Trigger via serial command If Trigger via serial command is active select On an event is triggered by a serial command from an external device sent via the serial interface of the transmitter Off deactivates event triggering via the serial channel The functions in this menu appear in grey because the function is activated or deactivated across the board for all cameras with the serial channel setting see Serial channel on page 212 Every event is associated with a subsequent and variable alarm duration during which a defined number of images are recorded If Retrigger at is not selected a new alarm event occurring at the same camera input during an existing alarm would not be considered To prevent this select the option and enter a percentage value This specifies if and when a subsequent event within the alarm duration will be detected The percentage value refers to the defined alarm duration With an alarm duration of ten seconds and a percentage value of 50 an event occurring five seconds after the initial alarm would be detected Note There are no pre alarm pictures for events occurring within the alarm duration of a previous event and detected by re triggering 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual
118. servers e www openstreetmap org e www openlayers org General notes on the OpenStreetMap project e OpenStreetMap is a project with the goal of creating a free map of the world Volunteers collect or discover geo information with for example a GPS device by walking or driving through the white areas on the existing OpenStreetMap map This process is called mapping or cartographising In prepared form these collected raw data result in material for maps e Based on this volunteer collaboration the degree of geoinformation coverage varies widely around the world It ranges according to region from very detailed to not yet covered e Thecollection of data is constantly being expanded 8 10 2 Uninstallation of the GPS Data Viewer The GPS Data Viewer software can be uninstalled via two different methods 8 10 2 1 Uninstallation via the Control Panel e By selecting Start Menu Control Panel Add and Remove Programs you will get an overview of the installed software e Select the GPS Data Viewer software e f necessary check the Support Information to verify that the desired installation has been selected Under Support Information the installation path to the GPS Data Viewer software will be displayed e Click on the Remove button GPS Data iewer Uninstall J x j amp re you sure you want to completely remove GPS Data Viewer and all of its components GPS Data iewer Uninstall x GPS Data viewer was successfully re
119. settings Online signalling CamControl PRO displays the camera name on the camera button in red instead of black for active camera control inputs of active connections This makes it easy to track transmitter side events You can also have alarms signalled acoustically by making a setting in a transmitter specific R01 file See Extended software settings on page 276 Extending the alarm functions Requirements In the CamControl PRO software V3 85 or newer and the device firmware V1 78 or newer the alarm function has been extended by the following options Functions e Entry Exit Arm delay The video system is armed or disarmed within the monitored area The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the CI Adapter C IO Adapter delay the alarm by a configurable time period For every camera channel only one time period can be configured which applies to both Entry and Exit for the monitored object e Fire Panic Continuously armed The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the CI Adapter CIO Adapter always trigger an alarm regardless of whether the video system is armed e Alarm The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the CI Adapter ClO Adapter always give the alarm when triggered regardless of whether the video system is armed This function corresponds to the option Connect which was used up to and including CamControl PRO software
120. signal This function is used to set the delay time after which the loss of a video loss detection Signal due to covering or masking the camera is reported The following delay time are available Off Immediately 1s to 10 s 15s 20s 30 s or 60 s Symbol used when video is obscured Merge into images In addition to the obligatory display of date time and image number top right you also have the option to display the camera name and or transmitter name in the video image No devices in the SVR and VGseries nor the Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG and CamServer CamServer VG devices support any of the following merge into image options for IP cameras CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices allow merge into video image for IP cameras only in conditional refresh mode Merge camera names If you activate the Merge camera names into images option the camera into images name is displayed bottom centre of the video image Merge transmitter If you activate the Merge transmitter name into images option the name into images transmitter name is displayed top left of the video image If no transmitter name is defined the device serial number is displayed instead Merge date and time If you activate the Merge date and time into images option on CamDisc into images only HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices the date and time for the CamDisc HNVR transmitter is displayed top right in the video image from IP cameras Precondition for merge into image on Cam
121. software initialises the virtual COM port through which CAPI Support is implemented Transmitter data e Click Dial The Transmitter index now opens Click Add In the Transmitter data dialog box that now opens enter the name and the telephone number of a HeiTel compatible transmitter in the corresponding fields You can find a suitable transmitter in the demo transmitter list on the information CD for example Ensure that Prefix 1 is selected Now confirm your details with OK The Transmitter data dialog box closes and you find yourself back in the Transmitter index Establishing a connection The Transmitter index is still open The desired transmitter is highlighted in the transmitter list Now click Dial The software starts dialing and establishing a connection Online e Once a remote connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 4 Connecting via network TCP IP connection quick start Requirements e In order to be able to operate a HeiTel transmitter in a network you need a PC with a network connection and configured TCP IP protocol or an active Internet connection Configuration e Start CamControl PRO Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens In the Options list click one of the connection channels for example Port A From the drop down list in the Modem group select Mode Off Selec
122. takes to export the image sequence depends on the selected encoder and the corresponding settings as well as on the configuration and equipment of the accessing PC 27769 02 71 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis HeiTel export archives If you use the HeiTel export archive you still have all the advantages of archive access using the CamControl PLAYER The data from the selected sequence are written to a new archive file the data are not converted and the archive information is retained This means that exporting does not take long Export archives also have considerably less storage requirements on data carriers compared with a comparable AVI clip Using the HeiTel specific archive format however means that you and third parties must use the CamControl PLAYER Recorded GPS data is also retained when stored in HeiTel export archives and can be used in the event of access using the CamControl PLAYER File export To export image sequences select File Save sequence or click the Save sequence toolbar button opens the Export to file dialogue window AM Compressor gt Select export time window f AWl Clip avi Start Add on screen information Microsoft Video 1 C Export archive bps 29 January 2008 Create Self Playing archive Select compressor 10 1200 gt Export pictures of track Track 1 Dome Camera Kiel Export also 29 January 2008 E 2 Static Camera Kiel 10 16 00 F Select all gt Export status
123. the Device detection in local area network see Device detection in local area network on page 108 Configuring the image transmitter To configure a digital transmission system for the first time establish a connection to your device via null modem or TCP IP factory setting of the HeiTel devices 192 168 31 95 Make the relevant settings for the network connection in this dialogue box Select the maximum transmission speed These values will be permanently stored in the settings The IP address and subnet mask you enter will be retained even in the event of a reset to factory values 132 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 4 1 1 Special network configuration with CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR In comparison with HeiTel devices of the SVR VG series a special feature of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR model is that it has two network interfaces In addition to the well known 10 100 MBit s interface called Ethernet on the back of the device this device also has a 1 GBit s 10 100 1000 MBit s interface labelled IP Camera Whilst the Ethernet interface is primarily intended to connect to the evaluation network the IP Camera interface is primarily designed to connect to the network of the IP cameras These specifications are only a suggestion The network interfaces may also be used in a different constellation Standard IP addresses In the standard delivery version or following a device reset the following
124. the IP camera in question The relevant functions and buttons are disabled and greyed out Limited scope of function when using IP cameras The restricted functions for IP cameras apply to the following functions e Live transmission quality and conditional refresh mode e Brightness contrast and colour e Motion detection and motion fields e Privacy zones e Camera position authentication e Video settings in the Site Archive e Where applicable conditional refresh mode without function for CamServer VG CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer CamDisc SVR and Cam4mobile devices in connection with IP cameras for the relevant camera tracks e Record preview images Note In some situations these functions can however be defined directly via the user interface for the IP camera For more detailed information please refer to the respective camera manual Starting with CamControl PRO Software V4 12 there is no need to allocate IP cameras by manufacturer and model This has been replaced with allocation by manufacturer and protocol Use the IP camera list with compatibility information to plan and set up IP cameras see Help button for retrieving the IP camera list on page 240 Additionally video systems of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series support video format H 264 minimum requirement device firmware 2 08 or 4 02 Recorder settings CamDisc HNVR Demo p IP Camera i Device
125. the information in the following sections when adding transmitter entries 98 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e Inserting and editing reference images page 101 e Device grouping cascading page 104 e Device detection in local area network page 108 e HTconnect TCP IP leased line page 111 e Multiple transmitter entries page 116 Transmitter index x IF address Phone number dial prefix camdisc1 aT 0 demo heitel com f Prefix 1 CAPI Prefix 2 Seral number evsoo0n4 Username amp password Auto passwords Username Password demo i Ar Poh tei H Ei ai T A z i i rack Add Modify OF Cancel Help Tote Tranemither name Reference images Demo Cambise svrl0 1 IP j i eerie er CamDise swri O 1 IF If you want to add a transmitter or a group of devices see Device grouping cascading on page 104 to the list select the Add button If you want to change a transmitter entry select it in the transmitter list and then click Modify In both cases Add Modify the Transmitter data dialogue box opens and you can enter new or change existing transmitter data Transmitter name Give the transmitter a unique name maximum 30 characters Remember at this stage that the transmitter list is sorted alphabetically You may want to group individual transmitters used together for one object by their names It is not possible to use the
126. the option Save as configuration profile once The data will be stored in a nonvolatile memory in the device Save Recorder Settings x Do you really want to sawe the new settings Note If you use device reset to reset the video system to its state upon delivery even a saved configuration profile will be deleted If necessary use the function Upload Download see Upload download on page 229 to store the existing device configuration prior to a device reset With this procedure you will ensure when exchanging hard drives in delivery state or whose configuration profile has been reset see Resetting configuration profile on page 120 that the configuration profile used is the one stored in the video system for configuring the recording tracks Notes e Forvideo systems with device firmware 1 74 or older a stored configuration profile for configuring the recording tracks will not be used Instead the recording tracks will be configured according to the factory settings e When you use a hard drive that was previously used in another HeiTel video system and whose configuration profile has not been reset the configuration of the recording tracks from the previous device will continue to be used Resetting configuration profile To enable removable hard drives that have already been used in other HeiTel video systems to accept a transmitter specific configuration profile these hard drives must be reset to near deli
127. the storage medium In the CamServer 2c device series Serial number WCxxxxxx a change to the existing device configuration for the HDD standby functions may be ignored and reset In this device series the main power switch operates as a standby switch i e e When the device is powered off any pending write processes on the storage medium are first completed e These processes are indicated by the flashing of the yellow video LEDs e After the write operations are completed the video system is switched off and all front LEDs go out Storage media can be removed or replaced in this state 7 13 4 POS ATMI IBIS E POSZATMAIBIS Keywords oe Adapter Open the POS ATM IBIS tab from the selection menu under the Site archive node The POS ATM IBIS node contains the two supplementary configuration dialogues Keywords see Keywords on page 188 and Adapter see Adapter on page 188 Note The inclusion of POS ATM IBIS data in the camera image using the POS ATM Adapter can only take place with analogue image sources The POS ATM IBIS dialogue window serves to specify the track settings for transaction data 184 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Recorder settings x POS ATM IBIS Keywords Adapter Device User 3 Date amp Time Recording Type Track size Line length Delete track H Connections Cam
128. tilt heads and video crossbars from various manufacturers HeiTel also offers a R16 Adapter with 16 relays The adapter is connected to a device The relays can also be controlled from the receiver PC You must configure the R01 files accordingly in order to be able to use remote control Your receiver software supports common PTZ products and their control protocols When installing PTZ protocols you can decide whether you want the R01 file on your receiver PC to be updated for the selected product see PTZ control on page 210 Generally speaking these R01 files are designed as templates for your customisations They can contain commands for camera 1 camera 1 to 4 or camera 1 to 10 CamControl PRO automatically provides you with easy touse control elements for the various remote options depending on the model you have see PTZ control and remote adapter on page 54 These camera specific control elements include e Acamera control system e Single or double list boxes indexed e A double list box e A button panel e Combinations of these options You can also define global control elements R01 file sections Camera specific and global control elements are assigned within the relevant R01 file in sections These are identified with square brackets Sections with camera specific definitions CAM 1 Camera 1 section ae Variable definition if camera 1 is active CAM2 Camera 2 section i Variable definit
129. transferred device logfiles and the CTWINPOS INI are saved in the local program directory of the software or the relevant subdirectories If necessary a different target path can be selected PATH Path selection LOCAL 1 selection of local or global specified path 1 default setting e Range O off 1 o0n default e If you set the parameter LOCAL 0 the target directory specified under REMOTEPATH is used for saving the listed files Path details REMOTEPATHE target path for saving the listed files e Range valid Windows path or UNC path Universal Naming Convention to the changed target directory Example e C DATA LOG Windows path details e fileserver data log UNC path Make sure that the specified target directory for saving exists and can be accessed over the network 268 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 3 Saving window positions 8 3 1 General program windows CTWNDPOS INI The following windows retain your last position even after the program is closed PTZ window Remote list combination window Archive access window Audio archive access window Cascading window POS ATM IBIS dialogue box Button panel positioning via RO1 file does not apply for this window therefore e GPS window Window positions are saved in the file CTWNDPOS INI in the CamControl PRO program directory You can delete this file after closing the program to reset the positions File structure The
130. types Timer operation distinguishes between these two types by allowing separate settings for both see Holidays on page 195 This allows you to Add as type 2 configure two separate and independent sets of holiday rules To add a holiday select the corresponding date in the calendar and then confirm the type by clicking Add as type 1 or Add as type 2 as appropriate Toggle Type Clicking Toggle Type allows you to reassign the selected holiday as the other holiday type Delete Entry To remove a holiday first select it and then click Delete Entry This entry will then be deleted from the holiday rule in question 128 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis 7 4 Connections The Connections node contains the following configuration menus Network TCP IP Wireless WAN External Modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail and HT connect Note Only make changes to the connection settings if you are absolutely certain that you fully understand their impact Incorrect settings may cause the transmitter to become inaccessible CamControl PRO Software Manual El Connections Network TCP IP Wireless WAN External Modern Internal ISDN TA Madem z Phone amp IF numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect under certain circumstances 7 4 1 Network TCP IP Open the Network TCP IP tab from the menu under the Connections node Network TCP IP allows you to configure
131. up the detection zones see Detection zones on page 158 7 11 1 Advanced parameters The advanced parameters should only be modified in case the standard settings are not sufficient e g rejection of true alarms or acceptance of false alarms Ensure that a change in advanced parameters does not affect the foreseen detection objectives e g the intruder could be crawling on the ground could be a group of persons In case of false alarms determine which parameter filters them out mostly e g the duration is particularly short or the alarm object is huge The advanced parameters are related to the dimensions speed time and distance Other characteristics could still influence the number of false alarms e g distinguishing cars moving slowly from large group of persons is not possible To generate an alarm an object must satisfy all the criteria specified in the advanced parameters AND cross a detection zone Click the Config button Two profiles are displayed in the dialogue window Default and Custom You can only change the Custom profile Select the respective entry to change the corresponding values 2 169_02 155 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Li Advanced Parameter Configuration Detection profiles Profile details Type Visible E Thermal A i UDS minimum distance im high 2m low im Hem Description Minimum height Setting the minimum height is essential to avoid false alar
132. used for the CONNECTCMDPORT parameter in the configuration file HTCONNECT INI of the HT connect Server The HTCONNECT INI file may have to be created manually with the following entries CONFIG e CONNECTCMDPORT 4445 Number of ports for RESERVEDALARMPORTS 2 Minimum number of reserved ports for alarm connections alarm connection e Thestandard value for the minimum number of reserved ports for alarm connections Is 2 Image Viewer configuration The position and size of the Image Viewer is specified in a separate INI file see Window position Image Viewer VIEW10 INI on page 269 Activate Image Viewer FIMAGEMODE 1 Image Viewer activated e Range of values O Off Image Viewer deactivated 1 On Image Viewer activated standard e Inthe basic configuration Image Viewer is activated To deactivate a corresponding entry in CAMCTRL INI may need to be added Image Viewer number FIMAGES 3 number of preview images for the sequence of preview images Range of values 3 to 15 In the event of changes to the presets a corresponding entry in CAMCTRL INI may need to be added In the event of changes compared to the preset if necessary a corresponding entry in CAMCTRL INI is to be supplemented Online motion detection Online motion detection is only provided for live images from analogue cameras If a motion is detected fora camera the CamControl PRO software on the camera automatically toggles When r
133. various communications paths including HT connect and settings for live image quality and email messaging page 129 e Camera settings Camera name and configuration page 146 e Camera groups Definition of camera groups page 147 e Motion Configuration of the motion settings and motion detection zones page 150 e Privacy zones Definition of privacy zones page 151 e Alarms Configuration of responses to alarm inputs camera signals motion detection video loss and camera position authentication page 161 e Site Archive CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer only Configuration of storage options e g recording quality and storage capacity per camera track archive password and settings for saving transaction data for POS ATM IBIS Point of Sale Automatic Teller Machine Integrated on Board Information System applications page 175 e Audio Talk and or listen page 206 e Relays Configuration of the integrated relays page 208 e PTZ control Protocol selection for connected PTZ solutions and transmission of their control files to the receiver PC page 210 e Serial channel Configuration of the transparent serial channel page 212 e Video out Definition of image quality of the video output page 216 e Alarm panel Connection of alarm panels in accordance with the standardised VdS 2465 Enhancement S3 protocol page 218 e Logfile Settings for logfile entry page 223 e Extras Definition of specific device contr
134. within a section Camera specific sections only CAMx MODE 1 gt Remote camera control MODE 2 Single double list box indexed MODE 3 Single double list box indexed and camera remote control MODE 4 gt Double list box MODE 5 Double list box and camera control MODE 16 Button panel MODE 17 Button panel and camera remote control MODE 18 Button panel and simple double list box indexed MODE 19 Button panel simple double list box indexed and remote camera control MODE 20 Button panel and double list box MODE 21 Button panel camera control and double list box 27769 _02 273 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Global section only GRELAY MODE Global control elements with list box active MODE 2 Global control elements with list box inactive Variables for camera specific dialogue box You can configure variables for the buttons list boxes These variables are then sent when a button is activated deactivated or when a function is selected The variables or control functions are in line with the display mode s selected using the MODE variable Single double list box indexed The simple or double indexed list box possible values for MODE 2 3 18 19 is used for specific cameras and serves to control relays and or specific camera functions If a function is selected in the top or bottom drop down list then the receiver software sends the command stored in the R01
135. you make sure that the start search starts from the first item in the selected list If this option is disabled the search starts from the current position within the list Printing out logfile data You can print out the logfile using the Start printing button Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard Onl selected lines All without filter Start printing If you enable the Only selected lines option you only print out the lines in the logfile that have been previously selected The lines are selected using the usual Windows method All without With the All without filter option the list of logfile entries is printed out filter without taking the filter function into consideration see Filtering the logfile on page 48 Note Please note that the symbols indicating the event type are converted into corresponding letters when printed out see Filtering the logfile on page 48 Logfile data on the clipboard Using the Copy to clipboard button you can use logfile data in other applications or documents Filter Time window Search Pririt Clipboard Onl selected lines All without filter Copy to clipboard If you enable the Only selected lines option you only copy to the clipboard the lines in the logfile that have been previously selected The lines are selected using the usual Windows method All without With the All without filter option the list of logfile entries is copied
136. your network administrator for assistance in setting up asymbolic address and for information on DNS service providers A symbolic name is advisable especially in the case of continuously changing IP addresses If you want to limit utilisation of your network select a maximum connection speed from the appropriate drop down list gt 400 RBs 3 13 MBit s BO KBs 0 47 MBitrs If you select the option Web Server one of the six standard connections is dropped in favour of up to four additional connections to PC PDA or Smartphone browsers Click OK to confirm your activation settings and then close the connection between the CamControl software and the transmitter by clicking Hang up in the main menu The device will then re initialise This can require up to 120 seconds depending on the device type and configuration 131 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Configuring connection timeout for the Web Server LAN auto detection support The default port of your transmitter unit for the Web Server is 80 It may be necessary to change the default port number if want to set up more than one transmitter unit at one IP address via router or if port 80 has already been allocated in your network or cannot be used minimum requirement CamControl PRO V3 87 and device firmware 1 84 If you change the port for the Web Server and no longer use the standard port this modified port applies for all Web server and Web API c
137. 0 2 fo 3 fo 4 0 5 0 Camera 8 0008 l Camera 9 0009 Camera 10 0010 6 f0 T jo s fo g fo 10 f0 Motion detection ene Alarm arming and tamper input Repeatings of live job jo Serial control 7 CIO adapter E G Alarm panel Number of pre alarm images Errors and technical alarms E Sabotage HE jo fo 3 fo 4 jo 5 fo ej zb spb sfb wj Maximun connection duration 0 s Automatic disconnect when all images have been received Copy these values to all alarm reasons Copy lnser Save file The possible alarm messages are listed in the tree structure under Alarm reason For an explanation of the alarm reasons refer to Differentiating between alarm calls on page 277 To edit a RO2 file load Load an existing file into the file section See File section on page 281 If for the related transmitter no R02 file exists then a new file has to be created New which is then to be loaded Load Camera 1 0001 Number of alarm camera images 0 Number of live images ik fo AB fo Sh fo 4 fo 5 fo B fo ie fo 8 jo 3 fo 10 fo Repeatings of live job fo Number of pre alarm images fo 2 o sjo sjo sjo so zo ep sp 10f0 Maximum connection duration Os Automatic disconnect OCs when all images have been received Copy these values to all alarm reasons Copy i e Select the respective alarm reason e g Camera control inputs Camera 0001 in orde
138. 0 In OK 5 5 B 8 5 Cancel T w x w w 34 21 GB 34 21 GB 34 21 GB 34 21 GB 34 21 GB Site archive state Default Help Operating mode Simplex Select Simplex Live image transmission or recording or archive evaluation if the device is currently only ever going to be carrying out one of these three functions Duplex Simples Live image transmission or Recording or Archive evaluation 0 Duplex Recording of Archive evaluation Triples Live image transmission and Recording and Archive evaluation Select Duplex Live image transmission and recording or archive evaluation if you want images to continue being recorded while you are connected to the device and are accessing live images This mode does not record images while you are accessing the image archive Select Triplex Live image transmission and recording and archive evaluation if you want images to continue being recorded while you are connected to the device and are accessing live or archive images Unlike Duplex this operating mode not only allows live images to be accessed and recorded at the same it also allows you to access the image archive during image recording Recording is however limited to tracks whose archives are not currently being accessed Note The Mode applies to all camera tracks on the hard disk drive Please note that image recording and transmission are considerably slower when Duplex or Triplex is activated
139. 0 hi speed interface USB 2 0 type A to B printer style cable for connecting to the transmitter with a maximum length of two meters 3 CamControl LITE or CamControl PRO software 4 One of the following HeiTel VideoGateway device series with the appropriate firmware and CamControl software Please note the requirements of the dependent installation processes e SVR series page 295 CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 Cam4mobile 10 e SVR s Series page 299 CamDisc HNVR 10 CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2c CamServer 2 e VG series page 301 CamServer VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamTel VG 4 CamTel VG 10 Cam4mobile VG 2c 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s CamDisc VG HNVR 8 9 1 3 Installation of the USB driver for SVR series Currently the USB function can only be used with the following devices if their firmware is version 1 58 or higher e CamDisc SVR 4 and CamDisc SVR 10 device serial no CQxxxxxx and CVxxxxxx e CamTel SVR 4 and CamTel SVR 10 devices serial no TQxxxxxx and TVxXxxxxx e Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 devices serial no MQxxxxxx and MVxxxxxx 27769 02 295 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis To use a USB direct connection with your CamControl LITE or CamControl PRO software it will be necessary to have particular drivers installed The drivers which are
140. 00 MRU This setting for MRU Maximum Receive Unit is provider dependent standard value 1500 Internal GPS Activate this setting if you are using the internal GPS feature of the 3G 4G wireless module When the GPS functionality of the serial channel is activated this function has a priority over the internal GPS Activate this tick box if you are using an active antenna 7 4 2 1 Provider data The following provider data was researched and tested in May 2011 This data is subject to change always get the current 3G 4G access data from your provider Germany As of May 2011 Provider Username Password APN Switzerland As of May 2011 ussen ono fant erse omno oem OrarecH ong leno 27769 02 135 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis United Kingdom As of June 2011 Provider Username Password O Orange BTMobie or 7 4 3 External modem Open the External modem dialogue box from the menu under the Connections node The External modem tab allows you to configure an externally connected modem or an external ISDN TA terminal adapter If the HeiTel ISDN card is built into your device configure this internal ISDN TA in the Internal ISDN TA tab see Internal ISDN TA Modem on page 137 If you want to operate your transmitter with an external modem ISDN TA you may also program your device using a terminal program and then save the settings in the modem permanently Then all y
141. 10 Number of connection channels Number of connection With the latest version of CamControl PRO you have the option of channels choosing between 1 and 21 connection channels You can configure the number of channels in the file CAMCTRL INI Add the following entries using the same format as the other parameters in this file See Configuration file with modifiable keys on page 257 VIDEOSERVER Connection channels NUMOFCONN 9 Number of simultaneous connection channels e 9 Default setting e Range 1 21 Depending on how many connection channels you have selected you will have a main panel with the corresponding number of side panels as described for the program interface see Overview of basic functions on page 17 When using more than 9 connection channels with CamControl PRO then it might be required to reduce the IPCAMSIZE value see Upper limits for the display of live images from IP cameras on page 263 to a value smaller than 5 in order to be able to start the software correctly From version 4 12 CamControl PRO also supports widescreen displays 16 9 or 16 10 format with full usage of the screen size Moreover other fixed or free formats can be specified and the number of columns and lines for the side panels can be defined See Program window SCREEN on page 267 8 2 4 11 Specified path for logfiles Specified path If CamControl PRO version 4 02 or newer is used the receiver logfile the
142. 6 09 13 20 21 Login demo Nw 0 A 47 C r4 7 2011 06 09 13 20 19 Logout demo 0 UNK Dp 8 2011 06 09 13 20 19 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 f 9 2011 06 09 13 20 16 Login demo NW 0 7 47 C f 10 2011 06 09 13 20 14 Logout demo 0 UNK Pl 11 2011 06 09 13 20 14 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 ri 12 2011 06 09 13 20 11 Login demo N W 0 7 47 C Z 13 2011 06 09 13 20 08 Logout demo 0 CMD VY 14 2071 06 09 13 20 08 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 1h 2011 NA N9 13 20 05 L onin demon Na NRA 47 er hd gt 703 2703 Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard M Enor Z A Action J M Information In the extended evaluation dialogue you can generally change the sorting of the entries by clicking on the column headings Type sequential number Date Event Type column The Type column shows the category of each logfile entry Error Action or Information These categories are available as a filter for the logfile see Filtering the logfile on page 48 column The column sequential number contains the current number of an sequential event The numbering is essentially assigned such that the latest event number when the logfile is called up is given the number 1 In the Date column the date and time are shown in the ISO 8601 format Event The Event column shows the individual events in a short text format For column more information on this topic please refer to the section Logfile entries only Ca
143. 9 02 Normally opened A 169 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Mode In the Mode column you select between the following options e Off default setting In this configuration a signal input never activates an alarm Alarm In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm when the video system is armed This function corresponds to the option Connect which was used up to and including CamControl PRO software V3 83 For video systems with device firmware 1 77 or older only the options Off and Alarm are available To use the extended alarm functions which are explained in the following text device firmware V1 78 or newer is mandatory e Fire Panic Continuously armed In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm regardless of whether the video system is armed Entry Exit Arm delay The video system is armed or disarmed within the monitored area In this configuration a signal input activates an alarm after a configurable time delay For every camera channel only one time period can be configured which applies to both Entry and Exit for the monitored object e The configurable time period for the delay for an alarm for disarming or arming is configured via a pull down menu Possible values are 10 s default setting 20s 30s 40s 50s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 7 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 25 min and 30 min Disarming When the monitored area is entered
144. 9 52 32 Price gt fo End E 3 Date Pri gt fo 23712 2005 BE Time EE 09 32 50 Price gt jjo Sel Search items combined AND M Syncronization Update picture from receipt C Update receipt from picture In the Time window area you can define both the Start and End of the search period by entering the Date and Time Alternatively you can select all transaction data allocated to the camera track in question by clicking Select all You can specify up to four text under Search parameter You can also specify a price if you wish When checking the price you can choose between lt less than or equal to equal to or gt greater than or equal to You can link all the selected parameters for the transaction data search using the logical operators AND or OR by making the relevant selection from the Search items combined drop down list In addition to this combined search you can also search according to individual criteria price only for example Now use the First sales receipt or Last sales receipt toolbar buttons to jump to the first last transaction that fulfils these search criteria Sales receipt back or Sales receipt forward shows the previous next sales receipt that fulfils the search parameter Matches with the search criteria within the sales receipt are marked in red line by line If there are no more results that meet your criteria the following message ap
145. C and the digital image transmission system It is connected via the serial interface in both cases Receiver side configuration Initialisation for transmitter ATSFEOX3S0 0 Init strings Initialisation for transmitters in private AT amp FXSEOX3S0 0 branch exchanges Baud rate 115200 baud Dialling string ATD Receiver side configuration Init strings Initialisation for receiver PC ATEEELYVLSO 0 290 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Initialisation for receiver PC in private AT amp FE1V1X3S0 0 branch exchanges Baud rate 115200 baud Dialling string ATD Special settings Pulse dial The modem can be preset to the European setting CTR21 Pulse dialling is not possible with this setting If the exchange does not accept tone dialling in rare cases e g old telecom systems switch to pulse dialling In this case the German setting DEU 49 is necessary Tone dialling is still supported e Switch to DEU 49 AT NC3 amp F amp W amp W amp 1 e Switch to CTR21 AT NC9O amp F amp W amp W amp 1 e Query current setting ATI6 e Tone or pulse dialling dial string ATDT or ATDP 8 8 2 ISDN TA Stollmann TA PPX The ISDN TA PPX successor of TA PP2 TA PPP is a reasonably priced external ISDN adapter It can transfer data via a B channel at 64 000 Bit s It is operated at the serial interface like a modem You don t need special drivers or application programs for the TA PPX It can therefore
146. Cam4mobile in connection with the device parameterisation described below can ensure that the HDD is put into standby mode prior to the timer controlled shutdown of the device For the internal switch off delay timer to be activated Main must be connected to the vehicle contact unswitched supply and Timer to the vehicle contact switched plus or ignition plus With this wiring see above Cam4mobile will delay switching off the device for a certain period after the vehicle ignition has been switched off The standard setting for DIP switches is a 10 minute delay before switching off If the system is programmed as follows the HDD is put into standby mode via the internal connection of Timer and Aux in2 HDD safe power down functions J Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched Timeout fio min a Normally closed v Stop writing to HDD when Y out was switched for 10 restart after 3 minutes or power off To use the internal connection of Timer and Aux in2 additional parameter settings are required e Timeout Ensure that you set this value to the same value set to delay the switching off of your Cam4mobile device The standard setting for DIP switches is a 10 minute delay before switching off Therefore the timeout should also be defined as 10 minutes Contacts Due to the internal switching of Timer and Aux in2 the activation contact must be programmed to Normally closed so that the HDD is set to s
147. CamControl PRO see Receiver Software Settings on page 77 Due to the fact that this is where you make important basic software settings it cannot be opened if there is an active connection to a transmitter in one of the four windows e Clicking plese koe CamControl PRO If there is at least one active connection to a transmitter however clicking this button only closes active connections first Event tree The event tree provides you with an overview of CamControl PRO events The event tree logs events uses both symbols and plain text together with the time and date to log events such program start with user name user change program over connection start connection closed configuration changes to transmitters and the receiver software You will find a detailed description of the event tree in the next section see Event tree on page 22 Transmitter related information In this window you can provide operating personnel with additional information on the transmitter whose images are shown in the main panel see Transmitter specific information on page 23 Window title bar The window title bar contains the program name CamControl PRO and the version number The name of the transmitter currently connected and displayed in the main panel is indicated in square brackets If the transmitter has not been given a name its serial number appears here see Device on page 122 18 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Cam
148. Control PRO Software Manual Status bar The status bar provides some information on current image transmission The fields have the following meanings from left to right e F1 help e Reason for connection Event Normal receiver call Online Timer Tour Online Alarm Alarm call triggered by the alarm input Online Alarm camera name Alarm call triggered by camera control input Online Alarm alarm panel camera Alarm call triggered by alarm panel via name VdS 2465 protocol Online Alarm camera name Alarm call triggered by control input on triggered control input the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter Online Motion camera name Alarm call triggered by motion internal motion sensor Online Alarm Reboot Alarm call triggered by a device restart Online Video loss camera name Alarm call triggered by the loss of video signal Online Camera pos Alarm call triggered by camera position authentication camera name authentication Online Alarm enable input Status change of the alarm enable input Online Callback Callback by transmitter Online HDD Error Alarm call triggered by hard disk error of the image storage device online sabotage triggered control Alarm call triggered by sabotage of a input control input connection type BS8418 online sabotage camera name Alarm call triggered by sabotage of a camera control input connection type BS8418 online sabotage camera name Alarm call triggered by sabotage of a triggered control input
149. Disc HNVR Analogue video When transmitting and storing analogue video images which CamDisc images HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices can process using the optional HYBRID Card 4 see HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 246 merging date time and image number into the image is obligatory Merging the camera name and or transmitter name into the display can be activated as an option globally for all camera channels Video images from IP CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices allow merge into video cameras image for IP cameras only in conditional refresh mode If you have activated one or more of the merge into image options listed for the transmission and or storage of video images from IP cameras please check for both modes whether you have similarly activated conditional refresh mode as a requirement for display e Connections Live video settings see Conditional refresh mode e Site Archive Video settings see Conditional refresh Note The display size of the merge in options available on IP cameras is dependent on the respective image resolution 228 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 22 Upload download The Upload Download function allows you to save the settings of devices as a mirror image on the receiver PC and to apply previously backed up mirror images to a device You can also transfer a backed up image from one device to another if the devices are of th
150. Event size Desired number of Use this field to define the number of events to be recorded by the events assigned camera The Possible number of events field specifies the maximum number of events as a guideline This value depends on the following factors Set track size see Track settings on page 191 Recording quality see Video settings on page 176 Preview images option See Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 Conditional refresh option see Video settings on page 176 Duration of pre alarm and post alarm Number of pre alarm and post alarm images Notes e Changing the number of events deletes all the images saved on this camera track If the desired number of events exceeds the possible number of events event size is adjusted to accommodate the desired number of events Event size is therefore adjusted so that the desired number of events is archived provided the minimum event size is maintained If the minimum event size is not reached your device automatically reduces the number of events and saves the corrected number of events after you click OK As of firmware version 1 76 the following HeiTel devices calculate in each case with a different minimum size per event e CamDisc HNVR series 3 MB e CamDisc SVRs series and CamServer 2MB e CamDisc SVR series and Cam4mobile series 1 MB To configure event recording it is imperative that you use CamControl PRO Version 3 83 or later Poss
151. Image authenticity check You can load the picture to be checked in the Check image dialogue box If the picture is authentic the message The image passed the authentication check is displayed If the authenticity check produces a negative result the image is judged INVALID and the additional error message Image is not valid Checksum is not equal appears The authenticity check will return an INVALID result if e the image has been modified e the image was not created by a HeiTel system e the image was created with older versions of CamControl 4 pre V2 23 CamControl 4 Windows software or the HeiTel Player pre V3 11 The Load image dialogue opens automatically when the results of the check are confirmed Another image can now be checked Another picture can also be loaded by clicking Check image 5 1 5 Exporting image sequences Exporting image sequences In addition to exporting individual pictures you can also export entire image sequences for a specific period of time You can save the sequence either as an AVI clip avi or as an HeiTel export archive hpx AVI clips If you export an image sequence as an AVI clip you can play it back with standard media players e g Windows Media Player on various hardware platforms with different operating systems Media players usually only allow you to play a file back in one direction at a limited number of playback speeds and without individual image switching The time it
152. Make sure that the alarm armed onoralanm detector contact is not continually connected to Connect _ SVR devices e Arm Your device if necessary Set the alarm detector contact to Connect Test your alarm detector the camera button in CamControl PRO is highlighted in red when a camera alarm detector input has been triggered contacts are not set End of Step 4 analogue telephone network 2 7769 _02 327 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis ISDN Networks Please check your ISDN TA at the receiver end by calling the TA from a second PC and a terminal program The receiver program must be started for this test and call acceptance must have been activated Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Alarm call is not received 1 PABX system At the transmitter end and during error at the transmitter requires an MSN picture transmission end PABX system requires a number for an outside line 5 Alarm contact is continually closed SVR device is not armed on or alarm contacts are not set 1 Enter the dial prefix 1 as ATD Assign an MSN to the transmitter Check the entered telephone number is a number required for the outside line Make sure that the alarm detector contact is not continually connected SVRdevices e Arm Your device if necessary Set the alarm detector contact to Connect Test your alarm detector the camera button in CamControl PRO is hi
153. Nonull modem connection possible _ 2 2 2 cece eee cece ec ecceceeeeeeeees 317 9 5 Noremote transmission possible _ 22 2222 c cece eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 318 10 Software Licence Contract _ 2 00 02 0 l licence cece ec eee cee ceeeeeeees 329 TA Addendum oso ah hs ied pe ees tee ees de sees 333 2 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 1 How to Use this Guide This guide provides you with information on all the functions and options of the HeiTel software program CamControl PRO You can use this software for operation alarm verification and configuration of up to 6000 image transmitters This guide relates to the functionality of the current CamTel SVR and CamDisc SVR devices and to the further devices which in terms of their function are largely identical Cam4mobile CamServer and CamDisc HNVR In addition this guide refers to the functionality of the end of 2012 introduced VG VideoGateway systems see VG Device series on page 109 Guide creation date This guide for the CamControl PRO software program was revised in July 2015 In the course of the constant further development of our products the functionality of CamControl PRO will also be continuously updated Information that could not be included in the guide at the time of printing can be found at the end of the guide in the section containing late breaking information see Addendum on page 333 Version information
154. OS and ATM transaction data Soyal data is not transmitted to your HeiTel video system via an intermediate POS ATM Adapter but instead only via a connected Soyal Card Reader with appropriate configuration of the serial interface The evaluation is conducted in the same way as the evaluation of ATM data described above see Text amp price search ATM data on page 43 The following options are available as possible search filters e Armed status e Change in armed status e CardID e Card reader ID e Card valid invalid Accessing GPS data If valid GPS data exists for the current image data of the Site Archive the following dialogue box may open automatically GPS Site Archive 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 0586 N 010 04 3263 E g 0 0 mph 2 Explanation of buttons A detailed explanation of the buttons can be found in the section on the GPS Live dialogue see GPS Live window on page 30 and on the extended GPS Live dialogue see Extended GPS Live window on page 30 Differences in the evaluation of the Site Archive When you access the Site Archive you can if necessary choose between two different procedures for archive image evaluation e Evaluation with optimal functionality The display of the dialogue box is not compulsory when evaluating archive images with valid GPS data e Use the GPS Viewer button or the View GPS Viewer function to show or hide the GPS dialogue box e Evaluation with optima
155. P camera a transmitter specific R01 file is written or added to in the RMCTRL directory of your CamControl PRO software It is possible to rename the button panel command buttons by modifying the corresponding R01 file see Function and structure of R01 files on page 272 The dialogue box is then closed In certain circumstances it is necessary to disconnect and reconnect to the HeiTel video system in order for the camera specific button panel for controlling the presets to be displayed for you Limited image size As of software version 3 82 and device firmware 1 74 camera resolutions of up to 2560 x 1600 Pixel i e 4 megapixel are supported Depending on the type of device the image transferred by the IP camera in each case must not exceed a certain maximum size e CamDisc HNVR 1 3MB e CamDisc SVRs CamServer CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamTel SVR 512 KB Note If necessary configure your IP camera so as to ensure that the limit values given above are not exceeded Generic GET commands These commands can be used to create commands to call up JPEG images for IP cameras that have a similar command structure to the IP cameras previously integrated These commands allow you to integrate additional IP cameras without firmware modifications For the manufacturer GENERIC 1 the Generic GET command 1 is used whilst for GENERIC 2 the Generic GET command 2 is used Maximum string length For the Generic GET instructi
156. RO Software Manual 9 Troubleshooting The following chapters should allow you to be able to determine the reasons for a fault or error and to independently arrive at a solution The individual chapters are structured systematically by theme Text passages should only be skipped when they contain a reference to additional information 9 1 Installation problems Type of Error Fault Possible Causes The computer crashes or Another active program Close all running programs Windows error messages prevents installation including virus scanners before are shown installing The installation program Installation CD is 1 Use the original installation reports an error defective CD Download latest program version from our website Category Service Downloads 9 2 Operating CamControl PRO 9 2 1 Video Frame Transmission Error in the Screen Display Error Fault Possible Causes Colours are shown with _ Defective or incorrect Use anew or updated driver or try errors disturbance tothe graphics adapter another colour palette 16 bit 24 right of the logo bit or 32 bit at a resolution of 1024x768 Screen logo is shown Incorrect screen settings Change the screen settings incorrectly Resolution 1024x768 16 bit Pictures in archive are Missing or incorrect Select a smaller screen faulty graphics driver resolution 1024x768 Select another colour palette Use another screen driver Pictures are shown
157. S a c21226 svdsniaentujacusacus pleadings eoce ecuehuedek 253 8 2 Program parameters CAMCTRL INI 0 00 000 022 e cece ee eee eee eee 253 8 3 Saving window positions 0 2 c lec c eee cece cece eee eceecceccecceeceeceeces 269 8 4 Changing the informational text FIRMA TXT 2 0 0 2 22 eee eee eee eee eee 271 8 5 Transmitter specific configuration files 02 022 c eee e cece cece eee e cee eeeee 2 1 8 6 Program parameters SERVICE INF 00 00 2 00022 e eee eee eee eee eee 283 8 7 Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series 2 22 22 o cece eee eee cee cece cee ceeeeeeeeeees 285 8 8 Configuring data transmission devices 22 0222 c cece eee e eee c ec eeeceeeee 290 8 9 Installation of device drivers 0 22 2 e cece cece cee cee cece eee e cee eeee 294 8 10 Additional software GPS Data Viewer 0 occ ccc cece eee cee ceeceees 308 8 11 Specification of the control inputs 2 2 22 2 ieee eee eee eee eee eee eeees 312 9 Troubleshooting 2 02 c cece cece c cece cece ccc e ec ence eee ee ceeeeeeteeeeeeees 315 9 1 Installation problems _ 0 22 22 cece eee eee cece eee eee ec ee ceececeeeeeseeseeee 315 9 2 Operating CamControl PRO 2 222 22 l cece cece eee oaaao nanan onna 315 9 3 Evaluating Contents of CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer 317 9 4
158. Server status window by double clicking on the program symbol e Thetop part displays program messages e The bottom part gives details in the status section about active connections the total number of connections and the connection port Where applicable it is followed by a list of the transmitters connected showing the serial number and IP address along with the date and time that the connection was established Step 2 The following steps are to be carried out prior to installation in the building e Start your receiver software and establish a connection to the corresponding transmitter using the CamControl PRO software via null modem or network e Make sure that the transmitter has suitable firmware 1 52 or newer After successfully establishing the connection to the device open the device settings Recorder settings Device by clicking on the Setup button The status of the firmware for example V 01 52 is displayed to the right of the term Version e Make a note of the serial number of your transmitter as this is needed for Step 3 e Switch to the settings for the leased line Recorder settings Connections H T connect see HTconnect on page 145 Recorder settings i x Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Madem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect f gt Device User Date amp Time E Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings
159. TZIP cameras 244 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual No image from IP camera No image If instead of a live image from the IP camera the message No video available is displayed this may be fora number of reasons e No IP connection to IP camera e Ensure that the IP camera can be reached under the specified IP address or the symbolic name used from the network of the HeiTel device If necessary check the recorder settings for Gateway and DNS server see Network TCP IP on page 129 Note The relevant information can be obtained from your Internet provider or system administrator e Access limitation through user name and password e Check whether live image reproduction of the IP camera is accessprotected by a user name and password If necessary enter the access data for the camera in the Configure dialogue See Configure User name Password on page 241 e Incompatible video compression procedure e At present only the JPEG or MJPEG image format is supported for the transfer of images from the IP camera to the HeiTel device Ensure therefore that your camera transfers the images in a suitable format Compressed video transfers with the standards H 264 or MPEG 4 are currently not Supported 7 25 1 Supported IP cameras A complete list of the integrated IP cameras is available under http www heitel com upload downloads en 11 technical product information IPcam_list pdf Generic comm
160. The COM identifier is invalid or unsupported From the Port drop down list you can select the COM port to which you want to connect your modem ISDN TA or the null modem cable Here you will also find the virtual COM interfaces provided by the Fossil driver for operating CAPI devices see Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers on page 293 If the selected COM interface is not available is being used by another application or does not support the specified Baud rate a corresponding error message will be displayed after you close the Receiver options dialogue box by clicking OK see Dial up connection with modem or external ISDN TA quick start on page 13 27769 02 89 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Since special serial data transmission equipment is shown on COM ports higher than COM9 COM interfaces from COM1 to COM99 can be selected in the drop down menu Port Baud Baud 175200 gt From the Baud drop down list select an appropriate transmission speed for the connection between the PC and the modem ISDN TA or between the PC and the transmitter connected directly via null modem cable In general you can select 115 200 Baud for all connections Some exceptions may require a different selection e Adirectly connected transmitter uses a different transmission speed e ISDN operation with channel bundling should take place at 230 400 Baud if your PC has a serial interface that su
161. The HeiTel transmitter itself does not support symbolic IP address names However a connection can be established to a symbolic address via a DNS domain name server Please contact your network administrator for assistance in setting up a symbolic address and for information on DNS service providers The use of asymbolic address can be particularly practical for contacting a transmitter at a continually changing IP address for example with a DSL connection You can decide the dialling string to be used for dialling out with Prefix 1 or Prefix 2 In general only one dialling prefix is used In this case select Prefix 1 If you are operating both analogue transmitters and ISDN transmitters and are using an ISDN TA that supports both analogue and ISDN connections you can specify one prefix for analogue connections and another for ISDN connections and assign them to the appropriate transmitters in Receiver options Port A D Consult the guide for your ISDN TA to find out whether such dialling control is possible and how to use it CamControl PRO does not support the direct use of ISDN cards via the CAPI interface or CAPI sharing solution in the network The CAPI 2 0 option is therefore disabled and greyed out If you still want to address CAPI based devices however use a Fossil driver that contacts CAPI solutions via virtual serial interfaces see Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers on page 293 This area displays the s
162. V3 83 e Off The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the CI Adapter CIO Adapter never give the alarm when triggered Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs In addition to giving an alarm for external camera control inputs or motion detection under the conditions named above see Requirements on page 168 a combination of camera alarm inputs or inputs to the CI Adapter CIO Adapter and to the internal motion detection can result Your HeiTel video system processes the combined alarm triggers from the device internal motion detection and signal inputs over a time interval 5 seconds A signal input is always reported as the cause of alarm The following table sheds light on this alarm behaviour Trigger with the preselected time interval 5 seconds Reason for alarm 1 Trigger level 2 Trigger level Motion detection Camera control input Camera control input Camera control input Motion detection Camera control input Motion detection Input CI Adapter CIO Adapter Input Cl Adapter Cl1O Adapter Input Cl Adapter CIO Adapter Motion detection Input Cl Adapter ClO Adapter 168 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis The camera control input and CI Adapter CIO Adapterinput are triggered in any order Motion detection Explanations CamControl PRO Software Manual Motion detection Input Cl Adapter CIO Adapter The camera control input and CI Adapter CIO
163. a 9 Camera 10 Command Delete audio track Recording duration CamDisc SVR CamDisc VG as well as CamDisc VG HNVR Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile or CamServer reserves five per cent of hard drive capacity for storing audio data Your device shows you the maximum recording duration in days calculated based on the size of the hard drive A hard drive with a storage capacity of 4TB hard drives gt 2TB only VG series produces a maximum recording period of approximately 1060 days continuous audio recording Audio recording Click On to activate audio recording You can choose from the following types of recording Record all time Recording only while image recording Storage procedure In this mode audio data are recorded permanently In this mode audio data are only recorded when images are also being saved for the selected camera This ensures that in the case of event or timer controlled image recordings for example only the relevant audio data can be saved In such a way recording capacity is optimised Audio data are saved on a FIFO basis first in first out in both operating modes Once the maximum storage capacity has been reached the oldest recordings are replaced by the newest The Recording duration and Audio recording areas are disabled for devices without an Audio Card so the corresponding configuration options are not available Audio recording co
164. a connection in the event of alarm see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 As the relay is active in idle state power failures can also be signalled Closed while recording If you select this option the relay is switched for the duration of an active recording Once all active recordings have ended it reverts to idle Closed while alarm If you select this option the relay is switched for the duration of the connection Once all active alarms have ended it reverts to idle The relay follows the alarm LED of the HeiTel video system Closed while alarm If you select this mode of operation the relay is switched for the duration enabled of the arming Once the device has been disarmed it reverts to idle The relay follows the armed LED of the HeiTel video system Relay options Closed while idle If this option is selected the relay is switched to idle and released on activation This option can be used for operating modes Latch Momentary and Closed while connected Reset offline Reset offline causes a relay operating as a Latch to revert to idle after the connection has terminated Note If the Reset offline option is enabled the relay in question possibly cannot be switched via applications that use the HeiTel Web API depending on API version such as CamControl MV CamControl Android CamControl Windows Phone CamControl iPad or CamControl iPhone This also applies to the function of the relay in the Web Server Closed
165. a hint during an active connection 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Showing camera hints Site Archive Log file amp Error relay amp Device armed wA 03 01 06 14 08 48 0020 Reter H 03 01 06 14 10 00 1400 C 500004 CamDisc svr10 1 Or PC Archive E lg 03 01 06 14 48 06 1500 C 500004 CamDisc svr10 1 Or F MANNA 14 48 54 FSO CvS4eN1 Al CamMise serin 1 Or During an active connection you can have reference images that have been assigned to individual cameras shown as camera hints These images are shown as soon as the mouse pointer is positioned over the camera button The reference image is displayed until the configured display time elapses The image is also shown for as long as the left mouse button is held and the magnifying glass is positioned over the picture regardless of the configured display time Clicking the reference image with the left mouse button zooms the picture by approximately 20 The image can be zoomed by 20 six times Clicking the reference image at maximum zoom returns it to its initial size The display time begins again each time the view is changed You can modify the initial size of the reference image and its display time in the CAMCTRL INIfile See Configuration reference images on page 260 27769 02 103 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 9 4 Device grouping cascading By grouping the devices or cascading you receive the option of
166. a receiver IP address is only possible via the connection integrated network adapter see Network TCP IP y on page 129 Sending an alarm via an external network connection is not possible Alarm by null modem If the four entry fields for telephone numbers IP addresses are left connection blank alarms will be sent by an existing null modem connection C al bac k Execute Callback Execute Callback Execute Callback If you select Callback for an entered telephone number or IP address you can call back this transmitter on the next redial After a connection has been established the Execute Callback dialogue box is displayed for about four seconds Click Skip Callback if you don t want to call back The current connection will remain active in this case If you click Execute callback or wait four seconds the active connection will be closed and the transmitter will dial the first number or address activated The status bar in the control field will indicate successful callback by the reason for connection Online Callback Note For your transmitter to be able to call you back at least one user must have been created see User on page 123 Number of re dials Number of re dials defines the number of redial attempts in the event of failure to establish a connection Pause between redials Pause between re dials s is the interval in seconds between re dial attempts Pause between Pause between repeating l
167. a text editor to create the R02 files e Create the necessary sections e Save the transmitter specific R02 file with the serial number of the digital image transmission system as the file name with the file extension RO2 in the R02 sub directory e g CV542016 R02 e Use the file name STANDARD RO2 for the general R02 file used for all transmitters that haven t been assigned their own R02 file Note When creating the STANDARD R0O2 file ensure that you define the processing profile for all alarm calls so that you don t miss any alarm messages Test your R02 files Creating R02 files using the R02 File Editor To simplify the creation of R02 files CamControl PRO Software from version 4 06 includes a R02 File Editor This additional tool is only available as English language version You will find the RO2Editor exe program file in the sub directory R02 of the program path e g C CAMCONTROL PRO RO2 Starting the R02 File Editor Start RO2Editor exe file 280 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual gt Number of alarm camera images D gt Number of live images 1 10 2 jo afo 4 fo 510 6 fo E fo s fo s fo 10 f0 Repeatings of live job jo gt Number of pre alarm images if 2 ap fp sf sfo z fo s fo sjo wf 0 s Automatic disconnect when all images have been received Structure of the user interface The user interface is d
168. activated in the receiver settings see Take a call on page 78 e ls the correct telephone number of the receiver PC entered in the transmitter See Phone and IP numbers on page 139 e Is the modem ISDN TA correctly configured see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 322 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e Are you attempting to make an alarm call via TCP IP Please check the cabling a Crosslink cable is used only for the direct connection between PC Receiver and Transmitter Please read the section for your application or for the type of data transmission you are using Analogue Operating an analogue dial modem at your PC page 322 ISDN ISDN card or external ISDN TA page 322 Analogue Telephone Networks First check your analogue receiver modem by calling it from a mobile telephone or normal telephone Some of the following errors faults can be excluded by making this check Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Call is not accepted even 1 Incorrect modem 1 Check the modem init string from a telephone initialisation and when required add the 2 Incorrect receiver AT command SO 0 settings Check whether one of the two options automatic call acceptance or automatic operation is ticked in the Receiver Settings Call Acceptance box Call is accepted from a Transmitter can not dial At the transmitter end during an telephone al
169. address has changed LAN device autodetection The LAN device autodetection is activated in the transmitter directory either with a right click in the transmitter list or via the button Add In both cases a context sensitive popup menu will open See Popup menu on page 104 Add new group Add new transmitter Cut transmitter Demo CamBisc svri0 1 IP Crits LAN device autodetection In this popup menu you open a dialogue window with the name Device detection in local area network by left clicking on the function LAN device autodetection Search for devices in local area network After opening the window the CamControl software will automatically search through the local network for current HeiTel devices SVR series Cam4mobile series CamServer CamDisc HNVR and will list the devices found including the following information serial number name IP port and IP address As aresult of this search only those devices are displayed that will fulfil all of the following conditions e The device is operational and connected to the network e A fixed or dynamic IP address of the local network was assigned to the device e The device has the respective firmware available minimum requirement Firmware 1 38 and the function LAN auto detection support was activated see LAN auto detection support on page 132 108 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Device detection in local area network xj Search fo
170. ail function contain text information only in English Alarm image The file name for the alarm image always consists of the date and time without separator and has the file extension jpg for the image format JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group File name of the alarm image referred to in the sample alarm message 20070608111842 4pg Send email in case of picture warning threshold reached Subject Transmitter name or Serial number reason for alarm Camera Camera name if present Date and Time Example of a possible subject line CamDisc SVR 10 1 warning threshold continuous recording reached camera 01 Camera 1 2008 12 02 15 24 01 Body of email The body of the email is prepared in fuller detail and contains where necessary the optional supplementary text or link and or the alarm image Alarm message location transmitter location Attpr 925 168 314 170 Unit Cambisce SVR 10 FL CV651026 Reason warning threshold continuous recording reached camera 01 Camera 1 Dates ZO08 l2 02 152724202 All messages within the body of the email that were generated automatically by the email function contain text information only in English 144 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Alarm image An alarm image as attachment is not generated for this warning even if this option is enabled for the target address 7 4 8 HTconnect Call up the dialogue window HTconnect via the selection menu und
171. al instances a regular alarm imminent at the same moment can be activated instead of the desired transmitter e The theoretical limit for HTconnect connections is specified by the receiver software CamControl PRO which is limited to 6000 transmitter entries Please note that the use of large numbers of HTconnect connections can result in performance drops when operating the receiver software CamControl PRO e Foreach connected transmitter a data volume of approximately 6 bytes min is generated e Call Accept must not be switched off in the receiver software settings e The HTconnect Server is managed as an independent program by the receiver software and should remain minimised in the taskbar A flashing symbol indicates that one or more connections are established to correspondingly configured transmitters 2 7 69 _02 113 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis e Since correspondingly configured transmitters always establish a connection to the receiver software CamControl PRO from their end the availability of one or more transmitters for receiver calls can be restricted in particular immediately after start up of the receiver software or in the event of changes to the transmitter settings If necessary you are informed of this via this information window when dialling the transmitter manually PORT A Error Cannot build up connection Status Transmitter not available at the moment This window is also displayed
172. ally and to automatically switch to the relevant camera Configuration takes place in a transmitter specific R01 file see Extended software settings on page 276 27769 02 27 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Error relay e Error relay g Device armed SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer have an error relay that signals a notifiable operating mode CamControl PRO signals this status by means of a red error relay LED An operating fault e g no video signal or notification of a certain operating mode e g storage warning threshold reached may be involved Evaluating the transmitter logfile will provide more precise information on the actual cause see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 Alarm enable input The red LED display in front of the text Device armed indicates that the alarm enable input is switched to ground Relays Relay 1 The current VG and SVR devices CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile CamServer and some older HeiTel transmitters have two relays The buttons for controlling these relays are located underneath the camera buttons You can configure these two relays in line with your requirements in Recorder settings See Relays on page 208 Latch hal Momentary Closed while connected Closed on Error Closed while recording Closed while alarm Closed while alarm enabled e Relay as latch or as an with automatic reset on connection being close
173. ally terminated 10k allows different circuitry for Normally opened and Normally closed 10 kQ Control input R 10 kQ Control input gt gt Normally opened Normally closed For circuitry with a resistance a distinction is made between two different states e Not triggered The figures show the safe state in each case not triggered of the detector line or the control input for the variants Normally opened and Normally closed Camera alarm If the Normally opened or Normally closed contact is operated depending on the type of circuit a camera alarm is activated Manipulations of the detector line such as interruption or short circuit cause triggering as soon as the CamDisc VG 4c no longer measures the predefined control resistance of 10 kOhm 40 Normally closed BS 8418 Ri R Control input Ri Rt 1 5 KO 41 In the wiring variant Normally closed BS 8418 with two resistances a distinction is made between three different states e Not triggered The figure shows the safe state not triggered of the detector line or the control input e Camera alarm If the Normally closed contact is operated a camera alarm is activated e Sabotage alarm If the detector line is interrupted or shorted a sabotage alarm is activated 27769 02 313 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 314 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl P
174. amTel svr4 3 ISDN Demo CamTel svr 4 IP F Neman CamTel owed HA ISMN zi Modify Add Delete Dial Cancel Help You open the Transmitter index by clicking one of the Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 buttons as long as these connection channels have been configured for serial or TCP IP dial up connections You can use the transmitter list in this dialogue box to maintain or select the saved transmitters see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 If after you click one of the Port A D or Port 1 9 buttons the Transmitter index does not open then this connection window is reserved for connections made via a leased line or Nullmodem To find out how to configure the individual communication channels refer to the relevant section in this guide see PC Archive on page 84 6000 transmitters The Transmitter index can manage up to 6000 transmitters The transmitters are sorted alphabetically in the transmitter list The current and maximum number of transmitters is displayed alongside the heading Transmitter list in the form 27 6000 Note If the maximum number of transmitters for the transmitter index is nearly reached and if additional transmitters are being supplemented via the function Device detection in local area network see Device detection in local area network on page 108 then the transmitter list is only filled until the maximum number of entries is reached The user recei
175. amera PIR Analptics IntrusionT race h Shut down OK Cancel Site archive state IntrusionT race h IntrusionT race h Number of Licences 8 566D9E54 F802 449E B6FO 672C638478D5 v Maximum number of IntrusionTrace h channels running on this device type 8 vV On V On V On MV On M On On M On F On On a On oD yy DP Aa u N Open configuration tool Boxes live Boxes s archive 5S66D9E54 F802 449E B6F0 672C638478D5 v A0CCSICF 7760 4393 95EC D3BF158F5503 v 6326BCF1 222F 4414 80B4 23BA925D520F v f 31ED268 3D72 4F74 B7D0 909BDE 466308 No License v No License lt I Iv x 1q AI lt I xI l No License No License No License u m ie i od I No License Close Configuration windows Before you can allocate licenses to cameras you have to obtain licenses using the Xtralis license exchange tool Please refer to the Xtralis Xchange Tool User Manual document no 27816 Allocate the available licenses to the desired camera channels by activating the checkboxes and selecting a license from the list 154 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 11 Analytics IntrusionTrace Configuration Note IntrusionTrace is only available with CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx as well as ipVG and only in combination with JPEG MJPEG cameras not H 264 When using analogue cameras we highly recommend using the analogue realtim
176. amming for the conditional refresh Image size and format depend on the IP camera e CamTel SVR CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs CamServer Cam4mobile CamTel VG CamDisc VG CamServer VG Cam4mobile VG e Images are transferred from analogue cameras depending on the programming for the conditional refresh mode Regardless of the parameters set for the conditional refresh mode images from IP cameras are always transferred as full screen images Image size and format depend on the IP camera Access the E Mail tab through the selection menu under the Connections node In the event of an alarm you can inform up to two recipients by email with or without an alarm image using the E Mail function 142 Send email in case of alarm Device User Date amp Time Connections Network Recorder settings j x Network TCPAP External modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_4 gt E Mail v Send email in case of alarm V Send email in case of picture warning threshold reached ERAR Server information External Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings HT connect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays Outgoing mail SMTP smtp heitel com User information Account name alarmdemo heitel com Password Optional message
177. an save both continuous and event recordings within one camera track depending on the how the device see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 is configured Double click the relevant node to switch between the different recordings Accessing continuous recordings 00 00 00 4 a o 23 59 59 Double click a continuous recording to open the last image in the recording The recorded images for a single day can be accessed using the slider The values on the top left and bottom right indicate the start and end times of the recording period You can select an image within this view using the slider The control elements listed above are also available See Transmitter archive controls on page 37 27769 02 39 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Accessing event recordings The current event in event recordings is identified by this symbol 16 26 05 Mrrrrerrrrrr rrr rrrarirtrririredl mp g Q Pb rrrrrrrrrt ebb rrrrrrrrrrrrerirdd 16 26 29 You can select an event in an event controlled recording by its date and trigger type I S M In the slider the pre alarm images are shown in green the alarm image in red and the post alarm images in yellow Once you have selected an event the software shows the image that triggered the alarm with a red frame If you play back the entire alarm sequence using the control elements see Transmitter archive controls on page 37 the pre alarm images are fra
178. ands for IP cameras Generally speaking the use of additional IP cameras can only be realised via updates of device firmware Generic GET commands can be used to create commands with which to call up JPEG images for IP cameras whose command structure corresponds to the IP cameras already integrated see Generic GET commands on page 243 These commands allow you to integrate additional IP cameras without firmware modifications Compatible IP cameras and OEM versions Other camera models by a manufacturer may in principle be compatible with the IP cameras listed here so that they function with a model from the list Even if the camera models are by different manufacturers the cameras in question can be the same OEM versions If necessary ask your supplier or manufacturer whether your camera model is command compatible with an IP camera from the list 2 7769 _02 245 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 26 HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR The HYBRID Card 4 dialogue window is only displayed for you when using a CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR If your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR is equipped with one or two correctly installed HYBRID Card 4 expansion cards you can connect up to four or eight analogue cameras Minimum requirement for CamDisc HNVR devices firmware 1 82 Minimum requirement for CamDisc VG HNVR devices firmware 4 02 xl HYBRID Card 4 Device User HYBRID Card 4 1 Function
179. anel for the P T head To synchronise the date and time you can configure Cam4mobile so that it is possible to receive IBIS data via this interface see IBIS function with Cam4mobile on page 214 4 5 3 Displaying GPS data If once a connection has been established a HeiTel video system supplies valid GPS data and if the connection is displayed in the main window the position data and the current speed including further additional functions are displayed on the following dialogue box GPS Live 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 0586 N 010 04 3263 E 3 0 0 mph Display of the dialogue box is compulsory when valid GPS data is received Note Ensure that the serial interface of the HeiTel video system is programmed correctly see GPS function for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG on page 214 4 5 3 1 GPS Live window In addition to position data and the current speed the GPS Live window offers additional functions relating to the display of the position or the route in Google Earth or OpenStreetMap Note Please note the licence terms and conditions of use for Google Earth or OpenStreetMap 30 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Window title bar Alongside GPS the window title bar includes the word Live when displaying live images The following date and time display shows when this data was received or recorded Whilst valid data records are being received GPS data is updated by the HeiTe
180. ange 1 to 99 RTx List text button label maximum 12 characters CMDONx Command sent when button is activated CMDOFFx Command sent when button is deactivated 27769 02 275 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Variables to rename the relay of the CIO Adapter Global relay control of CIO Adapters Irrespective of the camera selected the relay buttons of the ClO adapter are displayed as global control elements to the right of the device relay button see Variables for global control elements on page 275 Transmitter specific renaming of relays Relays of the CIO adapter can be renamed by entering a new description While other control elements are used on a camera specific basis the following variables are applicable only to the section ClIO_GRELAY BINTEXT_1 Description Relay 1 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT_ 2 Description Relay 2 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT_ 3 Description Relay 3 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT 4 Description Relay 4 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT 5 Description Relay 5 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT_6 Description Relay 6 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT_ 7 Description Relay 7 maximum 12 characters BINTEXT_ 8 Description Relay 8 maximum 12 characters 8 5 1 1 Extended software settings Variable for automatic signalling and or camera switching when change occurs at the camera control inputs In the section CAMINPUTS you define whether you want automati
181. ansmitted images following a successful connection Configuration of the Image Viewer The Image Viewer is activated and the number of images for the image sequence configured with CAMCTRL INI See Image Viewer configuration on page 261 2 0 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 4 Changing the informational text FIRMA TXT If CamControl PRO is not connected to a digital image transmission system then an instruction text is shown in the main panel You can change this text and include for example the address of your dealer or the address and telephone number of a contact for support queries CamControl PRO Heilel Digital Video GmbH Heilel Digital Video USA Corp www heltel com www heltel com infoUSA heitel com Fib for help 00070000007000 4 FIRMA TXT The text shown in the main panel is saved in the file FIRMA TXT in the receiver software s program directory C CAMCONTROL PRO YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_PROGRAM NAME You can edit this file with a simple text editor Simply replace the text after the equals signs with your own text ADRESSE FAl Tragen Sie in der Textdatei FA2 FIRMA TXT in Ihrem FA3 CamControl PRO Verzeichnis FA4 Ihre Support Adresse ein FA5 Enter Your support address FA6 in the textfile FIRMA TXT in PA Your CamControl PRO directory If you don t want any text to appear at all then either delete the file or delete the text after the equals signs 8 5 Transmitte
182. ansmitter name was entered in the device only the serial number is shown The next level contains the individual transmitter nodes followed by the transmitter name with serial number The next level contains the day nodes with the date If you click one of the day nodes the individual archives with symbol for call type time type T A no letter code and the call type in plain text are shown on the right Tour T Alarm call A Manual call No letter code You can load the selected archive by either double clicking it or clicking Load in the CACO4 Archive Browser dialogue box 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 5 1 2 Image search controls File Picture Selection Call View Tools Info co Gs W 3B a gt DOO wo TE Call 1 1 2 Camera 2 Pic 4390 7123 12 09 05 09 51 56 7 Status bar The status bar contains the following information from left to right The number of the current call and the number of all the connections saved in the archive The reason for connection in the case of alarm calls alarm and tours tour The camera number and camera name The current image number and the total number of images saved in this call Date Time Images from the transmitter archive Penaz BE Video images that come from the Site archive or a transmitter s pre alarm are identified with the word Archive and the image number assigned in the transmitter archive both of whi
183. antly slower than paging forwards for technical reasons If images with more than one image per second have been saved then either the first or the last image in this sequence with the same timestamp will be shown as a search result This depends on whether you are searching forwards or backwards from the current image 36 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Saving image sequences in the receiver archive When playing back image sequences from the CamDisc SVR archive these images will only be saved in the receiver archive if you did not select the Preview option Furthermore the Archive active option must be selected in Receiver options Archive options see PC Archive on page 84 If images are being saved this is indicated by the word Recording in red Transmitter archive controls Archive access is controlled with the buttons at the top of the Transmitter archive dialogue box Show previous day Show next day First oldest image of the event or continuous recording o One image back Play 2 One image forward Last most recent image Event back only for event recordings Event forward only for event recordings Save image This function saves the current images with a checksum in JPEG format The checksum allows you to check using the image authenticity check of the CamControl PLAYER or the software integrated into CamcControl PRO for accessing the PC archive whether an image has been
184. are error x Indicates a serious hardware problem Field no yes x classifies the error which is displayed in plain text as follows e Clock Timer module e Clear Flash Faulty flash memory e Write Flash Faulty flash memory e DSP Faulty DSP module e Shared memory Faulty memory module The device must be repaired D amp T Hardware error Indicates a DSP error on a HYBRID Card 4 no yes DSP x not found installed ina CamDisc HNVR CamDisc CamDisc VG HNVR x states the respective DSP HNVR CamDisc module If necessary the respective HYBRID VG HNVR only Card 4 must be repaired Add an excerpt of the relevant logfile entries to the RMA documents 286 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual D amp T No secure code The hard disks have been configured by the no yes can t store pictures manufacturer specifically for operation with HeiTel devices The device cannot be operated with standard hard disks D amp T Temperature very A critical temperature of at least 70 C was no yes high recorded inside the device D amp T Clock adjusted The clock could not be read at start up The no yes firmware date of manufacture has been set This may indicate a faulty battery D amp T Videodecoder x The video decoder has been checked at start no yes error up This message indicates a faulty video decoder at video input x Connection messages D amp T Alarmcall failed Alar
185. are mutually exclusive and cannot be enabled at the same time History The History function eliminates short term changes in the image You can select a number of images Off 1 image to 4 images in which changes must be detected successively at intervals of 40 ms in order for the video motion detection to be triggered H ort 1 image 2 Mages 3 images 4 images Brightness compensation The Brightness compensation function eliminates global changes in the image Global changes are changes that occur in more than about 40 percent of the selected image areas compare Motion detection zones These global changes may occur due to major changes in light conditions such as the movement of cast shadows or light reflected or diffused off large surfaces For the Brightness compensation a Blocking time must also be set 0 5 s to 5 0 s at 0 5 intervals This Blocking time defines the time interval from the suppression of a global change until a true alarm can next be detected 27 69 _02 149 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Note High values for the Blocking time may reduce the rate of false alarms that are triggered by camera switching changes in light cast shadows or similar However true alarms will not be detected during the Blocking time 7 8 Motion detection zones analogue cameras The digital image transmission systems have one integrated motion detector per camera input The integrated motion
186. are requested to install an USB driver after having plugged in the USB cable Follow the instructions in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 295 Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file PL2502NW_v20044 exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions 8 9 2 Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s The USB direct connection see USB on page 82 requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 12 MBit s If you use the USB direct connection with a CamDisc HNVR you can obtain a maximum nominal transfer rate of 480 MBit s Standard settings for the USB direct connection The USB direct connection is made available in the first position upon activation in the transmitter list in the CamControl PRO software The default data for this transmitter data is as follows and should not be changed e Transmitter name USB direct connection e P address and port 192 168 138 95 3000 Note This connection data should not be changed If necessary enter a further transmitter entry fora USB connection see Additional USB connection on page 295 USB cabl
187. arm call from existing connection transmitter is not received Enter the AT command X3 in the modem init string Enter dial prefix 1 ATD Check the telephone number entered is a number required for an outside line Make sure that your alarm detector contact is not continually connected CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR e Arm Your device if necessary Test your alarm detector the camera button in CamControl PRO is highlighted in red when a camera alarm detector input has been triggered End of Step 3 analogue telephone network ISDN Network To check whether your receiver is not able to accept alarm calls via ISDN then you must first be able to call your receiver from an ISDN data terminal data service If you call your receiver using a modem then the receiver will only accept the call when a hybrid adapter is attached to it that is able to receive call from both analogue as well as ISDN sources In this case you can also consult the instructions for analogue telephone networks see Analogue Telephone Networks on page 323 27769 02 323 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Check using a Second Receiver Software In order to exclude the transmitter as a possible source of error you should not check the call acceptance of the receiver using the alarm function of a transmitter unless you are sure that this transmitter is working correctly Instead of this you can call your receiver PC using the CamCon
188. ast caller If this option is selected the last caller is written to the logfile shortly before the connection is closed Note To determine the last caller for the external modem ISDN TA enter the relevant AT command for modem initialisation in Recorder settings see External modem on page 136 The command depends on the modem ISDN TA employed refer to the appropriate manual Change of inputs If this option is selected the result of input status changes i e input closed or open is written to the logfile The Only when armed option enhances this function If it is selected then changes to inputs are only logged if your CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamTel VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer is armed Temperature If this option is selected the operating temperature at dial up is written to the transmitter logfile Note For temperatures of 70 C and over the message Temperature very high is written to the logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 This message is entered even when Temperature is not selected HeiTel video systems that are equipped with the device firmware V 1 96 or later must always write the temperature to the transmitter logfile on login 2 169_02 223 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Video signal loss If this option is selected a corresponding message is written to the detection transmitter logfile if a video s
189. at has been triggered is shown in parenthesis Next transmit the configuration data to your HeiTel image transmitter with OK Display of triggered inputs of the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter When running the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter on HeiTel video systems the triggering of inputs assigned to cameras in accordance with the requirements given above are indicated accordingly In all multi image displays Quadscreen Ten Camera Group signalling takes place with a red frame See Activity messages from cameras in the multi image display on page 27 whilst in the individual screen display the colour of the relevant camera name changes from black to red see Activity messages from cameras on page 27 Note The Hang up and redial on alarm see Hang up and redial on alarm on page 226 device function does not take into account a colour marking on the camera following an alarm however the correct camera is displayed in the individual image display 7 25 IP Camera The IP Camera dialogue box allows you to use an IP camera see Supported IP cameras on page 245 in place of an analogue camera Minimum requirements for HeiTel devices Firmware 74 27 69 _02 237 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Whilst your HeiTel device will always offer the full scope of functions when connected to analogue cameras limitations can arise when using IP cameras General camera functions are retained but may be ignored by
190. ation to change the device setup can make a relevant modification of the password Notes All recipients using these user data may have to be adjusted to the changed password before connecting to this server again e CamControl PRO Transmitter index Receiver options User e Event Management System Master Data Management e CamControl MV Camera list Edit e CamcControl iPhone CamControl iPad Transmitter list Edit e CamControl Android Transmitter list Edit 124 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Creating a user profile Live cameras Archive cameras he oK In these fields select those cameras to be activated for the user in question during live transmissions and those additional cameras to be activated while saving images during archive access If a user selects a disabled camera a lock icon against a black background will be displayed instead of a video image Options This field allows you to assign more transmitter configuration and control options to the user in question The following options are available Option Description o Modify setup Allows the user to modify transmitter settings PTZ Allows the user to control pan and tilt systems in the relevant dialogue box Remote functions Allows the user to control external devices with the internal remote adapter Audio Enables audio transmission for the relevant user only with installed Audio Card and for CamDisc HNVR devices Transparent cha
191. ays PRO 45DH Yes 0 000080000 0 0 PTZ control PRO 45 Yes Serial channel Video out PRO 18 Yes Alarm panel St file QO Walk test Configuration Discover PIR Delete packet errors rn xtras prone Downoad 1 PRO E 18WH IR867 Firmware update 4 Presence OK General z Camera Preset Ev ance Cee e 3 jom A D Site archive state 0x00080000 0x00080000 T Double knock or lt gt Camera control input1 0001 KA PIR mode Activates or deactivates the PIR mode f Serial channel PIRs will be connected to the serial channel RS485 to nRS232 converter is needed IB RS232 RS485 C PTZ channel PIR will be connected to the PTZ channel Depending on the wiring and the number of PIRs it might be recommend to use serial channel with IB RS232 R8485 Note When PIRs not yet have been activated or the channel where the PIRs are connected to is changed the settings must be sent to device before the detection and the configuration of PIRs can start See image below 248 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Walk bes W On Fort E555 gt PIR state Walk test Allows a Walk test via iPIR software During this time the device cannot communicate with the PIRs but is tunneling all to and fro the PIR Therefore lt Discover PIR gt lt Timeouts gt lt Packet Errors gt lt PIR state gt cannot be executed and wi
192. b directory of your CamControl PRO program directory in the format YZxxxxxx LOG YZxXxxxxx transmitter serial number The logfiles from video systems with battery buffering currently only CamServer 2c with serial number WCxxxxxx may also be saved in the CBLOG subdirectory The file format for these logfiles is YZXxxxxx TXT YZXxxxxx transmitter serial number 4 6 2 1 Extended evaluation dialogue for battery buffered logfile The extended evaluation dialogue is only available for HeiTel video systems with a battery buffered logfile CamServer 2c WCxxxxxx The minimum requirement for the evaluation of this logfile is the CamControl PRO software version 4 02 27769 02 AT CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Storage capacity The battery buffered logfile permits 16 383 lines of up to 64 characters each to be stored approx 1 MB In parallel to this the transmitter logfile may also be written to a removable storage medium removable hard disk or CF This logfile has 1024 lines with up to 64 characters each approx 64 KB If the maximum number of lines is exceeded the oldest entry is always overwritten when a new line is created FIFO x pe B Dae vet f 1 2011 06 09 13 21 49 Login demo Nw 0 A 46 C f 2 2011 06 09 13 21 44 Logout demo 0 CMD lt p 3 2011 06 09 13 21 44 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 x 4 2011 06 09 13 21 25 No video signal on input 01 5 2011 06 09 13 21 10 No video signal on input 01 Z 6 2011 0
193. ble events that were communicated via the VdS 2465 protocol You can define a maximum of 40 messages to be sent Address 27769 02 Recorder settings xj Device User Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out E EMA Message to be sent Message to be receivec Extras Upload Download Cancel Site archive state Help Site archive EMA Messages to be sent Messages to be received e to be send to GMZ Address 11 01 00 1 Change of settings Motion 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Via the address you specify the base address of the alarm system in accordance with VdS protocol requirements You input the address using hexadecimal values Composition of address Single contact single transmitter Device Address supplement Address sub address In addition to the address entered the following 39 addresses are generated by the program meaning that 40 addresses are available to you for alarm messages to be sent A tabular assignment of Address Event and where necessary Camera number completes the possible messages 219 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Event In the Event column you assign an alarm event to the predefined Address Temperature Change of settings Motion You
194. c signalling and or camera switching to take place when changes occur at the camera control inputs in manual operation The function is defined using a variable FOLLOW x Function definition x range 1 to 3 Function iN lo Camera switching Acoustic signalling Camera switching and acoustic signalling These functions are only supported in Normal and Zoom viewing mode If you select a function with acoustic signalling the wave file CAMALERT WAV located in the program directory is played once You can replace this file with your own wave file if you wish Note Please refer to additional HeiTel documentation to find out what commands are available for your PTZ device and the R16 Adapter in R01 files 8 5 2 Function and structure of R02 files If the options available in operating modes Accept call automatically and Accept call and automatic operation are not adequate for your application you can specify exactly how you want alarm messages to be processed in the R02 files You can configure the following functions for automatic image transmission and saving to the receiver PC e Number of transmitted live images for each camera e How often you want live image transmission to be repeated 2 6 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e Maximum connection duration e Specific alarm detection according to status input motion alarm or service message as well as the option to process each message individuall
195. call may contain up to 2 GB of image data The only thing restricting the total size of the archive is the storage capacity of the hard drive Archived connections can be accessed at any time even during active connections Tours Automatically executed tours make it possible to carry out predefined routine monitoring while simultaneously being able to accept alarms from other transmitters and connect to another transmitter manually Event window The list in the event window provides you with information on all existing connections alarms and tours Status and configuration changes to the active transmitters are also stored in this list 4 1 Quick Start Getting started Once you have installed CamControl PRO it s easy to make the settings necessary to establish a data connection to your transmitter and start receiving live images In addition to an operational image transmission system such as CamDisc SVR or CamTel SVR you also need a fully installed version of CamControl PRO and an appropriate communication device Basic configuration varies slightly for the different connection types null modem modem external ISDN TA internal ISDN card network card or USB direct connection Continue reading from the section that refers to your method of establishing a connection to the transmitter 4 1 1 Null modem connection transmitter with external V 24 interface quick start only for SVR series Connection e Using the special HeiTel nul
196. can choose from the following events Off No event was defined for this address There is no message Alarm enabled Device armed The device has been armed either via the Al a d control input or via the software function depending on the device configuration Alarm input A device alarm was triggered via the Al in control input This input functions independently of the status of the Al a d alarm enable input Tamper input A tamper alarm was triggered via the Aux in1 control input This input functions independently of the status of the Al a d alarm enable input Aux2 The Aux in2 control input was triggered Temperature The temperature sensor inside the device has measured a critical temperature of at least 70 C 158 F Change of settings The recorder settings were changed Motion The alarm was triggered by a motion internal motion alarm This is acamera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Video loss The alarm was triggered by the loss of a video signal This is acamera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Camera position authentication The alarm was triggered by a camera being out of position This is a camera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Camera input A camera specific control input Control in1 10 was triggered This is acamera specific alarm the camera number must
197. ce Configuration section on page 155 is particularly also for outdoor use 7 7 41 Motion settings As of the device firmware V1 96 the video systems have an enhanced video motion detection function As part of this firmware change the underlying Motion settings have been grouped together in the dialogue window of this name 148 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Recorder settinas x Motion settings Motion detection zones Device User Sensivity History Brightness compensation Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings 1 High x Oft v 05s Blocking time Camera groups E Motion n 2 High x Off v 105s Blocking time Privacy zones E Alarms 3 High x Off J 05s Blocking time Site archive Audio Relays 4 Middle x Off v m j05s Blocking time PTZ control Serial channel Video out 5 High x Off J j05s Blocking time Alarm panel Extras n EES Upload Download 6 High x Off bad E 05s 7 Blocking time IP Camera r 7 High x Off v J j05s Blocking time OK 8 High x Off v J j05s vif g Cancel g High x Off ee J j05s i Blocking time Site archive state High x e Sensitivity The video motion detection works with three different levels of sensitivity Low Middle and High Extended video motion detection The History and Brightness compensation functions
198. cerned see Installation of the USB driver for HeiTel Video Gateways on page 294 For the CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s devices please observe the conditions of use of the USB connection see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s on page 300 Note In order for a change in this parameter to take effect it is necessary after confirming the Receiver settings with OK it is necessary to shut down and restart your CamControl PRO software 82 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 6 4 HTconnect The HTconnect menu allows you to change the following parameters which you were previously only able to set via the configuration file CAMCTRL INI see Configuration file with modifiable keys on page 257 Receiver options Options HT connect only TCPYIP V On Part 3333 Cancel Help On Activating the On option activates the HTconnect function see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 111 Port In addition you set the communications port for HT connect through which the HeiTel devices communicate with the CamControl PRO software The standard value for HTconnect on HeiTel devices and software is 3333 27769 02 83 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 5 PC Archive You can save all images received during an image transmiss
199. ch appear in yellow on a black background in the time and date fields Search controls You can control archive access with the buttons located above the status bar You also have the functions in the Picture menu a First oldest picture of the call Play backwards Next picture Play forwards 27769 02 67 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Last most recent picture 68 Camera selective image search You can select the playback speed for the archive with this drop down list You can choose between 1 fps frame per second 5fps 10 fps 15 fps 20 fps 25 fps maximum possible number of images per second Max fps and Realtime If you select Max fps the playback speed depends on the performance of the accessing PC This button starts the time based search within the selected PC receiver archive In the Date time search dialogue box that opens you can set these two parameters After you click Search the closest image in the PC receiver archive is shown Date time search x Date 06709 2005 2 Time 1255 48 Cancel If you want to restrict the image search within the archive to a particular camera then you can select a camera or the transmitter archive in single image viewing mode from the drop down list with the camera symbol or by right clicking the fullscreen image The image search is restricted accordingly If you select Transmitter archive the search is restricted to images from t
200. ch criteria Previous receipt or Next receipt shows the previous next data record that fulfils the search parameter Matches with the search criteria within the data record are marked in red by line If there are no more results that meet your criteria the following message appears Search text could not be found Click the Export transaction data to file button to save all of the IBIS data recorded for this camera track to a text file The data belonging to this text file is saved in an Excel compatible format to enable it to be imported into a spreadsheet Note The Export transaction data to file option is available only for the Evaluation with optimal functionality or during an offline evaluation of the removable hard disk via the CamControl PLAYER Clicking the Print current data record button prints the data of the current data record with the associated image The following information is also printed out file name serial number of the transmitter camera name 45 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Synchronisation When accessing camera tracks with transaction data the of image and Synchronization function provides the following two options Sa e Update picture from data When selecting transaction data the first time relevant image in a Sequence is shown e Update data from picture When playing back image data the associated sales receipt is shown Evaluating Soyal data In contrast to the P
201. choose if the alarm enable input of the device will be completed by one of the following options e Triggered manually or by software e Triggered by input Triggered manually or If the option Triggered manually or by software is activated the LED by software display for CamControl PRO is replaced by a button that has the function of a push button gt Error relay If this function is activated then the arming disarming of the device is completed exclusively manually via the button of the CamControl software or software controlled as for example during the Event Management System of HeiTel Triggered by input If you want to use the Arm Disarm input function activate the Triggered by input option In the event of an alarm only a connection to the receiver is made if the transmitter is also armed Specify whether Arm Disarm input is activated when opened or closed i e switched to ground by selecting Normally opened or Normally closed Ea Normally opened ka If you deactivate the options Triggered by input and Triggered manually or by software the status of the Arm Disarm input is ignored and your device reports every alarm regardless of the status of this input It is therefore always armed In this state the Arm Disarm input can be used as an additional signal input This option corresponds to the former function Enabled alarm enable input Note The options Triggered manually or by software and Triggered by input canno
202. ck Elena to open the Transmitter archive dialogue box The most recent image of the first camera with pre alarm images automatically opens If the Pre alarm button is disabled there are no images in the transmitter archive In this case check whether the pre alarm function has been activated for at least one camera under Recorder settings Alarm Pre alarm see Pre alarm CamTel VG and CamTel SVR only on page 164 Transmitter archive controls Archive access is controlled with the buttons at the top of the Transmitter archive dialogue box Transmitter archive Camel sr ia gt gt Show first oldest image One image back One image forward oa Play the pre alarm sequence from current image position Last most recent image Changing Using the Camera buttons you can switch between the individual camera cameras in the same way as during live operation Image When playing back transmitters archives the camera name is shown on number Date the left underneath the image in the main panel while the current image amp Time number with respect to the total number is shown on the right underneath the image in the main panel together with the time and date of the current image An asterisk in front of the image number indicates that an archive image is in the process of being transmitted Archivingin If you have activated the receiver archive in the Receiver options PC the PC Archive options of CamControl PRO the rec
203. connected devices button updates the list of video systems connected via HTconnect and Show configuration displays the current configuration of the HT connect Server in an additional window Searching for a video system Before conducting a search you should always update the list of video systems to the latest status using the Update connected devices button You search for a video system within the program window by entering the required serial number into the Search input field After you have entered a full serial number format YZxxxxxx the HTconnect Server indicates that it has found a video system with the message Found In the list of video systems connected by HTconnect the relevant entry is shown and highlighted in grey Configuration of the HTconnect Server x HT connect server port 3333 Disconnect timeout 5 Command interval BU Command mode 0 Shatus server unnng 1 Status server pork 4444 Status server cmd timeout O Connect cmd recy pork 4445 Clicking the Show configuration button opens an additional window in which the current configuration of the HTconnect Server is displayed If necessary you can adjust the configuration of the IP ports used manually in the CAMCTRL INI See HTconnect configuration on page 260 27 69 _02 115 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 9 7 Multiple transmitter entries Within the transmitter index it is possible for transmitters to appear more than onc
204. connection channels for example Port A Deactivate the TCP IP option if necessary From the drop down list in the Modem group select Mode Normal From the Port drop down list select the COM port to which you connected the modem or the ISDN TA From the Baud drop down list select a suitable serial transmission speed ISDN connections 115200 Baud analogue connections 38400 115200 Baud In the Init prefix field you can enter an AT command to initialise your modem see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 In the Prefix 1 field enter ATD e Click OK The dialog box closes and the software initialises the connected modem Transmitter data e Click Dial The Transmitter index now opens Click Add In the Transmitter data dialog box that now opens enter the name and the telephone number of a HeiTel compatible transmitter in the corresponding fields You can find a suitable transmitter in the demo transmitter list on the information CD for example Ensure that Prefix 1 is selected Now confirm your details with OK The Transmitter data dialogue box closes and you find yourself back in the Transmitter index Establishing a connection e The Transmitter index is still open The desired transmitter is highlighted in the transmitter list Now click Dial The software starts dialing and establishing a connection Online e Once a remote connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image tran
205. contract All warranty claims are non applicable if the software product has not been used in accordance to the regulations of this contract or to the instructions provided by the licensor or to the operating manual or when the software has been modified without the written permission of the licensor unless such non compliance to the regulations or change in the product was not responsible for the fault In case of an unfounded complaint the licensor reserves the right to demand that the customer reimburse him for any costs arising thereof The licensor does not guarantee that the product does not infringe on any commercially protected rights of third parties unless such infringement is culpable The licensor excludes himself from any costs arising from the legal protection of commercially protected rights and claims for damages from third parties 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Liability 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 The licensor does not accept liability for claims arising from the usability or impossibility to use the software package unless such damages have been caused by the licensor intentionally or through gross negligence on his part or on the part of his agents All liabilities for indirect damages as well as for accompanying damages and subsequent damages are excluded Should violations of professional ethics arise that have not been committed by the licensor his legal representatives o
206. control of the pan tilt speed depending on the cursor position of the corresponding control symbols Zoom speed can be modified if required via a pop up menu which can be invoked for PTZ IP cameras through a right click on the control symbol Z or Z IP camera behavior during dynamic PTZ control depends both on the features of the camera as well as on the level of implementation of the driver for HeiTel video systems 8 2 4 5 Transmitter logfile CBLOG Saving the transmitter ENABLED 1 Save the transmitter logfile logfile e Range O off default 1 0n e Activating this function saves CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer logfiles in the directory C CAMCONTROL PRO CBLOG or YOUR_DRIVE YOUR__ PROGRAM_NAME CBLOG The individual files are saved under the following name Serial_number LOG e g CV542016 LOG The extended logfiles of the CamServer 2c and VG device series see Extended evaluation dialogue for battery buffered logfile on page 47 are also stored in the CBLOG sub directory of the software To distinguish between these files the following file naming methodology is used serialnumber TXT e g VX229002 TXT This file contains the transmitter logfile of the digital transmission system in a structured format It can be further processed or printed out As every entry is structured in the same way you can edit this logfile ina text editor or a spreadsheet program or similar application The individual
207. ct Device User Date amp Time E Connections N etwo rk TCP IP Sierra Wireless Inc HMC8790 Connection to Provider is established Phon T IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HT connect Camera settings 81 dBm 113dBm M 51 dBm PIN Mation detection zones User name i O O Password P Serial channel APN JUMP webvodafonede 0000 Extras Upload F Download Dial in number 99H Initialisation command 1 ATE0V18D2 amp C1S0 04FC 22 x Initialisation command 2 PCT Cancel E Reset Adapter every han o P with recording pause MTU 1500 MRU 1500 Help The PIN Personal Identification Number is required depending on the programming of the SIM Subscriber Identity Module card This setting depends on the provider maximum 38 characters This setting depends on the provider maximum 38 characters The APN Access Point Name access data should normally be in the following order 1 IP lt PROVIDER APN gt Example data for German providers e Vodafone 1 IP web vodafone de e T Mobile 1 IP internet t d1 de or 1 IP internet t mobile e E Plus 1 IP internet eplus de e 02 1 IP surfo2 Dial in number The standard dial in number for Internet connections via 3G UMTS or GPRS is 99 Depending on the mobile telephone provider it may be necessary to enter 99 1 or 99 1 as dial in number Note The paramet
208. ctivated If necessary transfer the settings to the transmitter by pressing the OK button e Please note that the maximum detection delay for a camera that has been displaced depends on the device type and the number of cameras Examples CamTel SVR with four activated channels approx 100 seconds CamDisc SVR with four activated channels approx 80 seconds CamDisc SVRs with four activated channels approx 35 seconds Connect Select On in the Connect column if you want the transmitter to connect to your receiver software if a displacement of camera position is detected When an alarm message is given the corresponding camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same manner as the reporting of camera alarms Unline Cam pos authentication Camera 1 Note In order to establish a connection to your receiver when the camera position is altered you must enter the phone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 7 13 Site archive only CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG and CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer The Site Archive menu item and all sub menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices This dialogue box is not available if you are using CamTel SVR CamTel VG devices Continue readin
209. d The CamControl PRO saves the received video images one after each other in the receiver archive When the maximum size of the receiver archive is reached the oldest images and calls are gradually overwritten The FIFO method of storage ensures that you always have up to date data without you having to intervene and delete out of date data The archive can reach up to 2 GB in size or store up 1400 individual calls with the corresponding hard drive capacity The maximum archive size of 2 GB is valid only for FAT formatted hard drive partitions On NTFS formatted hard drive partitions the archive size is limited to a maximum of 512 GB Image manipulation Only with great effort can the digital image data be modified and returned to the archive files For this reason it can be assumed that the archive only contains image data received from a transmitter You can also verify the authenticity of individual saved images however Directory structure and file names The receiver archive is generally accessed using CamControl PRO Here you can access all the individual archives of the receiver archive via a dialogue box so you must have a detailed understanding of the file and directory structure You can even delete archive files that are no longer necessary with the access software using dialogue boxes see Deleting archive files on page 74 Directory structure In case you need to access the receiver archive manually to create a backup co
210. d Field y no no initialized y indicates whether this camera track has been divided into partitions for continuous and or event triggered recording Existing image data is removed D amp T Password disabled The reset button on the front of the device no no deletes all usernames and passwords D amp T Alarm enabled The video system was armed manually or by no no the software D amp T Alarm disabled The video system was disarmed manually or no no by the software Critical messages D amp T Track x reached Overwrite protection is activated and the no yes warning threshold percentage warning threshold has been reached for a camera track x D amp T Hard disk full Overwrite protection is activated and hard no yes Track x disk capacity for camera track x is depleted no more pictures can be recorded D amp T Period of recording The minimum recording period for camera no yes reached Track x track x has not been reached D amp T No video signal on This message is written if a video signal error yes input x is detected for video input x D amp T HDD Read Error Hard disk read error Check removable hard no x disk in offline mode e g with application ScanDisc Field x indicates hard disk model D amp T HDD Write Error Hard disk read error Check hard disk in offline no yes x mode e g with application ScanDisc Field x indicates hard disk model D amp T Hardw
211. d e Relay as momentary with adjustable switching time e Closed while connected e Closed on error e Closed while recording e Closed while alarm e Closed while alarm enabled Note If the relays have not be configured as momentaries or switches the corresponding buttons do not appear on the program interface Keeping program window on top You can configure CamControl PRO in such a way that the program window is always on top and cannot be covered by other programs Only windows with the same attribute are not covered The necessary entry can be configured in the CAMCTRL INI configuration file Further information on changing this entry can be found in the relevant section See Program window SCREEN on page 267 Alternatively this option can be defined using Receiver options Extras see Extras on page 81 28 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 4 5 2 Changing screen view i CamControl PRO 3 xx CamDisc svr10 1 Hang up View Setup Site Archive Offline Camera 2 Camera 3 Offline Camera 4 Error relay Relay 1 Device armed Relay 2 z Offline 29 08 05 12 52 16 0001 Programmstart von Test aj HeiTel Digital Video GmbH A 29 08 05 12 52 30 0020 Empf ngereinstellungen ule via PC Archive H A 124113 Molfsee 29 08 05 12 53 06 1500 CQ501398 Kiel CamDisc svr4 Online CamControl PRO allows you to choose between different view
212. d number of images has been transmitted Example CV542016 R02 Section 1 ALARMO001 ALARM 5 LIVE1 4 LIVE3 4 27769 _02 279 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis LIVE4 4 REPEAT 5 TIME 600 Section 2 ALARMO0018 LIVE2 5 TIME 300 Explanation of example This R02 file refers to a CamDisc SVR with the serial number CV542016 Section 1 describes the behaviour of alarms triggered by the status input for camera 1 ALARMO00071 e Five alarm images from the triggering camera 1 are recorded e Then four live images from cameras 1 3 and 4 are recorded one after the other e Transmission and recording is repeated five times e If it takes longer than 10 minutes 600 seconds to process the commands defined in section 1 the connection is closed after this period of time has elapsed Otherwise the connection is closed after the last image has been transmitted Section 2 defines the recording behaviour of alarms triggered by a change at the alarm enable input ALARMO018 e Five live images are recorded from camera 2 e The connection is then closed e If it takes longer than five minutes to process these commands the connection closes after this period of time has elapsed Manually creating R02 files Please note the following when creating R02 files e The receiver software looks for the R02 files in the RO2 sub folder of the program path e g C CAMCONTROL PRO ROZ2 Create this directory if necessary e Use
213. d for initialising your modem ISDN TA in the Initialisation prefix box Dial prefix Enter the dial command in the Dial prefix box ATD is sufficient in most cases In rare instances more advanced modem ISDN TA control may be required Last caller If your modem ISDN TA supports storing recent callers you may enter the appropriate AT command in this box General information on modem configuration e The modem ISDN TA must be set to RTS CTS flow control hardware handshake e The DTR signal interrupts a connection or the establishment of a connection e DCD or M5 must indicate an active connection e The modem ISDN TA must not accept calls automatically ATSO 0 e The modem ISDN TA must send verbal messages ATV 1 for recognition of incoming calls e The modem ISDN TA must not send echo messages ATEO e The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol e Ifthe ISDN terminal adapter is connected to other ISDN data devices with an SO bus an MSN may need to be assigned to the ISDN TA generally the phone number without prefix Operation with a telephone system In this case the telephone number must be prefixed with the outside line number s In some cases there may be problems with the modem s dial tone recognition In this case turn off the modem s dial tone recognition frequently ATX3 Alternatively you can insert a pause after the outside line number s e g We wait for dial tone ISDN network operation T
214. d in the device 4 7 Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG Pre alarm image storage i_ CamControl PRO 3 xx CamTel svri0 1 nt SA wee n 7 ae PEE o o AA 4 J A je eet N Zd A 7 C a E Bt A 5 j rs y _ z gi E Tast ho pee lt i Ci TASTA Pig rA e i aS bes 1s en Wa es v ee YP e i Transmitter archive Camtel seri baL eded e te a T SA iy X en AaS P A IEA be E Sz pe Zh ET ve gt a Offline gt aa z A Qu S EMSS Camera 2 91 91 07 09 05 13 58 19 Relay 1 Device armed Relay 2 Offline amp 29 08 05 12 52 16 0001 Programmstart von Test HeiTel Digital Video GmbH 2 29 08 05 12 52 30 0020 Empf ngereinstellungen een PC Archive H A 29 08 05 12 53 06 1500 CQ501398 Kiel CamDisc svr4 Online nae The CamTel SVR and CamTel VG devices have a pre alarm image storage device Images are saved ona FIFO basis first in first out The oldest images are replaced by new recordings after a certain period of time The four or ten storage areas depending on the model prevent other cameras from overwriting the recorded images however Note For IP cameras there is no storage of pre alarm images 52 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 4 7 1 Accessing pre alarm images Once you are connected to an active CamTel SVR transmitter in the main panel cli
215. d password System access If you select System access then the user in question is authorised to modify Receiver options see Receiver Software Settings starting on page 77 Modify transmitter index Only if the Modify transmitter index option was selected will the user listed be able to add modify or delete transmitter entries see Adding changing or deleting transmitter entries starting on page 98 Use this option to prevent unauthorised users from viewing changing adding or deleting transmitter entries 80 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual New user In the New user field enter the name of a new user and then click Add user to include the user in User Management The maximum length for a user name is 20 characters You can only assign a user name once If another user has this name already a new entry is not added The existing entry is displayed instead Once the first user has been created a username must be entered to start and close the software in the future You can enter a maximum of 100 users for the CamControl PRO software Note New users are granted full system access by default Before you block access make certain that there is at least one user with system access If you forget your password or there is no user with system access so that you can t either start the software or change the settings anymore you must reinstall the software see Installing the Software on pa
216. dard 214 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Configuration of GPS The GPS function is used to store way points of HeiTel devices The following programming is generally a requirement for this e Baud rate 4800 e Mode 8 N 1 e Function GPS Note Depending on the GPS receiver baud rate and mode can vary and must be programmed in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications Soyal Card Reader in conjunction with a HeiTel video system The Soyal Card Reader is connected to the HeiTel video system via the serial interface Soyal access control generally contains the following functions e Logging of access to the card reader ina POS ATM IBIS data track e Synchronous recording of images as continuous or event recording e Control of the arming disarming of the video system via the card reader Configuration forthe The following configuration is generally a requirement for this Soyal Card Reader e Baud rate 9600 e Mode 8 N 1 e Function Soyal Card Reader Note If the HeiTel video system is in this operating mode it can only be armed or disarmed via the card reader Arming disarming via a control contact or software is not possible when the Soyal Card Reader is in use 27769 02 215 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 18 Video out Your digital image broadcasting system has a video output only CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR and Cam4mobile but not CamDisc HNVR and CamServer
217. dema ME T 0 A 44 C 29 08 2005 15 05 09 Caller 0 062 21 4 006 002 29 08 2005 15 05 09 Logout demo 0 CMD 29 08 2005 15 14 03 Logim dema ME T 0 A 43 C 29 08 2005 15 16 15 Caller 021 3 221 112 032 29 08 2005 15 16 15 Logout demo 0 CMD 30 08 2005 00 13 02 Login failed gt unknown user lt NET 0 A 30 08 2005 00 13 02 Caller 0 272 159 119 110 30 08 2005 00 13 02 Logouk gt unknown user lt 0 U5F 30 08 2005 00 15 35 Login dena WET OF 44 C 30 08 2005 00 16 11 Caller 0 272 159 119 110 To open the logfile of the active CamDisc SVR transmitter click Bogie The logfile starts transmitting and can take some time depending on the size of the file and the connection All the entries with date time and a brief description in English are then shown in the Transmitter logfile dialogue box Use the tabular overview see Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series on page 285 to evaluate the logfile entries Resetting the error relay Once the transmitter logfile has been fully transmitted the error relay is reset Saving logfile to receiver PC CamControl PRO allows you to automatically save the transmitter logfile to the receiver PC after it has been successfully transmitted You can activate this function by making the relevant entry in the CAMCTRL INI configuration file see Saving the transmitter logfile on page 264 The saved logfiles are stored in the CBLOG su
218. detection is not designed for outdoor recordings and should therefore be reserved for indoor cameras The Motion detection zones tab allows you to limit motion detection to certain areas of the video image When defining motion detection zones you can limit the detection area to specific areas of the overall image If on the other hand you want to monitor the entire image for movements then deselect Enabled for the camera in question This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Changes to settings in this window affect the following alarm scenarios e Alarm Motion alarm active e CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile CamServer Motion triggered event e CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile CamServer Continuous recording in the event of motion Recorder settings x Motion settings Motion detection zones Device User Limiting motion detection to certain areas Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion Motion settings Motion detection zones Privacy zones H Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Alarm panel Extras Upload 7 Download IP Camera OK Cancel Site archive state Camera name Enabled Detection zones Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Adjust zones
219. ding times are not achieved or if fewer images are recorded than defined reduce the Desired number of events This makes more memory available to the device for the individual events The average image size is the basis for calculating the potential number of events and the related memory requirement for events Please ensure that the average image size in each case is an instant average of recent live images if need be only the average of the conditional refresh images is displayed Under certain circumstances higher space requirements per image must be assumed for a trigger necessitated by significant image changes If the option Manual Input is enabled you can set the expected image size in the range of 2 to 300 KB using the toggle switch The potential number of events and the related memory requirement for events change depending on the image size assumed This field displays the partition size in GB reserved for event recording You can change the size of this partition in the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 Depending on the settings for pre and post alarm sequences and the specified number of desired events the storage capacity required by event recording per camera track will be displayed immediately Note This value is an estimate because it depends on several automatically changing factors The actual value will be different from this estimated value Below the values for r
220. dress together with the PIR type and in brackets with its internal name are displayed 1 PRO E 18WH IR867 This option activates an alarm in case of tamper or hardware failures 250 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual This option activates an alarm when a PIR cannot be detected anymore iM General This option activates the general Alarm of the PIR This alarm corresponds with the relays output of the PIR and will normally occur together with each PIR event Camera Preset Fy Tamper Presence and General can be linked to a camera Preset and 3 lo a event trigger in case of their occurrence ese f mea f Creep zone ch 2 Off Ot 4 Off In this list PIR alarms can be activated separately and linked with a camera preset and event trigger of the selected camera This list will show only the details that are supported by the PIR Depending on the connected PIR there will 1 up to 8 different details events available e g Camera 1 Ot Left ta Right Off 1 Off Right to lett Off Off 1 Off Medium or ot 1 Ott Of Olt 4 Ot Ot Ot 1 Ot Off Ort 1 Ort Lad I Mirr Mrr Mirr Double Knock Double knock EE mi m Y lt gt Camera control input 1 0001 Double knock allows to combine one of the events of the selected PIRs with either a camera control input motion detection of a camera or with one of the events of any other PIR If camera cont
221. driver installation manually Driver installation in Windows XP The USB driver for VG devices is essentially installed in Windows XP in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 295 8 9 3 1 Troubleshooting It may happen that no USB connection can be established This can have several causes Therefore check your CamControl LITE PRO software and firmware version to ensure that your device meets the requirements of the USB connection Due to the fact that there is a network adapter installed in the USB connection it happens that your PC has problems to initialize a network adapter properly In these cases it is recommended checking the Device Manager to see if the RNDIS Ethernet Gadget or Ethernet USB RNDIS device is installed correctly If your device can be found under Other devices a new driver installation should be done Follow the instructions depending on your operating system which is described in this document and update the driver by manual allocation of the USB driver in Drivers subdirectory of CamControl LITE PRO or by the included drivers of your operating system If necessary run the installation of the USB driver manually again The drivers can be found in Drivers subdirectory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Note the order of the connection setup It is recommended turning off the device and disconnecting the USB cable Turn the unit back on After successful device startup ab
222. e Hang up and redial on alarm 226 If this option is selected the telephone number or IP address saved under Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 is dialled at the specified time HH MM No picture will be transmitted and the connection is closed again immediately The Routine call every 24 hours option allows you to check and log ona regular basis whether your HeiTel device is establishing a connection to your receiver PC The call is saved in the event tree see Event tree on page 22 If you remove the hard disk drive of the CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile and select this option you can operate your device without a hard disk Your device then acts as a simple transmitter Archive settings and the sender logfile cannot be accessed All hard disk monitoring functions are deactivated e g hard disk malfunction alarm or error relay triggering Note If you select Use without hard disk drive and you have not removed the hard disk then this option is ignored Your CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile continues to work with a hard disk drive If the hard disk drive malfunctions or is removed at a later point in time however all monitoring functions remain active If this option is selected and there is an alarm event an active connection is closed and your digita
223. e If you select Motion alarm enabled an alarm is triggered when motion is detected in the video image of the camera in question 27769 02 171 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis If you want to control the recordings of several cameras using the integrated motion detector consider using external motion detectors The integrated motion detection is not designed for outdoor recordings and should therefore be reserved for indoor cameras This avoids false alarms Note So that a connection can be established to your receiver in the event of movement being detected in the video image you must save the telephone number or the IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 Setting sensitivity bi olor Motion The integrated software motion detector works with three different levels of sensitivity Select Motion for maximum sensitivity and Motion for minimum sensitivity If you use CamControl PRO software V4 01 or later and HeiTel video systems with firmware V 1 96 or later the Sensitivity is configured in the Motion settings menu see Motion settings on page 148 7 12 6 Video loss Open the Video loss tab from the menu under the Alarms node For each camera you can separately specify whether an alarm message is to be triggered if the video signal is lost Recorder settings CamDisc HNVR Demo Alarm inputs Pre alarm Site Archive Camera c
224. e Only use a certified USB 2 0 hi speed cable to connect to the transmitter The cable should not be longer than two metres Limitations concerning the USB direct connection This function can also be used with the following devices if their firmware is of version 1 72 or later and these devices were produced from 2009 onwards e CamDisc HNVR 10 devices serial numbers NV9Xxxxx e CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s devices serial numbers WS9xxxxx and WV9xxxxx e CamServer 1 CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 devices serial numbers WBxxxxxx WCxxxxxx and WD9xxxxx 300 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual The USB drivers for these devices can be found in the Drivers subdirectory of CamControl PRO software as of version 3 80 e PL2502NW_v20044 exe Driver file for Windows 2000 and Windows XP e pl2502vista exe Driver file for Windows Vista e pl2501win 32bit exe Driver file for Windows 7 8 9 2 1 Driver Installation in Windows XP Open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl PRO software Run the file PL2502NW_v20044 exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions Accessing the program again will start the deinstallation process 8 9 2 2 Driver installation in Windows Vista Open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions 8 9 2 3 Driver Installation i
225. e archived images for a single camera 1 camera Multi screen view of four archive images 4 cameras You can switch cameras by right clicking to create a group for example Multi screen view of ten archive images 10 cameras You can switch cameras by right clicking to create a different sequence of camera tracks for example This view is available for archive images of transmitters with ten video inputs 5 1 4 Exporting individual images CamControl PRO s archive access software allows you to export the current individual image in different ways Image file Select File Save picture or click the Save picture button to save the current image to file either in BMP or JPEG format You can also save an image in CamControl PRO by selecting File Save picture with on screen information If you select this method of saving the camera name number as well as the transmitter name serial number are shown in the image file 27769 02 69 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Print picture Select File Print picture or click the Print picture toolbar button to print the current image to the preset printer In addition to the image every printout contains other useful information such as program name program version transmitter name name and path of the archive file printing date camera number camera name as well as the time and date of image recording M Options J Add user information max 5 lines
226. e buttons for listening and speaking then set the MODE 0 parameter in CAMCTRL INI in the AUDIO section see Audio mode AUDIO on page 268 60 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual When the speaker button is activated the audio data being transmitted from the transmitter are output through the sound card of the receiver PC listening When the microphone button is activated audio signal is received through the sound card in the receiver PC and sent to the transmitter Speaking Depending on the application you can activate or deactivate the listening and speaking functions under Recording settings Audio see Audio on page 206 Quality of audio transmission The quality of audio transmission will be significantly influenced by the other components of the audio system e g cables microphone and speaker as well as their physical arrangement 27769 02 61 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 62 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 5 Offline Access In addition to providing you with online access to live images the site archive for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and all HeiTel VG VideoGateways see Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer on page 35 and pre alarm images for CamTel SVR and CamTel VG see Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG on page 52 CamC
227. e cards in the equipment Note To ensure proper functioning of the overall system the intrusion detection must be tested Only tests can ensure that intruders are reliably detected and that excessive false alarms are prevented Refer to Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and VG devices on page 117 and the IntrusionTrace Design Guide document no 21814 If not done select the Analytics node in the tree structure on the left Click Open configuration tool to open the Intrusion configuration dialogue window LA Intrusion configuration Select camera Selected AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Parking Space 2 Dewarming Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 a Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AX Cc AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Default Config Drawing tools Q I Save settings New Area j To select the desired camera to be configured double click on an entry in the camera list The live video is displayed Button Description Config To set up advanced parameters see Advanced parameters on page 155 Calibration To set specific reference dimensions for the camera This must be done before setting up the detection zone See Calibration on page 156 New Mask To set up mask zones which are excluded from detection see Mask zones on page 158 New Area To set
228. e in the front connector of the device Plug the other side of the USB cable into the USB port of the computer Step 2 Got to the Device Manager you can find it in the Control Panel System Device Manager and select in section Other devices the node RNDIS Ethernet Gadget or Ethernet USB RNDIS depends on the connected HeiTel device 27769 02 301 CamControl PRO Software Manual nq File Action View Help e 75 U m amp HeiTel by Xtralis Step 3 b amp Audio inputs and outputs b j Computer D Disk drives E Display adapters b ef DVD CD ROM drives b OS Human Interface Devices b ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers b IEEE 1394 host controllers l l I gt amp gt Keyboards gt F Mice and other pointing devices amp Monitors b Network adapters 4 fy Other devices fp PCI Serial Port fp RNDIS Ethernet Gadget gt Print queues D D Processors gt Software devices b a Sound video and game controllers b Storage controllers gt gl System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Click with the right mouse button on the selected device and select Update Driver Software from the popup menu Step 4 4 b Other devices ip PCI Serial Port U e Driver Software gt dh Print queues paa b EB Processors Disable gt Software devi Uninstall gt X Sound video Scan for hardware changes b Storage contr A new dial
229. e in the list of transmitters Among the uses for this procedure is to make available for one transmitter alternative entries for different connection types Since in the case of transmitter initiated dialling procedures the user check can also be realised via the transmitter list you must ensure that where the list of transmitters contains multiple transmitter entries valid user names and passwords have been entered for each of these entries Multiple transmitter entries in the transmitter list are identified by the device serial number The serial number is generally automatically added to the transmitter entries following a dial up via the relevant connection type Transmitter index x B Pie Cae M Transmitter list 5 6000 amp USB direct connection Hy CamDisc HNVR 10 1 IP E CamDisc HNVR 10 1 ISDN CamDisc SVA10 1 IP CamDisc SVA10 1 ISDN Add Dial Cancel Help Show transmitters with equal serial number 4dd new group Add new transmitter Cut transmitter CamDisc SVR10 1 IP Ctrl LAN device autodetection Show transmitters with egual serial number If a transmitter i e a serial number appears more than once in the list of transmitters the Show transmitters with equal serial number option is added to the context menu that can be opened by right clicking within the list of transmitters In the Transmitters with equal serial number program window multiple entries are shown in g
230. e mask will hide image zones not ground zones It should not cover the upper part of the intruder s body anywhere inside the detection zone Click on the New Mask button To draw a mask area click the left mouse button each time you want to make an angle Right click to complete the input If required a last line is added automatically to complete the polygon You can easily change the form of the polygon by clicking one of the line end points angles or on a handle of a line and dragging it to anew position You can also add a line by deleting one of the lines and automatically start drawing from the last line end point To delete a mask zone select it and click the Clear selected button Clear all will delete all mask and detection zones defined for the camera 7 11 4 Detection zones Detection zones define the regions on the ground where objects are detected as valid i e where intruders shall trigger an alarm The detection area is like a carpet spanning the area where intruders entering that area are to be detected Since only the bottoms of the targets i e feet of persons are tracked the detection area does not need to extend up the sides of buildings or fences but only the ground surface The lowest edge of the detection zone should cover the lowest part of the intruder If the detection zone includes the front part of the scene the detection zone should also cover the lowest edge of the image Whether alarms are triggered depends on t
231. e new settings to your device by clicking OK again in the Recorder settings window If you wish to add additional Privacy zones to a camera input it can be helpful to delete the existing zones and copy these settings to your device 153 CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 10 Note HeiTel by Xtralis Analytics Allocating IntrusionTrace Licenses IntrusionTrace is only available with CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx as well as ipVG and only in combination with JPEG MJPEG cameras not H 264 When using analogue cameras we highly recommend using the analogue realtime cards in the equipment In order to be able to use the intrusion detection functions of the CamControl PRO software you have to allocate licenses to the relevant cameras and you need to configure the required detection parameters Proceed as described in the following subsections In the CamControl PRO main window click on the Dial button to activate the connection to the device If not done configure the device as described in section Connections on page 129 In the tree structure on the left select the Analytics node Note a Recorder settings ip VG Demosystem Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Alarm panel Log file Extras Upload Download IP C
232. e relevant selection from the Items combined by drop down list In addition to this combined search you can also search using individual criteria such as price Clicking the Export transaction data to file button saves all the transactions recorded for this camera track in a text file The data in text file are saved in an Excel compatible format so that they can be imported into a spreadsheet Note The Export transaction data to file option is available only for the Evaluation with optimal functionality or during an offline evaluation of the removable hard disk via the CamControl PLAYER Clicking the Print current data record button prints the data of the current sales receipt with the associated image The following information is also printed out file name with path name serial number of the transmitter camera name with time and date 43 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Synchronisation When accessing camera tracks with transaction data the of image and Synchronisation function provides the following two options sales receipt e Update image from receipt When selecting transaction data the first time relevant image in a Sequence is shown e Update receipt from image When playing back image data the associated receipt is shown Accessing IBIS data In contrast to the POS and ATM transaction data IBIS data is not transmitted to your HeiTel video system via an intermediate POS ATM Adapter but rather o
233. e same type and have the same firmware version Recorder settings 4 E x Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Download Firmware update OK Cancel Site archive state Help Upload Download Load settings from PC 20071128 CV547015 01 58 him ieee 20071201 CV500005 01 58 him 20071201 C 547015 01 58 him Save settings to PC File name 20071 205 Save as lt 20071205 CV547015 01 58 him gt C CCLITES76 SVR_IMAGES 20071 205 C 547015 01 58 him saved Load settings for PC Save settings to the PC 27769 02 The selection window only shows settings saved on the receiver PC that have the same device type and the same firmware version To load device settings select the desired file from the list Once you click Load setup amessage informs you that these settings will not take effect until you have transferred them to the device To store these settings in the device this dialog must closed with lt OK To save device settings enter a File name CamControl PRO adds the serial number of the device and its firmware version to this name The full file name appears between angled brackets on the Save as button Click this button to save the device settings as a mirror image Once the mi
234. e set the export marks The sequence selected between the export marks is applied in the Export to file dialogue box Checking the export sequence Use the following functions to check delete export marks a You can play back the selected image sequence to check it d Click the Go to start mark button to show the first picture of the export sequence Click the Go to end mark button to show the last picture of the export sequence Click this button to delete the export marks Marks that have already been set cannot be moved by drag and drop in the graphic elements They must be reset as described above You can access all export functions by selecting File Save sequence The individual commands for sequence marking navigating within a sequence and playing back the selected range can also be accessed by selecting the Options menu item 27769 02 13 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 5 1 6 Accessing GPS data If valid GPS data exists for the current image data of the PC Archive the following dialogue box may open automatically GPS Site Archive 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 0586 N O10 04 3263 E 8 0 0 mph 2 Explanation of buttons A detailed explanation of the buttons can be found in the section on the GPS Live dialogue see GPS Live window on page 30 and on the extended GPS Live dialogue see Extended GPS Live window on page 31 Accessing the PC Archive When you
235. e with file update_all_svr_158 bin In case of a device update any changes done but not yet transmitted to the device will be ignored Site archive state Help 230 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Firmware update In the selection list for the Firmware update menu item different valid firmware versions can be displayed as presented in the example e The Update file column shows the name of the firmware file e The Version column shows the type and in square brackets the version number For the firmware type there are two options ALL and FIRMWARE e ALL This is an update file 4 MB that contains in addition to the firmware an embedded Linux with current RAMDISK as required as of firmware 1 38 FIRMWARE This update file approx 500 to 600 KB only contains the firmware These files contain only the firmware without embedded Linux and corresponding RAMDISK Due to these limitations FIRMWARE type update files should only be used after contacting HeiTel Support Generally however you will only receive ALL type firmware updates Confirm your selection with OK After confirming the prompt with OK the transmission of the firmware file starts A status window shows the progress of the transmission This is followed by a verification of the transmitted firmware file Save Recorder Settings q I x Do vou really want to update the device with update all syvr_158 bine
236. ease alarms in case of movement in both directions along the arrow You can only define one direction per detection area However if you define two overlapping detection areas you can e g define and thus combine two orthogonal directions to be detected to prevent diagonal movement from triggering alarms 7 11 5 Applying the settings After having set up the mask and detection zones for all cameras click on Save settings to save the settings To return to the Recorder settings dialogue window click Cancel or switch the display to the Recorder settings dialogue and click on Close Configuration windows Then click on OK in the Recorder settings dialogue to apply the settings The following prompt is displayed Save Recorder Settings T Do you really want to save the new settings W Save as configuration profile Load configuration profile Cancel OF To reject the changes click on Cancel To save the settings in a profile activate the Save as configuration profile checkbox and click on OK The setup is then sent to the device and stored The settings are now applied to the specified cameras An alarm in a detection zone is indicated by a red rectangle You can analyse recorded alarms using the archive For more information refer to Accessing the Site Archive on page 35 and to the CamControl Player Guide 160 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 12 Alarms The Alarms node contains the followi
237. eates separate files for each call in a folder structure In such a way you can individually save calls to other media or delete them from the archive Constant access The video images from past calls saved in the receiver archive can be accessed at any time even during image transmissions The receipt of incoming alarms or performance of tours is in no way limited by accessing the archive Only the video images that are saved in the receiver archive during a currently active image transmission can be viewed with the archive access software after the connection or recording has completed You could also set up a second workstation for access with the CamControl PLAYER software only Storage capacity Because all calls are archived in individual files it is possible to save up to 2 GB of video image data per call The size of the entire receiver archive is only limited by the size of the hard drive 27769 02 63 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Individual calls The receiver archive has reached its maximum size The recording will now be stopped The files for the individual calls only gradually grow to their preset maximum size so no hard drive space is used up unnecessarily When the maximum size for the individual call is reached you receive a message and recording is stopped This method of saving ensures that the images received at the start of a connection or an alarm are always retained FIFO storage metho
238. ec methodtrigger or or Permanent On Recording interwal 2 fi fi fi ja Number of images i i 0 fi fi O0 Example of triggering In the example shown above 100 images are recorded as fast as possible if a transaction is triggered at the card reader Configuration using the falling edge Closing Edge e Number of images 100 e Rec interval recording interval O means as fast as possible e Rec mode trigger On The corresponding control input Control in1 is evaluated at the same time as the card reader and can also trigger image recording 27769 02 205 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 14 Audio If the optional audio card is installed you can transmit audio data with CamControl PRO and your device see Audio transmission on page 60 and in some circumstances you can also record audio data see Audio recording on page 189 Since the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series is equipped as standard with an integrated audio function these devices offer you the following functions e Connect the required peripheral devices microphone loudspeaker correctly to your device Refer to the product guide for more information e All required peripheral devices must be installed correctly on the receiver side as well Suitable microphone s loudspeakers sound card compatible with Soundblaster Recorder settings x Audio Device User Date amp Time H Connections Audio
239. ect button The software starts to establish a connection Online e Once the connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception Note Like the null modem connection connecting via USB serves primarily to put the device into operation or to modify the parameters In addition the USB direct connection can also be used to export image archives directly on the device 27769 02 15 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 4 2 Starting the program Once you have successfully installed CamControl PRO on your PC you can start the program either by clicking the program icon on the desktop or by selecting Start Programs CamControl PRO CamControl PRO or by selecting the path you chose during installation Start Programs Your_name CamControl PRO 4 2 1 Logging on and off User logon User identification User name demo Passuyord Cancel Help If you configured one or more users in User Management see User on page 80 then the User identification dialogue box opens on program start You are requested to enter a user name and password Pay attention to spelling because user name Is case sensitive If after clicking OK one of the entries is incorrect a warning signal is emitted and the cursor moves to field containing the incorrect entry CamControl PRO will not start until the user has logged on
240. ection is established This means that the image archive clock is set to the same time as the PC clock automatically after the pictures are loaded Note 266 This function can result in the wrong time in local digital image transmission systems if they are accessed from a different time zone and the correct time zone has not been set see Date and time on page 126 If time synchronisation is activated and the time zone is not configured correctly the archive may contain conflicting date and time information when it is accessed by multiple PCs in different time zones 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 2 4 8 Program window SCREEN Window always ontop ALWAYSONTOP 1 Program window always on top e Range O off default 1 on e Youcan configure the receiver software so that the program window is always on top and cannot be covered by other programs Only windows with the same attribute are not covered e g button panels for the Remote Adapter Window size selected WIDTH 1024 Specify the size of the program window by width 4 3 format Window size resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels 1280 1152x864 pixels 1152 1024x768 pixels 1024 e The size of the receiver software program window is automatically set to the maximum size allowed by the screen resolution of the PC during installation You can specify a different window size at any time e If program window size is defined solely by
241. ections to one or more receivers in the event of an alarm In the Phone amp IP numbers tab under the Connections node enter the relevant telephone numbers and IP addresses and specify dial up behaviour Recorder settings ia x Device User Date amp Time H Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms H Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Cancel Site archive state Help Network TCPAP External modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_4 Phone number IP address Callback 192 168 31 66 3001 Vv 01711234567 a 004943471234567 Si ZI Number of re dials Pause between re dials Pause between repeating list Jv Always call all numbers Phone numbers amp IP addresses 27769 02 Here you can enter up to four telephone numbers or IP addresses network operation to be called successively in the event of alarm The transmitter will start dialling the first entry top priority Enter the complete telephone number including prefix Use special characters or letters only if absolutely necessary You may prefix the telephone number with the outside line number s here You must include the associated separators when entering an IP address e g 124 124 124 124
242. ed device entries The option Select all checks all device entries of the current list Options for the chosen transmitter The button OK is only activated if at least one device entry is selected With OK the following options are implemented for the checked device entries if they were activated Update existing transmitters in transmitter list The option Update existing transmitters in transmitter list updates the IP addresses and if necessary the port addresses of existing transmitter entries The allocation is implemented via the serial number of the devices This function is particularly helpful for transmitters that obtain their IP address dynamically via DHCP see Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP on page 130 or for transmitters that were allocated for technical reasons another fixed IP address within the local network Add new transmitters to transmitter list The option Add new transmitters to transmitter list supplements the transmitter list with new transmitter entries The following information is included in the transmitter entry serial number name P port and IP address Other entries such as Username and Password must be added 110 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 6 9 6 HTconnect TCP IP leased line For firmware 1 52 or higher SVR series devices CamDisc HNVR and Cam4mobile and CamServer offer a HTconnect function for a leased line between the transmitter and the receiver softwa
243. ed to the IP address for transmitter dial up see Port number on page 100 If all transmitters dialled by your receiver PC are set to the same port you can change the receiver software configuration file to that port number See Port number on page 257 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Obtain DNS server address automatically DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Maximum transmission speed Web Server 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual If the function Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP is activated then for this transmitter you may also activate the function Obtain DNS server address automatically Within the network where the configured transmitter is used the respective service must be available Upon activating this function the settings for DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 are deactivated and displayed in grey To have changes of this option become effective you must confirm twice by clicking OK Thereafter close the connection When changing the settings regarding the DNS servers the device will complete a restart If you have defined a symbolic IP address for alarm calls under Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 enter the IP addresses of your DNS service in these two fields Note HeiTel transmitters do not support direct resolution of symbolic names in IP addresses However a connection can be established to a symbolic address viaa DNS domain name server Please contact
244. egions with extensive motion or pronounced changes to images are being monitored this function can only be used to a limited extent Under adverse conditions the camera channel permanently toggles Requirements e HeiTel devices with the following serial numbers e CQXXXXXX CVXxXxxxx MQxxxxxx MVxXxxxxx NVXXXXXX WBxxxxxx WCxxxxxx WDxxxxxx WSxxxxxx WVxxxxxx e Device firmware V1 60 or higher 2 7769 _02 261 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Activate online motion ONLINEMOTION ON 1 online motion detection activated detection e Range of values O Off deactivated default 1 On activated e Inthe basic configuration online motion detection is deactivated To activate it a corresponding entry in CAMCTRL INI may need to be added Note Online motion detection can only be activated or deactivated globally e The integrated motion detection is not designed for outdoor recordings and should therefore be reserved for indoor cameras e Online motion detection has not been developed for multiple views Operate the CamControl PRO software using this function in a single view zoom full image e CamControl PRO supports online motion detection in the main window and additional windows Defining cameras for ONLINEMOTIONCAM2 x Bit coded value information online motion detection y corresponds to bit 0 camera 1 bit 1 camera 2 Vaue fee Joao a a e Range of values 0 to 1023 Sample values
245. eived transmitter archive archive images are also saved see PC Archive on page 84 When you are accessing the PC archive these images are identified in the status bar with the entry Archive Exiting pre alarm images Clicking aye exits the transmitter archive and live image transmission resumes 27769 02 53 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 4 8 PTZ control and remote adapter CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer transmitters come equipped as standard with a directly connect remote control interface for PTZ cameras You can remotely control all the important functions of up to two four or ten cameras with customised menus and buttons via an existing remote data transmission or network connection between the relevant transmitters and CamControl PRO As remote camera control is one of the main applications the remainder of this section deals with this function This section also contains information on the R16 Adapter which can be used to extend the devices with 16 relays 4 8 1 Operating PTZ control Installing control protocols Before you can use the integrated PTZ control you must install the relevant data protocols for your camera system so that incoming remote control commands from CamControl PRO can be converted into control commands that are compatible with the camera system in question for example a dome The installation procedure is described in Recorder settings see
246. en programmed accordingly For other cameras select the option Off On dome protocols with transmission of hexadecimal numerical values up to 127 presets position 0 to 126 are supported When transmitting decimal numerical values a maximum of only 100 presets position 0 to 99 can be activated The standard setting is Off The extended number of presets primarily allows for the control of dome specific special functions Note Presets can also start special functions depending on the system used This for the most part affects presets with higher numbers For more detailed information please refer to the manual for your pan and tilt system and for your dome camera respectively In the Alarm column you choose between the options On or Off standard setting If the On option is activated the image transmitter signals an alarm The alarm is camera selective and CamControl PRO displays a corresponding message in the event tree Online Alarm alarm panel camera name e Online Alarm alarm panel camera name In the event of an alarm the relevant camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same way as the message syntax of camera alarms In the Relay column you choose between the options Off standard setting Relay 1 or Relay 2 Relay 1 and Relay 2 are standard names of relays that can be modified in the Relay menu see Relays on page 208 if necessary If you select one of the relay
247. en the Alarm input is open The function Alarm only when trigger level stable for x s seconds is used to debounce the alarm input The alarm message is only triggered if the stable state is present for at least the specified period Possible values are Off 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 30 45 60 and 90 So that a connection can be established to your receiver in the event of an alarm or if the status of the alarm enable input changes you must save the telephone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 A change of state at the Tamper input designation on the video system Aux in1 always sends an alarm irrespective of whether the video system is armed or disarmed As a rule image transmission starts with the image that triggered the alarm Then camera 1 will be switched on Select Normally opened or Normally closed to specify which input state will trigger the alarm Normally opened Normally closed A 27769 02 _ _ Normally opened ka Select Normally opened from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver when the Tamper input is closed Select Normally closed from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver when the Tamper input is open 163 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 12 2 Pre alarm CamTel VG and CamTel SVR only Open the Pre alarm tab from the menu u
248. ened a Stop writing to HOD when Y out was switched for 10 s restart after 3 minutes or power off Use of the Aux in2 To use the potentialfree control input Aux in2 additional programming is control input necessary e Timeout Timeout lets you configure a period of time for which the video system waits while activated by Aux in2 before the HDD is put into standby mode If activation is deactivated using the control input Aux in2 within the defined waiting period the HDD is not put into standby mode If the control input Aux in2 is deactivated after the HDD was switched to standby mode the HDD is immediately reactivated Independently of Aux in2 the HDD remains for at least 10 seconds in standby mode Contacts Using the parameters Normally closed or Normally opened you define in what switching state the standby mode for the HDD is to be activated Activate the standby mode for the HDD depending on the programmed contact assignment opening or closing the connection between Aux in2 and ground using a button or switch Depending on the selected timeout interval either a button or a switch will be available to change the status Write logfile entry Before the HDD is put into standby mode the device writes the logfile entry HDD deactivated including date and time HDD safe power down The HDD is put into standby mode and does not record any more data The video system signals this state by means of the flashing yellow video signa
249. er is identified by a unique serial number provided by the manufacturing plant The serial number is located on the bottom of your device MAC address The MAC address Media Access Control is the specific hardware address of the integrated network interface Ethernet This address provides a unique device identification of the device within a network The MAC address may be required by the network administrator in some circumstances in order to configure network components such as switches routers or firewalls Devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR and CamDisc VG HNVR series have two network interfaces The relevant MAC addresses are displayed in the TCP IP Connections network see Special network configuration with CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 133 configuration dialogue 122 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Device name CamControl PRO Software Manual A transmitter can be uniquely identified any time using its serial number However using a transmitter name will make things a lot easier The Device name max 20 characters is shown in the window title bar of the receiver software during active connections To make it easier to access connections later the device name is used in the event tree the event file CC4LOG TXT and in the receiver archive The device name can be faded into the current video image see Extras on page 224 7 2 User The User tab allows you to add up to 25 different users Moreover it all
250. er list the transmitters and groups are sorted automatically by name in alphabetical order Within the groups these subordinated transmitters are also sorted in alphabetical order Add With the button Add you will also open the previously described context sensitive popup menu see Popup menu on page 104 Delete With the button Delete you will delete a checked entry If the checked entry is a group a confirmation prompt will appear distinguishing between cases Attention ee xi Delete group You can delete appendant transmitters by pressing ALL Cancel All e OK deletes only the selected group while the subordinated transmitters will be retained as individual transmitter entries within the transmitter list e All deletes the selected group including all subordinated transmitters from the transmitter list If a group in the transmitter list is checked then you will reach the dialogue Enter group name with the button Modify which is used to modify the name of this group Enter group name Demonstration Kiel IF Tours Tours are not completed for groups but only for individual transmitters So that tours See Configuring tours on page 93 can be completed for transmitters subordinated to groups all transmitter data of the transmitter index in the drop down menu are displayed above the button lt Add see Add on page 94 Camera window when dialling a group monstration Kiel IP 8 Demo Kie
251. er the node Connections In HT connect the current HeiTel devices have a leased line between the transmitter and the receiver software This service is only available for TCP IP connections Note Please also take note of the configuration notes for CamControl PRO software see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 111 For this the TCP IP leased line is always initiated by the transmitter The correspondingly configured HeiTel devices establish a resting permanent connection to the receiver for this For this leased line via TCP IP each transmitter which is connected with a receiver generates a data volume of around 6 bytes per minute for the resting connection The use of the TCP IP leased line is suitable for transmitters with DSL UMTS connections with dynamic IP addresses thereby eliminating the need for DynDNS entry Dynamic Domain Name System entry with the corresponding providers and for devices within company provider networks where the firewall restrictively prevents incoming calls x External modem Internal ISDN TA Madem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect lt gt Device User Date amp Time E Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Internal ISDN T4 Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HT connect only TCP IP Port 3333 Port 3000 and Port 80 are already in use IP address 1 IP address 2 Camera settings IP address 3 Camera
252. era settings 1 v fieis 0 57 I Camera groups L E Motion 7 Privacy zones 2 E POS az 5 a E Alarms Site archive 3 E Pos X fo 57 v E Video settings Passwords 4 E POS v jo 57 M E Adapter 5 E aE 0 Lal i a Audio Track settings 6 E Pos X jo 57 E E Video 1 in Video 2 in Video 3 in a 7 a POS 7 p 57 x a 8 M POS 7 100 H 57 7 a Ok H a TE 9 E POS z jo 57 X m Site archive state 10 a POS fo S7 wi E Set values for IBIS recording Recording With the Recording option you can active the recording of transaction data for the respective camera track Type With the Type option you can specify whether transaction data to be recorded is POS or ATM or IBIS or Soyal data A correct assignment of the type is important for the later evaluation of the transaction data ATM data is supplied solely by certain cash dispenser machines and access control systems Please also note the information in the device specific supplementary information for the POS ATM Adapter IBIS data is received via the IBIS Adapter via the transparent serial interface preferably from a Cam4mobile device For this application note also the programming of the serial interface see IBIS function with Cam4mobile on page 214 Soyal data is only received using a Soyal Card Reader via the transparent serial interface For this application note also the configuration of the serial interface See
253. ered as the location Hardware Update Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Pha Bas Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search CACCLITE Drivers v Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Confirm your selection with Next gt Step 7 If you receive a message regarding the Windows logo test you can skip this test by selecting Continue Anyway Step 8 This dialogue box provides information about the status of the driver installation Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard installs the software Pha Bae Y Hg Linux USB Ethemet ANDIS Gadget Cancel Step 9 After the driver has been successfully installed you will see this final dialogue box 298 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for BS Linux USB Ethemet ANDIS Gadget Click Finish to close the wizard Complete the dr
254. erial number of the transmitter This area contains no entry and is displayed in grey only when making a new entry Once the first connection has been established successfully the device serial number is obtained and displayed Where new transmitters are entered via Device detection in local area network see Device detection in local area network on page 108 then serial numbers are similarly available When using HTconnect see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 111 you have the option to manually enter or correct serial numbers This option was retained for upwards compatibility with pre SVR models If your transmitter is password protected you can enter the passwords for the transmitter in question in the Auto password 1 and Auto password 2 boxes in order to automate password entry when establishing a connection 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Username amp You can save the respective login data in the Username and Password Password fields These are used for a tour or for manual entry of a VG SVR or CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile series transmitter and for CamServer devices If you want to delete a transmitter from the transmitter list then click Delete in the Transmitter index dialogue box Transmitters that are no longer listed in the transmitter list cannot be included in tours see Delete on page 93 For deleting groups of devices please note the information on device grou
255. ers listed here will often need to be configured with different data depending on the provider For example in the case of access data User name and Password there are providers by which these entries can remain empty whereas others require a definite or indefinite entry Always contact your mobile phone provider with regard to current access data 134 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Initialisation command 1 The predefined command sequence ATEOV1 amp D2 amp C 1S0 0 IFC 2 2 generally ensures correct initialisation of the internal 3G UMTS modem Note With the installed Sierra Wireless card MC 7304 or MC 7354 the initialisation command must be set network modes all Initialisation command 2 A further command sequence enables further provider dependent adjustments of the internal 3G 4G modem where necessary Reset Adapter Every This drop down list menu allows you to specify how often you want to reset the internal 3G UMTS modem Certain installations may require the internal 3G UMTS modem to be reset at periodic intervals in order to ensure the availability of the device Please note that this interval is reset after each connection and that the adapter cannot be reset during active connections e With recording pause Select this option to pause the recording of image data during resetting of the adapter MTU This setting for MTU Maximum Transmission Unit is provider dependent standard value 15
256. es Incompatibility between the PABX system and the ISDN adapter Device Is not connected to the SO bus Incorrect telephone number PABX system does not accept the transmitter Call has been accepted by another data device Incorrect protocol is set at the TA End of Step 2 ISDN network 326 1 Check the ISDN connection cable contacts and the V24 cable Does the TA signalise the presence of an ISDN line Switch off the modem and transmitter for a short time and then back on switch modem back on first Check the modem init string at the transmitter add S0 0 and set the port speed to 115200 baud Enter the correct MSN Reset the transmitter to the factory settings then enter the special modem init string for the modem being used Set the TA to Euro ISDN DSS1 Replace the TA or have the TA updated Check the settings of the PABX system Test the ISDN adapter at an ISDN connection without a PABX system Check the ISDN connection cable and transmitter Use the correct telephone number Assign an MSN and enter this inthe system Assign MSNs to all other data devices or disconnect these to test the SO bus Check the modem init string 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual TCP IP Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Error message Terminal server is not Test network access using CamControl PRO
257. es of the CamControl PRO version in use to date or the previous version of CamControl 4 to a directory of your choice Once you have installed the latest version of CamControl PRO copy the backed up configuration files to the program directory of the newly installed receiver software Note Do not install CamControl PRO over an existing installation You must first uninstall the software and delete the program group via Windows Explorer Alternatively specify a new directory and a new program group during installation Make sure to back up all files that you still need This applies in particular to the receiver archive You should back up the following files before an update Configuration file C CamControl PRO CAMCTRL INI Telephone directory C CamControl PRO TELEDATA DAT or C CamControl PRO TELEFON INI Company text C CamControl PRO FIRMA TXT 8 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Tours Archive configuration Positions of additional windows Favourite transmitters AVI export Remote module Transmitter specific alarm processing Additional transmitter specific information Firmware files PDF manuals for online help Device drivers Receiver archive Backing up the receiver archive CamControl PRO Software Manual C CamControl PRO ROUNDS32 RDS C CamControl PRO SERVICE INF C CamControl PRO ONSCREENINFO CFG masking position and font type of camera and transmitter name while printing or saving picture C CamCon
258. eserved and estimated required storage capacity messages concerning event size settings may be displayed Desired number of events exceeds possible number of events 200 If the desired number of events exceeds the possible number of events the following message will be displayed Curent allocated size for events 3 22 OB 7 Estimated required size for events 4 45 GB Possibly there is not enough HDD capacity allocated to record 1500 events of the configured size Please increase the track division size or increase the event patitian size or reduce the number of events In this case you can reduce the number of desired events increase the camera track or increase the partition for event recording see Track settings on page 191 and see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Possible number of If the desired number of events is smaller than the possible number of events exceeds events the following message will be displayed desired number of events Current allocated size for events 3 22 OB Estimated required size for events 3 10 GB Possibly there could be more than 1500 Events stored of the configured size Either r allocate disk space for another track or for continuous recording or increase the number of events As more events could be recorded you can increase the desired number of events Alternatively you can allocate hard d
259. esponding password The relevant information can be obtained from your Internet Service Provider ISP or the responsible system administrator Server information Outgoing mail SMTP Under Outgoing mail SMTP enter the corresponding DNS domain name of your SMTP server e g in the form aaaa bbbb cccc The alarm message by email function is not supported if an IP address is specified User information Account name Under Account name enter the email address or user name for the email account intended to serve as the sender The sender address consists of the account name and SMTP domain If however the account name contains an sign the account name will be used as the sender Outgoing mail SMTP Sender address smtp heitel com info heitel com info heitel com smtp heitel2 de info heitel com In both the cases the sender results as info heitel com Password Add the associated password Optional message or link Text or link As an option you can add supplementary text or a hyperlink under Text or link This text is displayed in the text of the email alarm The length for this text field is limited to 64 characters Destination in case of Alarm Destination email Under Destination email address 1 or Destination email address 2 enter address 1 the email addresses of the recipients Destination email Note Only one email address is permitted for each destination email address 2 address Alarm image as For each d
260. estination address you also have the option to select whether attachment the respective alarm image is to be sent as an attachment with the email In general an attempt is made to send an alarm by email to the recipients who have been entered If sending of the email fails no further alarm message for the alarm concerned is sent by email Independently of the email alarm message alarm messages from the corresponding receivers are sent according to the settings made under Telephone number amp IP addresses see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 2 7769 _02 143 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 4 7 1 Structure of the email alarm message For the email alarm message the email function automatically generates a subject line which is structured as follows Send email in case of alarm Subject Transmitter name or Serial number reason for alarm Camera name if present Date and Time Example of a possible subject line CamDisc SVR 10 1 control input 01 Camera 1 2007 06 06 Lists 42 Body of email The body of the email is prepared in fuller detail and contains where necessary the optional supplementary text or link and or the alarm image Alarm message location transmitter location Webs 1 07 168 31170 Units Canmbise SVR TO EL feV547015 Reason control input O1 Camera 1 Date 2007 06 08 11 18 42 All messages within the body of the email that have been generated automatically by the em
261. et mask of your sub network in the corresponding box You can find out the relevant subnet mask from your network administrator or internet service provider If you are planning a new local network you should set the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 allows the allocation of 254 network addresses If your network is connected to the Internet via router by dedicated or dial up line or if it is part of your company intranet enter your gateway address in the corresponding box You can find out the relevant gateway address from your network administrator or internet service provider You do not need a gateway address for a new local network value 0 0 0 0 The default port of your transmitter unit is 3000 It may be necessary to change the default port number if want to set up more than one transmitter unit at one IP address via router or if port 3000 has been already been allocated in your network or cannot be used Note Change the port number only if necessary For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl PRO press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page253 pam Port numbers range from 0 to 65535 Please note that the numbers 0 to 1023 are reserved for the system Therefore only ports 1024 to 65535 are available Contact your network administrator for assistance in defining an appropriate port number Note If you are using any port other than the default port 3000 this port number must be add
262. figuration a signal input always activates an alarm regardless of whether the video system is armed Entry Exit Arm delay The video system is armed or disarmed within the monitored area In this configuration a signal input activates an alarm after a configurable time delay For every camera channel only one time period can be configured which applies to both Entry and Exit for the monitored object The alarm is camera specific and in CamControl PRO a corresponding message is displayed in the event tree e Online Alarm camera name triggered control input OnlinerAlarn Camera 8 50 When an alarm message is given the corresponding camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed analogous to the message syntax of camera alarms In addition to camera names the control input of the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter that has been triggered is shown in parenthesis 27769 02 235 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Entry Exit timeout Linked with motion Trigger event Contact 236 In the Entry Exit timeout column you select a time period This field can only be configured when in the Alarm column for the corresponding Signal input the function Entry Exit has been selected The configurable time period for the delay for an alarm for disarming or arming is configured via a pull down menu Possible values are 10 s default setting 20s 30s 40s 50s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5
263. figuration the following additional information can be displayed Field v connection established by Field v connection established by e M internal remote data transmission adapter e g ISDN card EM external remote data transmission adapter e g MODEM NW Network NM Null modem UB USB UN Unknown Field y Reason for connection e R Receiver dialup e A Alarm call triggered by device e S Service call triggered by device every 24 hours Field z indicates the temperature measured in the device optional information see Optional column The user indicated in field w terminated the see ADC no connection to device in the login order indicated in field y O one 1 two etc Field z indicates the cause of termination e CMD Termination by receiver software command standard DCD Modem ISDN TA or TCP IP alarm adapter Data Carrier Detection was deactivated standard TI Timeout No data transmitted or capable of being transmitted 60 seconds error ADC AlarmDisConnect caused by an alarm optional feature to be set in device configuration 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis 27769 02 D amp T Login failed u The user indicated in field u tried to establish no v w y a connection to the device in the login order indicated in field w O one 1 two etc This attempt failed due to unknown user and or wrong password Depending on connection mode and configurati
264. file to the device dome P T head remote adapter etc via the digital image transmission system The position of the text in the drop down list is specified by means of consecutive numbering x range from 1 to 99 The number of the labelling text must match that of the corresponding command CTx Text for top list box max 12 characters CMDx Command for top list box The bottom list box can be defined indexed on the basis of the entry selected in the top list box In sucha way 99 entries in the top list box can each be combined with 99 options in the bottom drop drop list CyPNUM Number of entries range from 1 to 99 for the bottom list box The value y defines the reference to the command in the top list CyPTx Text for the bottom list box The value y specifies the reference to the command in the top list The value x range from1 to 99 specifies the position in this list CyPCMDx Command for bottom list box Double list box The double list box possible values for MODE 4 5 20 21 contains two independent drop down lists and is used on a camera specific basis The same variable names are used for the top list box as for the simple double indexed list box Additional variables are available for the bottom list box The value range for x is 1 to 99 CTx Text for top list box max 12 characters CMDx Command for top list box FCTx Text for bottom list box max 12 characters FCMDx Command for bo
265. ftware motion detector can be set to three levels of sensitivity Select Motion for maximum sensitivity and Motion for minimum sensitivity The image is then checked for movement every 300 ms Graphical The diagram directly above the input states shows which input states are representation activated deactivated for recording Red means active and black inactive Recording interval s This field defines the recording interval between consecutive images The recording interval applies to all operating modes You can enter values between 0 and 999 seconds in increments of 1 10ths of a second 0 seconds results in maximum recording speed The recording interval can be greater that the set value if recording is not in conditional refresh mode or if several cameras are recording simultaneously Number of images The Number of images field defines the number of images to be recorded if the image archive either detects a status change Opening Edge or Closing Edge or if the activated motion detector Motion Motion Motion detects motion For continuous recording with closed input Closed Permanent or open input Open Permanent no entry in this field is required as recording continues until the input state changes again Information on image recording The combination of various options allows for almost any recording situation You should however keep some important points in mind 204 Consider carefully what
266. g from the next section see Audio on page 206 H site archive Video settings fs Passwords POS ATM IBIS gt Keywords oe Adapter Track settings Video 1 in a Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Wideo 2 in l Wideo 3 in Video 4 in Video 5 in H Video 6 in H Video F in Video 8 in H Video 9 in El Video 10 in Local image archive settings You can make the following settings to the local image archive of your CamDisc SVR CamDisc VG device 27769 02 175 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis These include in particular e defining camera related image recording quality e assigning passwords for protection against unauthorised access to the archive e deleting recording tracks images passwords and the logfile e formatting the hard disk e configuring the recording of transaction data POS ATM and IBIS e configuring the recording of audio data e defining the size of individual recording tracks e selecting the recording type live image transmission and or recording and or archive access e configuring event and continuous recording e timer controlled recording All of the above items will be described in detail in the following sections 7 13 1 Video settings Open the Video settings tab from the menu under the Site archive node This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR
267. g up View Setup Error relay Device armed Gy 02 01 06 11 24 50 1500 C 542016 CamDisc svr10 1 Online a P 02 01 06 11 28 52 0002 Program over by HeiTel 02 01 06 12 13 43 0001 Program started by HeiTel HeiTel Digital Video GmbH Stuthagen 25 24113 Molfsee PC Archive PTZ control Wit ZA a vis If the active transmitter in the main panel has a PTZ camera select the camera in question by clicking the relevant Camera button Right click the video image in mainscreen or fullscreen viewing mode to open a dialogue box to control the camera s PTZ functions The changes are shown in the preview screen of this window Click the arrow buttons to control the panning and tilting functions The Z and Z buttons allow you to control the zoom function while the F and F buttons are for controlling the focus Click OK to close this dialogue box A live image in line with the preview is then shown in mainscreen or fullscreen viewing mode PTZ control via keyboard You can control the direction using the following keys PTZ control key PTZ control key 56 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual yo eer Use the following key for zoom and focus 4 8 1 4 List box and button panel for PTZ control In both PTZ control options a list box and a button panel are available if these have been defined with a corresponding R01 file for the respective transmitter List Box
268. ge 139 7 12 7 Camera position authentication Open the Camera position authentication tab from the selection menu under the Alarm node For every analogue camera track you can generate up to two reference images CamDisc HNVR This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Camera position authentication can only be programmed for the activated analogue channels see HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 246 Note Ensure that the scene used for camera position authentification is adequately lit under all operating conditions this is an essential requirement Ensure that no image noise shadows or similar have a negative influence on the position authentification function Recorder settings T x Alarm inputs Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication Device U bale amp Time New reference image Applicable Triggered Connect H Connections Camera settings 1 Configure Yes No M On Camera groups l Motion detection zones Conti Privacy zones 2 _Configue posal dics Be Bo Alarms f i i Alarm inputs 3 Configure Yes No On Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss 4 Configure Yes No On Camera position 4 1 Site archive 7 Audio 5 Configure Yes No On Relays f PTZ control 6
269. ge 8 6 3 Extras The Extras menu allows you to change the following parameters Previously you were only able to set these using the configuration file CAMCTRL INI see Configuration file with modifiable keys on page 257 Receiver options Options m Time synchronisation HTconnect PC Archive m Online view View at start of connection Mainscreen x Predefined cameras Mainscreen amp Fullscreen Quadro fi m Application window Application as on top window when changed please restart the software USB V Transmitter index with USB Node Time synchronisation Synchronise device time to PC time If you activate the option to Synchronise device time to PC time each successful connection to a current HeiTel device will synchronise the internal clock to the valid clock time for your PC Directly after loading its own configuration data the device applies the PC clock time see Time synchronisation TIMESYNC on page 257 Online view View at start of connection Mainscreen Mainscreen Quadscreen Ten Fullscreen In the View at start of connection area you can use the assigned pull down menu to select the display option that CamControl PRO should use once the connection is established See Changing screen view on page29 27769 02 81 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Notes e Thi
270. ge to be recorded Images per second The value in this field indicates the recording speed resulting from your interval setting Average image size The average image size is the basis for calculating the estimated recording interval Please ensure that the average image size in each case is an instant average of recent live images if need be only the average of the conditional refresh images is displayed Under certain circumstances higher space requirements per image must be assumed necessitated by significant image changes If the option Manual Input is enabled you can set the expected image size in the range of 2 to 300 KB using the toggle switch The estimated recording interval changes depending on the image size assumed Estimated recording Possible recording time is calculated automatically from your settings for period recording interval track size and track partition size for continuous recording see Track settings on page 191 and See Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 Note The calculated value is an estimate Actual recording time may deviate from this value 7 13 11 2 Advanced configuration Deselect Use easy mode to configure continuous recording in enhanced mode 202 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis Recorder settings E Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Video
271. gered by tamper of the related detector line for camera detector inputs CIO adapter CamServer 2c VG device series which have been wired and programmed in conformity with BS8418 normally closed BS 8418 Independent of the alarm enabling state of the video system an alarm will always be output in case of tamper Alarm triggered by motion detector ALARM0121 Alarm camera 1 PIR to ALARM0130 Alarm camera 10 PIR Tamper alarm triggered by external motion detector ALARM0131 Alarm camera 1 PIR tamper to ALARM0140 Alarm camera 10 PIR tamper Alarm triggered by detection at outdoor perimeter IntrusionTrace ALARM0141 Alarm camera 1 Outdoor Perimeter Detection IntrusionTrace to ALARM0150 Alarm camera 10 Outdoor Perimeter Detection IntrusionTrace You can specify automatic alarm processing for every section with the following commands Command set for R02 files Ranges e t 1 to 2678400 time in seconds e xX 0 to 2 000 000 000 number of images e y 1to 10 depends on digital image transmission system in use Commands ALARM x Number of images to be received by the alarm camera LIVEy x Number of live images from camera y PREALARMy x Number of pre alarms from camera y CamTel SVR devices only REPEAT x How often LIVEy images are to be received TIME t Timeout The connection is closed after this amount of time at the latest The connection is automatically closed earlier if the specifie
272. gher i CamControl PRO 3 xx CamDisc syr10 1 View Setup Site Archive Log file Offline Offline amera Error relay Device armed Offline ela oa GZ 02 01 06 13 14 12 1500 C 542016 CamDisc svr10 1 Online a HeiTel Digital Video GmbH details phone H A 02 01 06 13 14 32 1500 C 542016 CamDisc svr10 1 Online ada apie i cer PC Archive P 02 01 06 13 32 45 0002 Program over by HeiTel ERES oe Audio control Once you have activated a transmitter equipped with an audio card in the main panel the push to talk button for audio control appears on the bottom right of the screen This button is divided into two and facilitates three types of operation The microphone button is not activated by default in other words the audio data transmitted from the transmitter are output via the sound card of the receiver PC listening If you click the microphone button audio signal is received through the sound card in the receiver PC and sent to the transmitter Speaking When you release the mouse button the microphone button reverts to the default setting and the software works in listening mode If you click the lock button once the microphone button stays pushed in so that you don t have to keep the mouse button pressed while talking To release this function click the button again Classic audio mode If you want to continue using the normal audio function with separat
273. ghlighted in red when a camera alarm detector input has been triggered to Connect End of Step 4 ISDN network 328 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 10 Software Licence Contract Please read all of this software licence contract carefully It stipulates the legal regulations by which you are allowed to use the software package that you have purchased The term software package comprises software products including updates epigrams changed versions additions or copies as well as printed material and online or electronic accompanying materials This licence contract is not a contract of purchase The copy of the software product contained in this package as defined below and all other copies that you are entitled to make within the scope of this contract remain the property of HeiTel referred to in the following as the licensor By installing this software product you agree to the regulations set forth in this contract If you do not agree to this contract then you are not entitled to install or to use the software product However you may return the product to the dealer from which you have purchased it for a full refund Use of the Software 1 1 Excepting 3 2 the licensor grants the purchaser the non transferable and non exclusive right to use the enclosed software product within the scope of the following conditions for his exclusive use only 1 2 The permission to use this software product is l
274. gnal has been lost 224 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis Recorder settings Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Alarm panel Extras V Routine call every 24 hours 9 z fo Upload Download L IP Camera Extra HYBRID Card 4 Use without hard disk drive J Hang up and redial on alarm Release access for PTZ Relay Audio after 30 seconds V Preemption OK Software video signal lost detection Immediately X L ee Cancel Merge into images J Merge camera names into images Site archive state CamControl PRO Software Manual Extras Log file Last caller J Change of inputs Only when armed Temperature V Video signal loss detection Service JV Alarm call in case of reboot P Alarm call in case of defective Hard Disk J Merge transmitter name into images IV Merge date and time into images Service Alarm call in case of reboot Alarm call in case of defective hard disk 27769 02 Following a device restart triggered by switching on or for example by a configuration dependent restart such as following an IP address change the telephone number or IP address stored in the entry Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 is dialled when this op
275. groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control IP address 4 www yourdomain com IP address 5 192 168 131 79 Cancel Site archive state Help Enter the port for HT connect connections The standard setting is Port 3333 Please note that this port must match the settings made for the receiver software see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 111 For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl PRO press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page 253 Emel IP address 1 to IP The address entries for IP address 1 to IP address 4 cannot be changed address 4 in this configuration menu because these addresses are taken from the menu Phone number amp IP addresses see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 27 69 _02 145 CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 9 IP address 5 Activation IP address 1 to IP address 5 HeiTel by Xtralis The IP address or symbolic address in this field is user definable You must include the appropriate separators when entering this IP address e g 124 124 124 124 If you are using a DNS service you may enter a symbolic address here For the system to recognise the entry as a symbolic IP address you must put the address in quotation marks e g www your_domain com The IP addresses of your DNS service must be entered on the Network TCP IP dialogue window see Ne
276. h the presets have been programmed accordingly For other cameras select the option Off On dome protocols with transmission of hexadecimal numerical values up to 127 presets Position 0 to 126 are supported When transmitting decimal numerical values a maximum of only 100 presets Position 0 to 99 can be activated The standard setting is 0 The expanded number of presets primarily allows for the control of domespecific special functions Note Depending on the system used presets can also start special functions This for the most part affects presets with higher numbers You can find more detailed information about this in the manual of your pan and tilt system or dome camera 234 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual FirePanic Eratry E sit In the Alarm column you select between the following options e Off default setting In this configuration a signal input never activates an alarm e Alarm In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm when the video system is armed This function corresponds to the option On which was used up to and including CamControl PRO software V3 83 Note For HeiTel video systems with device firmware 1 77 or older only the options On and Off in the column Alarm are available To use the extended alarm functions which are explained in the following text device firmware V1 78 or newer is mandatory e Fire Panic Continuously armed In this con
277. h virtual COM port 27769 02 293 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis e After successful installation the virtual COM ports are available in the receiver settings of CamControl PRO If the virtual COM ports are not available in the receiver settings or an error message appears during subsequent initialisation check that the installation procedure was carried out correctly Note Some telephone systems and ISDN cards expect an MSN even for outgoing calls If you are unable to establish a connection to the receiver software and you receive the error messages Call rejected or ISDN Layer enter an MSN Initialisation The AT amp F command is generally sufficient to initialise ISDN cards 8 9 Installation of device drivers To operate your CamControl PRO software it may be necessary to have particular drivers installed The drivers which are part of the scope of delivery are found in the subdirectory Drivers in your CamControl PRO software Device dependent installation procedures e CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 page 294 e CamDisc HNVR 10 CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 page 300 e VG device series page 301 8 9 1 Installation of the USB driver for HeiTel Video Gateways Technical Product Information No 14 01 Product Version CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR Cam4mobile CamDisc SVR 10s CamDisc SVR 4s CamServer 1
278. habetical list of cameras the names are listed in light grey throughout A change between the two view modes is achieved by way of a left click in the camera list 106 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Camera change via camera list Demo Kiel CamDisc sv r IP PTZ Test pattern Within the camera list you will switch to the respective camera by double clicking on the camera name A simple left click on the camera name will present the name in red font and will display if applicable the respective reference picture The reference pictures must first be allocated to the individual cameras in the Transmitter data see Inserting and editing reference images on page 101 In this view it is possible with a left click in the reference picture to switch to a separate presentation of the camera list and reference picture ome Camera biel Static Camera Kiel Test pattern Test pattern Camera 1 Camera 2 Root Test pattern Test pattern The separate window of the reference picture can be positioned and scaled freely However these settings are only temporary and can not be stored Important information about the camera window e The camera switching is completed from the multi views e The camera switching is completed only when live pictures are displayed and not in the transmitter archive e A camera switching to a camera of another device will lead to a hangup and a redial These are logged
279. hannel the DSP information is displayed e g BF547 01 02 00 02 01 00 e If in place of a code similar to this there is only a hyphen displayed it means the DSP in question was not recognised If only a hyphen is displayed for each of the four channels then no expansion card has been installed or the expansion card in question is not correctly installed e The HYBRID Card 4 2 provides DSP support for analogue video channels V5 to V8 on the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Function The DSP function selected is displayed in the Function column Currently no selection is possible The entry is set to Analogue Video 246 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Enabled The Enabled column is for enabling the programmed DSP function When enabling the Analogue Video function for at least one video channel additional dialogue windows are offered for programming e g Motion detection zones see Motion detection zones analogue cameras on page 150 Privacy zones see Privacy zones analogue cameras on page 151 Motion detection see Motion detection on page 171 Camera position authentication see Camera position authentication on page 173 Additional programming options concerning the analogue video channels are enabled on these supplementary dialogue windows these options are already familiar from e g CamDisc SVR series devices Note Please note the following points
280. he CAMCTRL INI see PTZ control via USB joystick on page 262 USB joystick CamControl RU a zoon out a om k Gn y I 11 12 NN WS D PA is J CamControl RU top view The USB joystick CamControl RU has three axes X Y and Z and twelve buttons The X and Y axes of the joystick control the pan and tilt functions while the zoom functions are controlled with the Z axis by twisting the upper part of the joystick Using the twelve buttons you can also call up presets for the camera as defined in an R01 file The presets that can be called up correspond to the preset functions 1 to 12 stored ona button panel see List box and button panel for PTZ control on page 57 2 7 69 _02 55 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 16 presets Up to 16 presets are supported in total if the joystick used also provides this number of different buttons 4 8 1 3 Classic PTZ control The classic PTZ control is activated by right clicking once in the full format Mainscreen or Zoom display This option is recommended particularly for low bandwidth connections Due to the transmission of the live images in low resolution this allows for a higher refresh rate The lower latency interval between the control action and the transmission of the live image as response means that reproduction of the PTZ control is facilitated even at low bandwidth fluid i_ CamControl PRO 3 xx CamDisc svri0 1 Han
281. he ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol Note Many of the above settings are factory defaults and can be activated with AT amp F If you are still experiencing problems always consult your modem and transmitter manuals 7 4 4 Internal ISDN TA Modem Go to the Internal ISDN TA Modem tab via the selection menu under the node Connections If the internal ISDN Card or alternatively the PSTN Card for analogue telephone connections is installed configure it using this tab The settings are used solely to configure the internal ISDN module or the internal PSTN module Configure connections made through an external modem or external ISDN TA on the External modem tab see External modem on page 136 Note The ISDN Card or PSTN Card in conjunction with the SVR or HNVR generation of devices provides the added security of redundant image transmission as you can choose between two independent methods of transmission via ISDN line or analogue line and UMTS 3G network for example 27769 _02 137 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 138 Recorder settinas x Network TCPAP External modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai f gt Device User Date amp Time E Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Version 1 005 MSN 1234567 Reset Adapter every Th si Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect Camera setting
282. he Site archive or the Pre alarm A search restriction will continue to apply to all subsequent image searches until you either remove it or select another call All cameras n Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Transmitter archive The camera selective image search is only available in single image viewing mode It is disabled in the Four or Ten screen overview modes 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Call list Ey Clicking the Call list button or selecting File Load archive path opens the CACO Archive Browser dialogue box again Select an archive as described above Once you have selected a transmitter and a day select the desired archive see Archive selection on page 65 CAL archive brower Ele e a fo at EmTe sali EI CURNA 06 08 05 6 Canflise s 1041 CVE nee eet 4 OO 6 Camii sri H CRO ame eer 414 TOS my CamTed ovr 4 Kid TOSIBOO Combed orld ti vais EF 05 0 08 FE 06 09 05 FE 07 09 05 TE 2 G 14 CamT ed sri nt Tanani Cantel irii Az Tong Cami el sti HF TODD C me ird 84 TOII BAE s Kiel Campi aed COSM S38 5 1 3 Multi screen view In addition to single image viewing mode you can also choose between Four and if necessary Ten screen viewing mode to access the receiver archive You can make this selection using either the View menu or the following toolbar buttons z Full screen view of th
283. he detection criteria settings in the Advanced Parameter Configuration see Advanced parameters on page 155 158 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual LA Advanced Parameter Configuration Detection profiles Custom In the configuration shown in the figure above the alarm is only issued if one or more persons remain at least 0 5 seconds inside at least one detection zone and move by least 2 0 metres LA Intrusion configuration Select camera Selected Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Dewarping Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Custom ii Drawing tools ia New Area New Mask A maximum of 5 polygon areas can be drawn These areas can overlap x Ta l Save settings Clear all Calibration Cancel Click on New Area To draw the detection ground zone click the left mouse button each time you want to make an angle Right click to complete the input If required a last line is added automatically to complete the polygon The enclosed area will be hatched with blue lines thus creating a blue zone You can easily change the form of the polygon by clicking one of the line end points angles and drag it to a new position You can also add a line by deleting one of the lines and automatically start d
284. he selected protocol to the internal PTZ control control system You must update your PTZ control when you commission your external device and PTZ control for the first time if you want to apply a new version of the protocol to the PTZ control system or if you want to remotely control another external device with PTZ control When you activate this function the Update control file RO1 option also becomes available Note PTZ control update can take several minutes with narrow bandwidth connections Do not close the current connection until all the data have been transmitted and the status window has closed 210 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis Update control file RO1 Deactivate PTZ PTZ control of IP cameras 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual Select this option to update the control file R01 to the receiver PC Select the appropriate control file for your external device from the drop down list The transmitter dependent control file is saved in the sub directory RMCTRL of the CamControl PRO program directory see Transmitter specific configuration files on page 271 Update the control file when you commission your external device and PTZ control for the first time if you want to transmit a new control file version to the PTZ control system if you want to remotely control another external device with PTZ control Note Updating the control file for your transmitter will overwrite the e
285. he width for individual columns is so narrow that the column headings cannot be shown in full Thus you can temporarily change the column widths e Position the mouse pointer on the separator line between two columns whose width you would like to change The mouse pointer changes from the standard display to a double line with two arrows pointing outwards To change the column width press the left mouse button and hold it down Now moving the mouse to the left or right will change the width of the columns in question After releasing the left mouse button the chosen width for these columns will temporarily remain After leaving the Recorder settings via OK or Cancel the column widths in the dialogue box CI Adapter are reset to the default values Input In the Input column only the numbers of the control inputs 1 50 are displayed Camera i eS In the Camera column you assign the individual control inputs a camera number ranging from 1 to 10 The triggering of the respective control input refers to this allocation The camera number is selected using an up down control button The range of values comprises the number of camera inputs on your image transmitter The standard setting is 1 27769 02 233 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis You allocate presets to the individual control inputs via the Preset column A corresponding allocation is only useful for connected PTZ systems or dome cameras for whic
286. hould be activated by default in Normal and Zoom viewing mode e The entries CAM1 to CAM4 specify the order in which cameras should be activated in Quadscreen viewing mode Note The alarm camera may be activated as usual in Normal and Zoom viewing mode This is not possible for Quadscreen and Ten screen viewing mode 27769 02 265 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Image size at 128 x 80 SMRESOLUTION 50 Image size in normal view for 128 x 80 Range 5 100 When working with a live image resolution of 128 x 80 pixels or lowest quality in normal view you can specify the picture size as a percentage of the image size in normal view Image quality tenand DEQUMODE 1 image quality in ten and quadscreen viewing mode quadscreen viewing mode Highest quality Medium quality default Lowest quality Changing the quality for the overview modes also changes the picture size in Normal and Zoom viewing modes If you select a higher quality the picture size in Normal and Zoom viewing modes increases e Three picture quality levels are available for the overview modes ten and quadscreen viewing modes 8 2 4 7 Time synchronisation TIMESYNC Time synchronisation MODE 1 Time synchronisation operating mode for current devices e Range O off default 1 on e If you activate time synchronisation the clock in the image device is synchronised with the system clock of the receiver PC every time a conn
287. howing event diagram EVENTSERIES Show the event tree 1 Event diagram is shown as soon as a camera track with event triggered recording is selected 0 Event diagram is not automatically shown when a camera track with event recording is selected EXTRA EXTRA This entry identifies an extra configuration section within the file Image display IMAGE _ Extended function for optimised display of PAL IMPROVEMENT and NTSC cameras Operating modes IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 0 default IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 1 variant 1 IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 2 variant 2 The two alternative methods require additional processor speed GPS GPS This entry indicates the configuration section for the GPS window Position of GPS window X position of the top left hand corner of the GPS window Y position of the top left hand corner of the GPS window Unit for the vehicle speed GPSSPEED Unit set for the display of speed in the GPS window possible units 0 kn 1 mph 2 km h Example GPSSPEED 0 unit kn GPS window active SHOWGPS Display of the GPS window Examples SHOWGPS 1 GPS window shown SHOWGPS 0 GPS window hidden Control elements for Google SHOWMAPCTRL Display of additional control elements in the Earth active GPS window Examples SHOWMAPCTRL 1 control elements shown SHOWMAPCTRL 0 control elements hidden 284 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR
288. ible number of The Possible number of events always supplies the maximum number of events potential events Since the calculation is based on the current image size changes to the image size may in some cases be ignored Calculate your Desired number of events using the guide value Possible number of events such that from this default value you subtract a reserve of 20 to 30 percent depending on the expected image change Duration of These entry fields allow you to define the duration of pre alarm and prealarm alarm s postalarm sequences in seconds Pre alarm alarm Specify how often you want an image to be recorded every x seconds interval s separately for pre alarm and post alarm sequence The resulting recording Speed will be immediately displayed in frames per second fps 27769 02 199 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Number of images Average image size Allocated size for events Estimated required size for events Messages Depending on your settings for pre and post alarm duration and intervals this field displays for each sequence the number of images that will be recorded when an event occurs Note If the defined recording times are exceeded or more images are recorded than was defined increase if necessary the Desired number of events or reduce the storage capacity reserved for event recording see Combined continuous and event recording on page 193 If the defined recor
289. ice and you want to select Overwrite protection retrospectively you should delete all recorded image data from the track Only then will total track capacity be utilised before Overwrite protection becomes active Monitoring recording time Report capacity for Select Report period less than if you want to ensure that your device can days provide saved video images for at least the specified period of time Define this period of time in the days box Once image data within the defined period of time starts being overwritten the Error relay is triggered and this event is recorded in the logfile of the image archive see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 Data protection Delete all pictures Select Delete all pictures older than if you want your device to older than days automatically delete all images older than the set number of days This allows you to set sensible recording time frames to comply with data privacy regulations or just to avoid managing irrelevant image data 7 13 10 Event recording 1 2 4 10 Open the Event recording 1 2 4 10 tab from the menu under the Site Archive node or from the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab These menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer series devices You can modify the settings for each camera track individually provided a partition for this recording mode has been created for the
290. ideo system can be displayed prefixed with the device name if necessary including date and time by clicking with the mouse on the position indicator Cam4mobile e MQ912091 A g i a pig iS wi KS EN my ES A Ei Bs GPS Live 2011 11 02 10 06 40 200m 10004 Map by OpenStreetMap Auto If you enable the Auto option every new position is automatically displayed in Google Earth Note Please activate this option only after opening Google Earth or OpenStreetMap Track If you enable both the Track option and the Auto option the individual positions are automatically displayed in Google Earth joined together by lines Depending on the update interval you can follow the track on the map 27769 02 33 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis You specify the update interval for automatic display Auto from the dropdown menu You can choose from the following values 1s 2s 4s 10s 20s 30s 45s 60 s 120s 180s 300 s and Off On the GPS Live window the interval relates to the date on which GPS data is received On the GPS Archive and GPS Site Archive windows it relates to the time interval between the recorded images If necessary you can enter a suitable time to reduce the update frequency and give the Google Earth or OpenStreetMap software more time to locate and update the position You can also adjust the density of positions when the Track option is enabled Use the Clear butt
291. if the leased line to the receiver has been deactivated on the corresponding transmitter and the HTconnect option on the receiver software at the receiver for this transmitter is still activated in Transmitter index 6 9 6 3 Notes regarding use of third party services We wish to draw your attention to the fact that when using HTconnect a correspondingly configured transmitter permanently attempts to establish a connection to the receiver As soon as the connection is established then per transmitter and per receiver a data volume of 6 bytes per minute respectively is generated If this is calculated up for a calendar month of 31 days the resting connection in itself generates a data volume of around 270 kilobytes per transmitter for each receiver If a transmitter establishes TCP IP leased lines to the maximum possible number of receivers five then the data volume is estimated to be around 1 35 megabytes per month For that reason you are advised to select a suitable tariff on pay to use connections such as DSL or UMTS Since the connection between the transmitter and the receiver software is permanently established as it were whilst the data volume as described above is relatively modest on a resting connection a volume tariff should generally be a more costfavourable option than a time based tariff for this application You are advised always to make checks at regular intervals on the data volumes used for the correspondingly conf
292. ignal to be recorded is lost for at least a defined interval Note Even if Video signal lost detection is not selected the integrated error relay is triggered if a signal is lost See Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 Clear Logfile Click on Clear logfile to clear the transmitter logfile right away in the middle of an active connection and create Logfile cleared as the first entry 7 21 Extras The Extras tab provides you with options for monitoring and performing advanced settings on your HeiTel devices Note Not all options are applicable to CamTel SVR CamTel VG devices The configuration options related to hard disks in particular do not refer to CamTel SVR CamTel VG series transmitters Digital image transmission systems equipped with hard disks log all important events in a transmitter logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 Under logfile you can specify that certain parameters be saved in this file for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices The Service area allows you to monitor the performance of your device Under Extra you can deactivate the hard disk of your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile or CamServer and initiate hang up and redial in the event of an alarm You can also release PTZ audio and relay functions for the devices and you can specify a delay time to detect whether the video si
293. igured connection and on the costs incurred under the chosen tariff With leased lines via DSL or UMTS 3G you are making use of third party provider services as a user Note Please note that HeiTel Digital Video GmbH has no influence on and assumes no liability for the function and availability of services obtained from other parties 6 9 6 4 Extended functionality of the HTconnect Server From software version 1 07 of the HT connect Server component of the CamControl PRO software package version 3 99 or later communication from the software modules has been switched from Windows messages to UDP User Datagram Protocol 114 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Extended HTconnect Server window 2011 08 22 08 02 59 HT connect Connect attempt from 192 168 31 180 accepte 2011 08 22 08 02 51 HT connect Connect attempt from 192 168 31 176 accepte 2011 08 22 08 02 50 Status server started on port 4444 2011 08 22 08 02 50 HT connect server started on port 3333 Status Active connections 2 Total connections 2 Search WC111501 Found NV900444 192 168 31 180 connected 2011 08 22 08 02 59 WC111501 192 168 31 176 connected 2011 08 22 08 02 51 Update connected devices Show configuration From the program version mentioned above the HTconnect Server program window contains a search function using the serial number of the video system and two additional buttons The Update
294. ile and CamServer and VG devicespage 117 27769 02 3 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 4 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 2 Introduction Thank you for choosing a HeiTel product Years of experience in developing and manufacturing CCTV software and hardware have resulted in this well thought out and reliable product designed for a wide range of applications Competent digital video partner HeiTel has been a pioneer in digital image archiving technology and remote digital video surveillance since 1990 and has now become an internationally recognised manufacturer in the field Rapid developments in all areas of hardware and software have made possible the development of increasingly complex and functional systems Digital image archiving Our range of digital image archiving equipment includes CamDisc SVR or CamDisc VG The flexibility offered by the removable hard disk for decentralised access using a typical PC makes it a cost effective product for recording digital video with all the features expected on the market Remote digital video transmission All our products can be connected to the public telecommunications network ISDN PSTN or a computer network TCP IP and can therefore be operated remotely The saved video images can be quickly and comfortably accessed in spite of the still relatively low bandwidth of the telephone network The transmiss
295. images are recorded from Camera 1 2 One image is recorded from Camera 3 3 1 and 2 are repeated until the four minutes have elapsed 4 After four minutes the connection is closed Special settings for automatic operation e Once off recording Connection duration 0 Camera field s 0 In this operating mode the number of images specified in the Camera 1 to Camera 10 fields is received once e No recording Connection duration 0 Camera fields 0 A connection is established to the transmitter once and immediately closed again No images are recorded The alarm is noted in the event tree however see Event tree on page 22 e Recording the alarm triggering camera Connection duration gt 0 Camera fields 0 If you configure the connection duration and camera fields like this then when an alarm is triggered by a camera control input the corresponding alarm camera is activated and recorded for the time specified No further camera switching takes place If the alarm does not involve a camera selective alarm Camera 1 is treated in the same way Notes e No incoming calls or alarms can be answered or processed when you are editing the Receiver options e Ifthe Transmitter index was opened in a connection window to establish a connection no simultaneously incoming call can be answered in this window The other three connection windows remain available for alarm processing e Warning signal If you have selected Accept call auto
296. imited to its use at a single computer workstation irrespective of whether this is a PC workstation within a network or any other multistation computer system or whether this is a single workstation that is not connected to other computer workstations If the software product is to be used at more than one computer workstation then you must either purchase the appropriate number of licences as full individual software versions or a multi user licence right to copy the software or purchase of additional original data media and or manuals which then permits the purchaser additional rights to multiple use of the software 1 3 The permission to use the software on single non networked PC workstations includes the right to install the delivered software from the original data media onto the mass storage of the hardware used as well as the right to load the program into its working memory 1 4 When using the software within a network or on any other multi station computer system this permission of use includes the right to install the purchased software once onto the mass storage and to load it into the working memory of a connected computer Use of the software within a network or any other multi station computer system is not authorized if this allows the software to be used at a number of computer workstations that exceeds the number for which the licence has been purchased A licence for the software product may not thereby be divided or simultaneo
297. ing video images If the internal hard drive is not detected the video system will check the availability of an external hard drive to store images e Option Search for internal HDD first deactivated The video system is using the external hard drive for storing video images If the external hard drive is not detected the video system will check the availability of an internal hard drive to store images Note This option is disabled and greyed out in case the corresponding feature is not available 7 13 3 1 HDD safe power down functions For the device series CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs Cam4mobile CamServer and CamDisc HNVR the introduction of firmware 1 86 and the software CamControl PRO Version 3 87 provides functions for the safe powering down of HeiTel video systems and therefore also for the safe removal of HDDs especially of the SATA series Note The new HDD safe power down functions ensure that the integrity of dataon HDDs is retained and that during removal any potential loss of data is prevented 180 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Minimum requirements e Device firmware 1 86 e CamControl PRO 3 87 Safe powering down of the recording system and safe removal of the HDD using V out If the system is programmed as below the HDD is put into standby mode via V out Press V out for at least Press and hold the V out button on the front of the device for at least 10 10 seconds seconds Alternatively
298. ing OK Different messages may be displayed depending on the type of change to be implemented If necessary you can save your preferred archive settings in the device permanently by selecting Save as configuration profile See Configuration profile for video systems with removable hard drives on page 120 Alternatively you can load a previously saved profile by selecting Load configuration profile You can also back up a mirror image of device configuration on the receiver PC or apply a previously saved mirror image see Upload download on page 229 Load configuration profile Delete track 1 2 4 10 Select this option for one or more tracks if you want to immediately delete all stored images on the tracks in question during an active connection Images on other tracks will not be deleted The warning that you are about to delete image data only applies to the selected tracks 2 7769 _02 179 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Delete all images and Select this option if you want to immediately delete all images and passwords for the image archive on the hard disk drive during an active connection see Archive passwords on page 177 Format HDD Select Format HDD to format the hard disk drive when the connection has closed Formatting time depends on the size of your hard disk drive and the device cannot be dialled during this time It takes about two minutes to format a 200 GB hard disk drive The
299. ing modes when accessing live images in the main panel When you click HEN a menu containing the different viewing modes opens Quadscreen Cos Ten Fullscreen a Mainscreen faroup 1 Group 2 Group 3 Croup 4 Group 5 The software provides you with the following viewing modes Quadscreen This multi image viewing mode shows you four live images in the main panel at the same time By clicking the and buttons located underneath the images you can select different cameras for this viewing mode as necessary Ten This overview display shows live images from ten cameras at the same time This viewing mode is only available for transmitters with more than four camera control inputs Fullscreen The live image from the camera in the Mainscreen viewing mode is enlarged in the main panel The control panel to the left of the full image the LEDs and the Relay buttons are all hidden The Camera buttons and the image quality slider are still available A button to switch to Mainscreen viewing mode is also available This is the default viewing mode of CamControl PRO 27769 02 29 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Camera groups For the SVR devices CamDisc HNVR and Cam4mobile you can define up to five camera groups each with between a minimum of two and a maximum of nine cameras for transmitters with ten camera control inputs For transmitters with four camera control inputs you can define up to tw
300. interface with connected modem ISDN terminal adapter or null modem cable These data transmission paths can be intercombined in any way For example you can access CamDisc SVR over the network TCPI IP inspect another object via ISDN and process an incoming call from your modem without having to change the settings of the receiver software Receiver options i F Network Options MV TCP IP Port 2000 CAPI 2 0 CAP 20 MSN m Modem Name Mode PORT A Noma Port Baud com 115200 Init prefix ATE 1 150 0 Prefix 1 ATD Prefix 2 Maximum connection duration Cancel On 1 s Help CamControl PRO with default settings allows up to four simultaneous connections These connections are established via Port A Port B Port C and Port D To fulfil all conceivable requirements you can configure each of these ports individually In such a way you can reserve ports for special tasks e g for analogue connections TCP IP connections and fixed or dedicated lines Note You have the option to scale the number of connection channels freely between 1 and 9 The number of connection channels is configured via CAMCTRL INI see Number of connection channels on page 268 Complete this file similar to the others with the listed parameters see Configuration file with modifiable keys on page 257 and with the corresponding entries Name In order fo
301. ion in the configuration menu or by accident in the accessing PC due to deletion or modification requiring automatic re formatting D amp T Power on V x Device switched on restarted Field x no no indicates firmware version number D amp T Power off The device was switched off This entry is not no no written to the file until the device is switched on again D amp T Logfile cleared x Logfile was deleted by the Delete logfile no no y function in the Site archive configuration menu Field x displays name of registered user and field y displays order of login O one 1 two etc D amp T Setup changed Device configuration was changed or at least no no x y the configuration menu was exited with OK and not Cancel Field x displays name of registered users and field y displays order of login O one 1 two etc D amp T Files renamed x File names on a removable hard disk from no no y another device were renamed The old serial number x can be used to determine the device in which the hard disk was used y is the serial number of the new device responsible for renaming DET Set dock 27769 02 285 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis D amp T Update x y The device was updated with new firmware no no The old version number is displayed in field x the new version number in field y D amp T Track x Camera track x was initialize
302. ion of live images makes it possible to view the area monitored immediately Our systems open up completely new areas of application and additional markets Break in or false alarm Our range of devices also includes our CamTel SVR or CamTel VG products With an external modem or an optionally integrated ISDN card we provide you with easy to install high quality products for remote video surveillance The recording of images from before the actual alarm was triggered means you have a concrete basis on which to make alarm verification decisions in a matter of seconds Powerful receiver software At the heart of our products is the CamControl PRO software which allows you to configure and access all HeiTel products This software product is included with our hardware and is available in various languages It allows you to install and control our products with ease using typical personal computers Integrated evaluation software With our CamControl PLAYER you can evaluate and process archived images quickly and conveniently The CamControl PLAYER software allows you to evaluate both PC receiver archives and video recordings on CamDisc SVR or CamDisc VG removable hard drives The software is a stand alone product and is available free of charge It allows third parties police public prosecution service etc to review original files in order to preserve evidence or suchlike Professional video management CamControl PRO is the latest develop
303. ion if camera 2 is active CAM3 Camera 3 section ue Variable definition if camera 3 is active CAM4 Camera 4 section ti Variable definition if camera 4 is active CAM5 Camera 5 section a Variable definition if camera 5 is active CAME Camera 6 section oe Variable definition if camera 6 is active CAM7 Camera 7 section a Variable definition if camera 7 is active CAM8 Camera 8 section sat Variable definition if camera 8 is active CAM9 Camera 9 section Variable definition if camera 9 is active 2 2 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual CAM10 Camera 10 section Variable definition if camera 10 is active Auto signalling camera switching section CAMINPUTS Automatic signalling camera switching section Variable definition Section for global control elements GRELAY Section for global control elements Variable definition for global control elements Section for global ClO Adapter control elements ClO_GRELAY Section for CIO global control elements Adapters Definition of variables for global control elements Comments Comments on individual entries are separated by a semi colon REM remark is also permitted at the beginning of lines that are solely comment lines Note We recommend adding comments to the entries in R01 files for the sake of clarity General variables The MODE variable is used to assign dialogue boxes
304. ion in the receiver archive of CamControl PRO In such a way you can access and edit all calls whenever you want with the archive access program A variable storage concept guarantees maximum efficiency see Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 Receiver archive settings m PC Archive options Options IV Archive activated Archive path t C CAMCONTROL PROSARCHIVE Serial channel Take call NTFS gt maximum archive size per connection 512 GB our User Archive capacity 2000 MB 1 954 GB Unused capacity 25317 MB 24 8 GB Cancel V Delete all recordings older than fi 82 day s Help Archive activated Select Archive activated to activate the receiver archive Note The images received are only saved when the archive is activated Audio recording When archive recording is enabled you can also record an audio stream This audio stream is recorded for as long as images are recorded for the transmitter in question The transmitter audio stream is recorded regardless of whether the connection is shown in the main window or a side panel The PC audio stream is always only recorded for the main window Recording is controlled by the audio control buttons see Audio on page 206 The archive access software now also includes buttons for audio recording access Archive path You can specify a directory path for sub directories and archive files of the receiver archive in the Archive path
305. ions are not available Audio Card with TrueSpeech Codec Audio V2 x The predecessor model uses a TrueSpeech Codec You can identify the model from the version number Audio V 2 x The difference from the model version described above is that you cannot apply further parameters to the signal input Listening The options Microphone and Line are deactivated and cannot be changed Audio 2 2 02 05 jv Listening f Microphone f Line W Speaking Notes e Foran Audio Card V2 x the options Microphone and Line in the software interface are displayed in grey as parameterisation with regard to the signal input is not necessary The functionality of the device inputs MIC and Line in is given These options displayed in grey do not indicate a malfunction of the Audio Card e If you establish a connection from your receiver software CamControl PRO under Windows Vista to a transmitter with a first generation Audio V2 x Audio Card please install a TrueSpeech Audio Codec on your receiver PC This makes it possible for Windows Vista to decode and reproduce the audio data 27 69 _02 207 CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 15 Relays HeiTel by Xtralis The current HeiTel devices are usually equipped with two relay outputs that can be used for a variety of applications e Asalatch e As a momentary with adjustable switching time e For signalling active connections e For signalling error states e For signalling a recording e Fo
306. ior to installation in the building See Step 2 on page 112 e Installing the transmitter in the list of transmitters in the receiver software see Step 3 on page 113 Step 1 To activate HTconnect on the receiver PC Note Alternatively HTconnect can be activated including port number allocation using the receiver software CamControl PRO see HT connect on page 83 Then continue as for the section HTconnect Server see HT connect Server on page 112 e Close down the receiver software e Open the configuration file CAMCTRL INI for the receiver software CamControl PRO e Locate the section EXTRA in the configuration file e Add the following entries in the section EXTRA see HT connect configuration on page 260 or make the corresponding changes HTCONNECTSVR 1 1 ON 0 OFF Default HTCONNECTSVRPOR T 3333 Default 3333 e To prevent HTconnect connections from occupying all possible connection ports thus preventing any alarms from being accepted you can also reserve a minimum number of ports for alarm connections in the EXTRA section RESERVEDALARMPORTS x x number of reserved ports e Save the changed configuration file e Start up your receiver software 27769 _02 111 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis HTconnect Server Active connections 0 Total connections 0 Fort 3333 e Check whether the HTconnect Server program is displayed in the taskbar e Open the HTconnect
307. ip of the removable frame Test the hard disk in the PC using Scandisk thorough surface test untick Automatically fix errors No remote transmission possible Troubleshooting for problems arising during remote communications via telephone and computer networks is divided into several thematic sections that you should read through systematically The errors faults are categorised in the individual sections according to the various methods of data transmission No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue _ ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP First try to narrow down the error Aided by the following steps check which function can not be correctly executed by your system Step 1 The receiver can neither call your own transmitter nor another transmitter demo transmitter Consult see No remote transmission possible on page 318 Step 2 The receiver can call other transmitters e g demo transmitter but can not establish a connection to your own transmitter Consult See Error at Transmitter Incoming Call Step 2 on page 324 Step 3 The receiver can establish a connection but can not accept incoming calls Consult see Error at Receiver PC Incoming Call Step 3 on page 322 318 27769 02 HeiTel by Xt
308. irements and purposes of the customer or that it functions with other programs used by the customer The licensor has neither explicitly nor silently guaranteed that the software has any particular characteristics the customer accepts sole responsibility for selecting the software product as well as for using it and for the results arising from such use The customer must examine the software program and the accompanying material thoroughly on receipt of the same and must report any faults or deficiencies immediately and at the latest within 60 days after the program has been put into operation Latent defects must also be reported immediately after they have been discovered If the customer does not fulfil his duty of reporting such defects then all liability of the licensor is excluded Should the software be faulty then the original data medium on which the software is stored must be correctly packaged and sent back to the licensor The name address and telephone number of the customer as well as a description of the fault and a proof of purchase containing the date of purchase and the location of the purchase must be enclosed with the software If the product deviates considerably from its description the licensor is obliged to either improve or to replace the product the choice of which remains his If replacement deliveries and or improvements are unsuccessful then the customer can either demand a partial refund or the cancellation of the
309. isable control 166 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 12 4 Camera control inputs Open the Camera control inputs tab from the menu under the Alarm node Camera control inputs allow you to control and monitor your system on an individual camera basis Recorder settings CamDisc HNVR De esma Alarm inputs Pre alarm Site Archive Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position aut_4 gt Connections Camera settings Linked with Camera groups Trigger level Mode Motion Motion Privacy zones b Alarms z Normally opened 7 Alarm Alarm inputs Pre alarm Normally opened z Off Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss ES Normally opened M Fire Panic ha Camera position authen H Site archive ae Ea Normally opened si Entry Exit Relays l PTZ control Normally opened Oft Serial channel Alarm panel i Log file EZ Normally opened Ore Extras Upload Download m r Ea Normally opened bd Off OK Fe Normally opened x Cancel e EZ Normally opened Site archive state Ez Normally opened 7 Help Note A switching state at the inputs must last at least 0 5 seconds to be certain that the transmitter detects it Note on CamServer 2c and video systems of the VG Series zs Normally opened Normally opened _ F Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normale closed
310. isk space not required because of fewer events to another track or to continuous recording see Track settings on page 191 and see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 Note Event size will always be adjusted to desired number of events as long as the minimum event size is reached The desired number of events is therefore achieved Event recording with a Soyal Card Reader In order for event recording to be triggered via the Soyal Card Reader it is necessary to define event recording for camera track 1 For the other camera tracks triggering is not possible via this card reader 7 13 11 Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 Open the Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 tab from the menu under the Site Archive node or from the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab These menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer series devices You can modify the settings for each camera track individually provided a partition for continuous recording has been created for the track in question see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 Recording is only possible if times for continuous recording have been defined in the timer for the track in question see Timer operation on page 194 Choose between two setting options e Easy mode for very fast and simple configuration see Easy mode on page 201 e Enhanced configuration methods for configuring co
311. ist s is the interval in seconds between a repeating list failed attempt to dial one of the four telephone numbers IP addresses and the next attempt Always call all If Always call all numbers is selected the transmitter tries to establish numbers successively a connection to every telephone number IP address entered If this option is not selected an attempt is made to reach one of the specified receivers starting with the first telephone number IP address If the option is active for a callback the transmitter attempts to establish a connection with every number address entered for a callback Note With appropriate relay configuration failure to establish a connection to a receiver in the event of alarm will be reported see Relays on page 208 Refer to your product guide for more information 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 4 6 Live video settings Open the Live video settings tab from the menu under the Connections node You can configure live image resolution and quality for each installed camera and for the individual multiple views Groups Quad Ten Moreover you can opt for conditional refresh transmission mode In the case of CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 you can only program the Conditional refresh option see Conditional refresh mode on page 142 Note For digital transmission systems with local continuous recording
312. ivated analogue camera channels The option is displayed in the recorder settings in this case If for the CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc SVR and CamServer devices images of IP cameras are recorded on a single camera track the Record preview images option can be enabled However no images are recorded of the appropriate resolution 195 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Warning on overrun Overwrite protection Select Overwrite protection to prevent older images from being replaced by more recent images Threshold warning In the Warning at field you can specify the capacity level at which you want to be notified in order to be able to take appropriate action This notification takes place in several ways e The error relay is activated e An appropriate entry is made in the device logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 e A message is displayed when you access the Site Archive transmitter archive see Accessing the Site Archive on page 35 e Amessage is displayed when your remove the hard disk drive from the device and access it locally on your PC Continuing recording If Overwrite protection is selected and a track is full recording will only continue when all the image data have been deleted You can do this with both the CamControl PLAYER and the CamControl PRO see HDD on page 178 Note If images have already been recorded on the track of your dev
313. iver installation by selecting Finish 8 9 1 4 Installation of the USB driver for SVR s series The USB direct connection requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 12 MBit s If you use the USB direct connection with a CamDisc HNVR you can obtain a maximum nominal transfer rate of 480 MBit s Please note that only devices are supported that are equipped with a modified front board starting Nov 2011 This function can be used with the following devices if their firmware is of version 1 72 or later e CamDisc HNVR 10 device serial number NV9xxxxx e CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s device serial number WS1xxxxx and WV 1xxxxx e CamServer 1 CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 device serial number WBxxxxxx WCxxxxxx and WD 1xxxxx The USB drivers for these devices can be found in the Drivers subdirectory of CamControl LITE software as of version 3 80 e PL2502NW_v20044 exe Driver file for Windows 2000 and Windows XP e pl2502vista exe Driver file for Windows Vista e pl2501win 32bit exe Driver file for Windows 7 Starting from firmware 2 04 or higher and CamControl PRO LITE software v 4 07 the driver VideoGatewayPL2502 inf for Windows XP 32 64 Bit Windows Vista 32 64 Bit Windows 7 32 64 Bit and Windows 8 only 32 Bit was added The USB direct connection can be used with the fo
314. ivided into two sections e File section see page 281 e Alarm configuration see page 282 File section In the upper part of this section existing R02 files are listed under R02 files The files either have the name standard this R02 file applies to all transmitters for which no separate R02 file has been assigned or the device specific serial number in the format YZxxxxxx e g CV651028 NV900444 etc In the lower part of this section you will find the following buttons R02 files Load Delete New file e g CD123456 Tt New e Use the Load button to load the selected existing R02 file into R02 File Editor e Use the Delete button to delete a selected existing R02 file After confirming the security prompt with Yes the respective R02 file will be permanently deleted e In order to create anew R02 file enter the respective serial number in the format YZxxxxxx in the input field below New file Confirm the input by clicking the New button After confirming the security prompt with Yes the respective R02 file will be displayed in the file section under R02 files 27 69 _02 281 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Alarm configuration NY 900444 Alarm reason aie Camera 1 0001 El Camera control inputs Camera 2 0002 Number of alarm camera images Camera 3 0003 jo Camera 4 0004 Camera 5 0005 Number of live images Camera 6 0006 Camera 7 0007 1
315. ized to rent lease sub licence or lend the software product The licensor reserves the right to change this software product and its accompanying materials at any time as well as the right to its further development improvement or replacement by a newly developed product The licensor is no way obliged to inform the customer regarding changes new developments and further developments or improvements to the software product Neither is the licensor obliged to provide the customer with such Period of Use 4 1 4 2 A licence contract in accordance to these regulations is made for an unlimited period of time A licence granted by these regulations loses its effectiveness without need of cancellations when the customer infringes one of the regulations contained in this contract The customer agrees bindingly in such a case to return or to destroy all copies of the software product according to the wishes of the licensor Destruction of the software package must be confirmed in writing to the licensor Guarantee 5 1 J2 5 3 5 4 9 9 5 6 5 7 5 8 330 Both parties to the contract agree that it is not possible with the current state of technology to develop data processing programs in such a way that they are perfectly suitable for all applications However the licensor guarantees that the software is suitable for the usage described in the user guide The licensor accepts no liability that the software product meets the requ
316. ks are initially arranged hierarchically in the event list in the lower section of the Transmitter archive 38 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 29 November 2005 00 00 00 Bi Ed Edo PP tte hibit ibibnp 23 59 59 e e00e00 0 2 _spewvinns Tion ok 80 787 E 1 Camera 1 z EF Transaction data Continuous recording Event recording Curent event a 2005 EE November B Fs 29 11 2005 16 00 00 Fr 16 30 05 Aa 16 29 38 Fe 16 29 22 Gj 2 Camera 2 Continuous recording Hj 3 Camera 3 Continuous recording Gj 4 Camera 4 Continuous recording Gi 5 Camera 5 Continuous recording The camera track node with camera number and name branches into the various levels of the data and image recording The transaction data nodes indicate that POS data have been recorded for the camera track in question via a POS adapter A separate dialogue box opens to access this information See Accessing POS data on page 40 This node indicates image continuous recording for the camera track in question see Accessing continuous recordings on page 39 This node identifies event based image recording The events in recordings of this kind are broken down further according to year month date time and event type see Accessing event recordings on page 40 Please note that devices in the CamDisc SVR series c
317. l CamDisc svr IP PTZ Ses Demo Kiel CamTel evr IP After you have dialled a group for example Demonstration Kiel IP you will see an additional window to the selection of all accessible cameras in the group 27769 02 105 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis First dial of a group Demo Kiel CamDisc swr IP PIA Lome kanela rel j Static Camera Kiel Demo Kiel CamTel swr IF When dialling this group for the first time this list of cameras is still incomplete First only the camera names of the dialled transmitters here Demo Kiel CamDisc SVR IP PTZ are displayed In order to dial another transmitter of this group please double click on the respective transmitter name here Demo Kiel CamTel SVR IP After a successful change the list is supplemented by the camera name of the transmitter To have a complete camera list after creating a new group all subordinated transmitters should initially be dialled once Note A complete camera list is also necessary for the smooth function of the grouping in the event of an alarm see Important information about the camera window on page 107 View modes of the camera list Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP Test pattern The title page of the window will always inform you of the name of the currently dialled transmitter A colour change between light grey and dark grey within the camera list will group the cameras by transmitters in the respective order In the alp
318. l LEDs depending on the device type V1 V2 V4 V10 The device remains in this mode for as long as Aux in2 is activated e If activation is interrupted via Aux in2 the HDD is reactivated and recording is restarted in accordance with the device programming Independently of Aux in2 the HDD remains for at least 10 seconds in standby mode In this state the device can be safely powered down without this hindering the functionality of the HDD Switching off the video Switch off the video system before removing or replacing the HDD When the HDD is in standby mode neither video data nor audio data where applicable is recorded Nor are any logfile entries written Additional functions of your video system will also be deactivated while the HDD is inactive such as for example the set up of alarm and receiver connections 182 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Safely powering down Cam4mobile Revision 5 or higher via the internal circuit Internal connection of Timer input and Aux in2 Internal connection of Timer input and Aux in2 12 24 VDC Main Timer 1l 1l For Cam4mobile devices of revision 5 or higher See serial number sticker at the top of the device or on the HDD insertion Timer input and Aux in2 are internally connected For these devices the adjacent wiring of the Timer input in accordance with the product guide is strongly recommended Only use of the timer specific to
319. l device does not receive any such images the message No video available will be displayed 26 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Possible causes are indicated in the section on how to configure the IP camera see No image from IP camera on page 245 Note The number of camera buttons varies according to the number of video inputs that the various transmitter types have Activity messages from cameras If you have connected the corresponding transmitter inputs with camera control inputs and programmed the transmitter accordingly the button labels change colour red and black according to the status of the connected inputs In such a way it is easy to localise activities to the relevant inputs see Camera control inputs on page 167 Activity messages from cameras in the multi image display In all multi image displays Quadscreen Ten Camera Group the video image from a camera for which the associated incoming camera message has been triggered is enclosed in a red frame In Mainscreen or Zoom mode the message is signalled as previously using a change in the font colour on the corresponding camera button KTRALIS BUILDING Xtralis Building Xtralis Parking Note No signalling is given if the corresponding camera is not switched on in the Quadscreen or Camera Group mode Acoustic message and automatic camera switching It is possible both to signal this change acoustic
320. l image transmission system dials the telephone number IP address saved under Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 The connection will not be closed if the existing transmission media do not match the registered numbers or addresses or if dialling is only possible by null modem connection If you do not want this automatic disconnection for special receiver PCs e g PCs in a security centre automatic termination can be deactivated for these computers in the CAMCTRL INI configuration file Further information on changing the AUTODISCONNECT entry can be found in the relevant section see Auto disconnect on alarm on page 259 You can also prevent specific users from configuring automatic termination in the device s user management see User on page 123 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Release access for PTZ Relay Audio after n If several users are connected to a HeiTel device at the same time the functions for controlling PTZ audio and relay are passed on after a variable period of time If unused functions are released after 60 seconds for example then these user rights are passed on 60 seconds after the previous user stopped using them The time each user dialled in determines the order of priority in the first instance In such a way the user who dialled into the digital transmission system first is authorised to use PTZ audio and relay functions
321. l modem cable connect your digital image transmission system to an available COM port on your PC and switch on your transmitter Configuration e Start CamControl PRO Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens In the Options list click one of the connection channels for example Port A Deactivate the TCP IP option if necessary From the drop down list in the Modem group select Mode Normal From the Port drop down list select the COM port to which you connected the transmitter From the Baud drop down list select the same serial transmission speed set on your transmission device default on reset factory setting usually 115200 Baud e Thenclick OK 12 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Establishing a connection e Click the Port A button to use the main panel A direct connection is now established to the transmitter via the null modem cable Online e Once the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 2 Dial up connection with modem or external ISDN TA quick start Connection Preparation e Connect the modem or the ISDN TA to an available COM port on your PC and turn on the device Exit all programs that may be using your modem or the IDSN TA also fax programs Configuration e Start CamControl PRO and click Setup The Receiver options dialog box opens In the Options list click one of the
322. l speed The display of the dialogue box is compulsory when evaluating archive images with valid GPS data Exiting the Site Archive To exit the Site Archive click Live forthe active transmitter in the main panel or close the Transmitter archive dialogue box in question If the associated dialogue boxes for accessing transaction data are also open then these are closed as well 46 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 4 6 2 Accessing the transmitter logfile Transmitters with an integrated removable hard disk such as the CamDisc SVR devices log all important events in the transmitter logfile Any errors that occur e g No video signal on input 01 as well as the reaching of critical operating statuses e g the complete utilisation of the hard drive with active overwrite protection are recorded in this file You will find an overview of the logfile entries in a separate section of this guide see Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series on page 285 Error relay CamDisc SVR transmitters report critical operating statuses via the integrated error relay CamControl PRO signals this status by means of a red error relay LED see Error relay on page 28 In this case be sure to check the transmitter logfile in order make certain that the transmitter is operational Logfile Transmitter logfile CambDisc syvri0 1 l 29 08 2005 15 04 58 Logim
323. l video system approximately every three seconds and is also recorded with the image data where necessary In the case of a live image connection the video system transfers the GPS data to the CamControl PRO software at the same rate When the Site Archive or the PC Archives are accessed alternate window titles arise e Site Archive GPS Site Archive see Accessing GPS data on page 46 e PC Archives GPS Archive see Accessing GPS data on page 74 e GPS data and speed The GPS position data is specified in the form geographical latitude geographical longitude For the current speed you can choose between three units of measure via toggle switch e km h Kilometres per hour e mph Miles per hour e kn Knots Sea miles or nautical miles per hour Note The accuracy of GPS data is always limited Even with a static location the position data can still therefore vary and a speed in excess of zero be displayed A revolving globe signals that valid GPS data records are being received If GPS reception is disturbed the GPS signal is not sufficiently strong or the connection to the GPS receiver is interrupted the globe will stop revolving after approximately 30 seconds without valid GPS data The font colour for position and speed changes from green to red and instead of valid position data the following warning is displayed GPS Live 2009 03 17 12 37 32 GPS warming W NMEA 0183 GPRMC e 0 5 mph rs For tem
324. larm panel page 218 you can access an overview of the used IP Ports via the button positioned after the port address If possible conflicts arise when entering a port address manually the colour of the question mark symbol changes to red Calling up the overview displays the overlapping port addresses in red See Overview with notification of possible conflicts on page 253 Overview of used IP Ports This overview shows the port addresses set for the functions and their usage status Overview of used IP Ports x Function Port In use Network TCP IP 3000 Web Server 80 Yes POS A amp TM IBIS Adapter 5000 Yes HT connect 3333 No Alarm panel 6666 Yes Overview with notification of possible conflicts In the event of possible conflicts with regard to duplicated use of port addresses these are displayed in red in the overview Overview of used IP Ports x Function Port In use Network TCP IP 3000 Yes Web Server 80 Yes POS ATM IBIS Adapter 6666 Yes HT connect 3333 No Alarm panel 6666 Yes 8 2 Program parameters CAMCTRL INI Settings for your CamControl PRO software are specified and saved in the CAMCTRL INI configuration file You can and may change certain settings to customise the software in line with your needs Note Do not make any configuration changes unless you are certain of the effect they will have on the software 27769 02 253 CamCo
325. lay size selected for the CamControl PRO program window and the image quality selected the slider is supplemented on the left hand side by an up down control This up down control for adjusting the image size is only provided for the normal view in connection with images displayed in an enlarged size You can use this control to vary the display size of the live images The images can be reduced in size down to the original size such as 128 x 80 pixels at lowest image quality These settings are stored separately for the respective image quality and are retained even after ending the program 24 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual CAMDISC HNUR DEMO i mal Pale yy o1 4 10 21 14 56 54 006 ay PVA Om xs F gt ae PTZ Camera Js Xtralis Building Xtralis Parking PTZ IP cam backyard reseces a Adjusting the image display for IP cameras Since the images from IP cameras can be of different resolutions the live images transferred are inserted into the intended place according to the view selected Depending on the resolution of the IP camera used the image is either compressed or stretched out whilst retaining the proportions j i i y PAY i Parking Space 2 Building Front Parking Space 1 Parking Space 2 Dewarping Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Video 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden E AXIS 35 99 Garden W If necessary use to display the image in its original size Click on this button
326. le and disable the alarm panel functionality If alarm panel functionality is enabled you can define a port number for communication with your alarm panel Note When setting the parameters for the alarm panel you may need to enter the port address corresponding to the HeiTel device both for the local and the target port Example HeiTel device Alarm panel IP port for alarm panel Local IP port Target IP port 6666 6666 6666 Port 65535 cannot be used for alarm panel addressing Entering this value disables alarm panel functionality For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl PRO press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page 253 ae 218 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis Synchronise device time with alarm panel CamControl PRO Software Manual When the Synchronise device time with alarm panel option is enabled the device time is synchronised with the time transferred from the alarm panel When this option is enabled the device requests the time for synchronisation from the alarm panel at 6 hour intervals Note If time synchronisation can take place via alarm panel or IBIS the internal automatic summer winter time changeover is not carried out see Summer time settings on page 126 7 19 1 Messages to be sent Via Messages to be sent your HeiTel device communicates with an alarm system to which your Hei Tel device sends messages Individual alarms are selected from a list of possi
327. lis If the Setup button is deactivated Setup after you establish a connection to the transmitter there are two possible reasons 1 You are not the first user connected to the transmitter at this time At least one other user authorised to change transmitter setup has logged onto the transmitter before you 2 You are not authorised to change transmitter setup Transmitter access protection User Management allows you to protect the transmitter from unauthorised access see User on page 123 For users without permission to modify setup the Setup button remains deactivated and no modifications can be made Automatic logon to transmitter Transmitter specific User Management is not the same as User Management in Receiver options see User on page 80 Users with identities in both management systems do not have to log on with user name and password when dialling into a transmitter Logon is automatic Selection The Recorder settings dialogue box provides you with a menu overview of all available settings on the left hand side of the window Please note that when you open a node more configuration levels will be shown e Device Firmware version serial number MAC address and device number page 122 e User Transmitter user management page 123 e Date amp Time Synchronisation of recorder time winter summer time time zone configuration and adding holidays page 126 e Connections Configuration of connections via
328. ll not been updated Note The walk test might be protected by the device user and password Since there are some restrictions please refer to the firmware release notes for details PIR list This column contains the numbers 1 to 20 Each representing one PIR and the address that the PIR must use within the RS485 PIR protocol In this column one single PIR can be activated or deactivated While deactivated the columns Name Presence POR State are still updated Yet there will be nor alarming This column will contain the name or type of the PIR Presence This column will indicate if a PIR is still connected and accessible If a PIR is not present anymore it will disappear from the list after pressing lt Discover PIR gt or sending the settings to the device Time outs Shows the number of PIR answers not coming in time Packet errors Shows the number of checksum errors of a PIR FIR state Shows the actual PIR state By clicking lt i gt a full text window for the marked PIR is shown wak test This LED signalizes when a third party application iPIR is executing a walk test Green walk test is executed Grey no walk test is executed no 2 7 69 _02 249 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis C Configuration Green LED means all discovered PIR are enabled Yellow LED signalizes when a discovered PIR is not enabled T This button starts discovering of PIR connected to the device Normally this i
329. llowing devices that comply with the following serial numbers e CamDisc HNVR 10 device serial number NV206xxx or higher e CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s device serial number WS206xxx and WV206xxx or higher e CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 device serial number WC211xxx and WD206xxx or higher Driver installation in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 The USB driver for SVR s devices is essentially installed in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 in the same way as the installation described in chapter of VG series page 301 Driver installation in Windows 7 The USB driver for SVR s devices is essentially installed in Windows 7 in the same way as the installation described in chapter of VG series page 301 27769 02 299 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Driver installation in Windows Vista Depended from firmware and software version you are requested to install an USB driver after having plugged in the USB cable Follow the instructions in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 295 Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions A reconnection of the USB cable might be necessary after having run the driver installation manually Driver installation in Windows XP Depended from firmware and software version you
330. llscreen image regardless of the parameters set for the conditional refresh mode Image size and format depend on the IP camera 7 13 2 Archive passwords Open the Passwords tab from the menu under the Site Archive node This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices You can protect the image archive against unauthorised access with one or two passwords These passwords must be entered before the archive can be accessed locally or via a remote connection 27769 02 177 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Recorder settings i x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Device User Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms B Site archive Video settings Password 1 Password 2 Current password Current password New password New password HDD H POS 4TM Audio Track settings Confirm password Confirm password E Video 7 in E Video 2 in Video 3 in E Video 4 in Wideo 5 in OK Cancel Site archive state Help Current password An existing password must be entered in the Current password box If you enter an incorrect password an appropriate message will be displayed when you click OK Re enter the password in the Current password box g Curent password Is
331. location target directory for saving the files listed above ey 4 ALWAYSONTOP Keep the program window on top at all times OLUMNS CAL 256 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 8 2 4 Configuration file with modifiable keys The following sample INI file gives you an overview of the keys what they mean and their values Only the keys that may be changed are shown here If you change any of the other keys in CAMCTRL INI that are not listed here you may significantly impair the proper operation of the receiver software The text after the semicolon explains the meaning of the key 8 2 4 1 TCP IP TCP_IP Port number PORT 3000 Port number e Range 0 65535 It may be necessary to change the standard port number if you wish to set up more than one receiver computer for the same transmitter or transmitters at a single IP address using a router or if port 3000 is already in use in your network or cannot be used Please note than not all port numbers can be used depending on the system Contact your network administrator for assistance in defining an appropriate port number Make sure that the port number of your transmitter matches the number configured in the receiver software Fast mode FAS TMODE 1 FASTMODE operating mode Range O off 1 o0n default When FASTMODE is deactivated images are requested less frequently to reduce the image transmission rate This reduces the response time and can s
332. locations and Include this location in the search Found New Hardware Wizard f Please choose your search and installation options Na ta Y MPlesssssssssssessssessssssssssesesssssesssessssssssesssssssessssssssssesssssessssssssesesssssesessesn Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM V Include this location in the search es Browse C Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware coca Open another Windows dialogue box with Browse Step 5 From the Browse for Folder box select the subdirectory Drivers which is located in the installation directory of your CamControl LITE software Browse For Folder Select the Folder that contains drivers For your hardware Desktop i B My Documents S Y My Computer Se Hitachi 320GB C O Arthurs films O BJFrinter 4 O CamControl My B CCImages S ccute dudioTracks B CasCam D CBLOG de DeviceUpdates O HELPFILES To view any subfolders click a plus sign above Confirm your selection with OK 2 169_02 297 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Step 6 The previously selected subdirectory is now ent
333. ly presets 1 to 16 on the IP camera can be selected 241 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Video format Video format JPEG For certain camera models the Video format function is activated If necessary you can choose between the formats JPEG and MJPEG via a drop down list e JPEG The video format JPEG complies with the standard image requirements by HeiTel video systems This video format is generally used when the drop down list is deactivated and displayed in grey The IP camera Samsung SNB 5000 which can only use the MJPEG image format as standard is currently an exception MJPEG With the video format MJPEG you select the manufacturerspecific MJPEG streaming mode Please observe the documents accompanying your IP camera if necessary Note If suspected interruptions in the image flow should occur with the video format MJPEG switch back to the alternative video format JPEG if necessary This behaviour can particularly occur with larger images or high image rates Devices of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series are generally not affected For devices of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series video format H264 is also available for specific manufacturers Videoformat e H264 Select the appropriate video compression for video format H264 If necessary consult the documentation for your IP camera accompanying the product Motion Server Port With the Motion Server port you set the IP po
334. m Status Initialise modem If you are using modems or ISDN TAs to transmit images these are initialised one after the other on program start The AT command entered in the Init prefix field in the Receiver options for the port in question e g Port A is used see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 This procedure is shown in the corresponding dialogue box If errors occur the dialogue box remains visible for an extended period of time and displays the error message of the terminal device 4 3 The Program Interface The program interface of CamControl PRO is divided into several functionally distinct sections This makes working with the software as simple and intuitive as possible m9 e3 2035 13 08 50 10 Setup Site Archive Log file 21 12 05 15 44 41 0001 Progran started by demo bbe 21 12 05 1544245 0020 Recenver settings 06 0020 ecet Fiabe 40008 O82 000000 000 1 205 4 3 1 Overview of basic functions The main panel Full transmitter operation In the main panel you can establish a connection to HeiTel transmitters accept alarm calls or perform tours Once a connection to a transmitter has been established all control and display elements for accessing and controlling the transmitter become available CamControl PRO automatically detects the type of transmitter in question and adjusts its functionality and display accordingly 27769 02 17 CamControl PRO Soft
335. m cable is connected unless TCP IP is activated Test the COM port with another device and program e g mouse or modem and Hyper Terminal 27769 _02 317 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at Receiver Possible Causes at PC Remedy PC Receiver The Connection Status 1 dialogue box appears but 2 setup is not loaded Incorrect baud rate Incorrect or defective null modem cable Transmitter is When connecting devices 1 with a hard disk the Connection Status dialogue box appears Setup or Setup HDD is not fully loaded After connection is established the hard drive archive can not be read out 9 5 switched off not in factory setting or defective Null modem is connected when device is switched on Hard disk can not be addressed Hard disk is not entirely formatted device has been switched off too soon Receiver settings Port A to D Set Mode to normal For CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR devices enter a baud rate of 115200 the device detects the baud rate automatically auto baud rate detection Check the transmitter use the transmitter manual Test the COM port with another device and program e g mouse or modem and Hyper Terminal Switch the transmitter off for a short period and switch it back on after connecting all cables correctly Remove the hard disk from the unit when switched off check and or clean the contact str
336. m connection to receiver with telephone no no x AR y number IP address indicated in filed x could not be established Field y indicates the alarm reason AR Possible values for y General nonspecific alarm Control input camera 1 10 Sabotage alarm general alarm input Sabotage alarm enable disable status input Sabotage alarm sabotage status input General alarm Panic alarm Tamper Device reboot Power on Motion alarm camera 1 10 Video loss camera 1 10 Alarm released by serial command camera 1 10 Fault interruption in dedicated line H Tconnect Camera position authentication camera 1 10 Alarm panel triggered alarm camera 1 10 Tamper alarm camera 1 10 D amp T Caller x y Caller indicates the login order of the last login yes no O one 1 two etc Field x and field y indicates telephone number IP address This entry is not generated for null modem connections 27769 _02 287 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis D amp T Service Call x The device triggered a service call to the no no telephone number IP Address in field x D amp T Login u v w ly z D amp T Logout w y z 288 The user indicated in field u established a temperature no connection to the device in the login order indicated in field w O one 1 two etc Depending on connection mode and con
337. mDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series on page 285 In addition you can use the Filter Time window Search Print and Clipboard menus under logfile to influence various functions and views left hand value always shows the number of events that are currently displayed A On the right underneath the events there are two numbers U3 Us that provide information about the number of events in the format currently displayed events total number of events stored in the logfile If the number of events is reduced by the Filter and or Time window the Filtering the logfile When the logfile information is written the individual events are always divided into categories Error Action or Information 48 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard x Error Fo M Action o M Infomation If the three options Error Action and Information are enabled the logfile is displayed without any restrictions You can reduce the scope of the displayed results by disabling individual categories Another option for restricting the scope of the logfile is the time window Logfile time window While filtering see Filtering the logfile on page 48 restricts the number of displayed results by category you can also limit the timeframe using the Time window options By default the Select all option is enabled Fiter Time window Search P
338. m_ list pdf The Select menu shown alongside may also appear using which you may retrieve the locally stored compatibility list or download a version from the Internet that may be more up to date An installed PDF viewer such as Adobe Reader is required to display these files 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Extended configuration dialogue Configure User name Password Number of Presets 27769 02 x AXIS 214 User demo Password Number of Presets Video format 4 JPEG Sa Configurate with Browser OK Cancel Click the Configure button to open a dialogue box of the same name If you have protected access to image data on your IP camera using User name and Password you can store this access data in the HeiTel device via the Configure dialogue Depending on the IP camera used programming of the User name and Password may be obligatory for transmitting images to the HeiTel video system In some circumstances this also applies for PTZ control of IP cameras Note Please refer to the documentation for the IP camera concerned in each case Camera 6 For certain camera models the Number of Presets function is activated Using a drop down menu you can select the number of the command buttons for a camera specific button panel between 1 and 16 and Off if necessary e Illustrative button panel for selecting any one of 4 presets for Camera 6 e On
339. matically or Accept call and automatic operation you can activate visual and acoustic notification of incoming calls by selecting Warning signal If you have a sound card the file ALERT WAV in the program directory of the receiver software is played You can replace it with a file of your own If ALERT WAV has been deleted or the receiver PC does not have a sound card short warning signals are emitted by the PC loudspeaker as acoustic notification 27769 02 79 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Confirm alarm 6 2 User User Management provides you with a simple way of controlling how CamControl PRO is used All users must identify themselves with their name and password on program start and program end The names of the users are logged in the event tree You can differentiate between simple operating personnel and system operators with access to all settings Receiver options m User list Mayor Delete user Password m V System access Options Modify transmitter index New user Deleting a user Click Delete user to delete the user selected in the User list from User Management Password In the Password field you can enter a password for the user selected in the User list The password may contain a maximum of 10 characters Note If using HeiTel video systems internationally refrain where necessary from using country specific special characters for user name an
340. med in green and the post alarm images are framed in yellow Time nodes a le Calendar node Branches into the underlying time levels year month day OQ o Hour node Branches to the events Event types Accessing POS data EF Another node in the tree structure of the event list indicates the availability of transaction data Click the button in front of the transaction data node to open a dialogue box in which you can access these data Every camera track with transaction data has its own node and therefore its own access dialogue box Control Elements The transaction data dialogue box has the following control elements First oldest receipt Previous receipt o m Last most recent receipt CamControl PRO provides you with two ways of accessing recorded transaction data The Transaction data of camera X dialogue box where X stands for the camera track in question and varies between 1 and 2 1 and 4 or 1 and 10 depending on the video system being used has two search modes Date amp time search and the Text amp price search 40 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Simple Date amp time search 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual Transaction data of camera 1 x Transaction data EF 22 12 05 16 51 Order 0080 Operator 02 Cake 1 79 99 49 Date amp time 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1
341. ment of our proven receiver software With this Windows software up to nine transmissions can be received simultaneously and the images displayed together on a monitor for alarm verification or routine checks ideal for security centres or applications with complex requirements 27769 02 5 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Professional video wall application CamcControl MV allows the display of up to 64 live camera images of corresponding number of HeiTel devices including the evaluation of archived images Control station integration We are consistently developing our product philosophy even further and now also offer the option of integrating our systems into existing control centres in order implement optimal alarm and video management with regard to alarm verification Video control station In the Event Management System EMS HeiTel offers its own autonomous control station solution This client server system with up to 21 operator stations provides you with a high performing alarm management tool featuring dynamic alarm processing and an alarm database This control station solution can be expanded using the products EMS Site Map interactive site map management and EMS TAPI program interface for telephony applications We are pleased that you are interested in our products and hope that we continue to be a valuable partner for you in the future Mobile Application CamControl iPhone and CamControl Android
342. mera before it switches to the next one Cam4mobile and SVR device control input The digital image transmission systems in the Cam4mobile SVR and VG series have a terminal block on the rear with a control input labelled V out Pin 8 You can control video output V out with this input as follows e The control input is permanently closed switched to ground Sequencer mode is suspended and the current camera remains switched to the output Sequencer mode is resumed 10 seconds after the input opens e The control input switches from the open to closed state switched to ground The next camera in the loop 1 2 3 4 is switched to the video output Cameras not activated for sequencer mode are also switched to the output 216 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual In such a way you can activate a particular camera by suspending sequencer mode for a camera by pressing a pushbutton connected to the control input for example The camera remains switched on as long as you are pressing the pushbutton When you release the pushbutton and then press it again the next camera is switched to the output 7 18 0 2 Camera of last alarm Displaying alarm camera If you select Display camera of latest alarm the output is switched to another camera depending on the recording inputs and how they are configured see Event recording 1 2 4 10 on page 196 or See Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 on page 201 Even
343. mmands Delete audio track Similarly to the commands for deleting individual camera tracks See Delete track 1 2 4 10 on page 179 you can also delete audio track data Confirm the changes made to the audio recording parameters by 190 clicking OK Then click OK again to send them to your device 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 13 8 Track settings Open the Track settings tab from the menu under the Site archive tab This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices In this tab you can specify e the operating mode of your device during live transmission and access e the size of your two four or ten hard disk tracks x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Mode Duplex Live image transmission and Recording or Archive evaluation x Track division Track 1 In Track 2 In Track 3 In Track 4 In Track 5 In Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Video settings Passwords HDD E m l POS ATM m T E 34 21 GB 34 21 GB 34 21 GB 34 21 GB 34 21 GB E Audio Track settings Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recordin E Video 2 in o Track Y6 In Track Y7 In Track Y8 In Track 9 In Track 1
344. mobile or CamServer devices The image is saved in the directory C CAMCONTROL PRO SNAPSHOT or YOUR_DRIVE YOUR __ PROGARMNAME SNAPSHOT by default You can change this location by modifying the SNAPSHOTPATH key SNAPSHOTPATH YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_DIRECTORY Note Please note that the disk drive designation must be included in the directory path If the drive is not included or if the directory path is invalid the images may not be saved under certain circumstances 8 2 4 4 Extra EXTRA Auto disconnect on AUTODISCONNECT 0 Automatic disconnection on alarm alarm e Range O off 1 o0n default e Fordevices you can specify under Recorder settings Extras Extra see Extra on page 226 that a open connection dialled by a receiver be automatically disconnected in the event of an alarm and a renewed alarm call made To do this select Hang up and redial on alarm If you do not want this automatic disconnection to take place for special receiver PCs e g PCs ina security centre you can deactivate automatic disconnection specifically for these computers using this key Note The AUTODISCONNECT key only takes effect when it is actually possible to automatically disconnect and place a new alarm call Callback connections hard disk errors 24h routine calls and alarm calls are not disconnected This function is never executed for null modem connections and therefore has no effect on this type of connection 27769 02 259 CamContr
345. more Side panels In the side panels you can establish connections to other transmitters accept alarms and receive image data all at the same time Just one mouse click is all it takes to switch from a side panel to the main panel where you can fully control the active transmitter in question 2 7769 _02 11 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Variable configuration The equivalent connection channels Port A D as well as Port 5 9 can be variably configured for various communication paths The following communication paths are available the physical COM port of the PC null modem modem ISDN TA network cards TCP IP or an ISDN card via virtual COM ports You assign one of the above options to the individual connection paths You can name ports A B C and D as well as 5 to 9 as you wish thus guaranteeing simple secure operation Automatic camera switching If using CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR devices and a transmitter is switched on CamControl PRO can automatically switch to the cameras whose camera inputs are reporting activity This function perfectly demonstrates the flexibility of the HeiTel system made up of inter coordinated hardware and software components Receiver archive A sophisticated storage concept sorts every call according to transmitter name serial number date and time This makes the task of backing up and accessing archived image recordings clear convenient and transparent Every individual
346. moved from your computer e This dialogue box will inform you when the uninstallation process ends End the uninstallation by selecting OK Note In the case of multiple installations on a computer e g CamControl LITE CamControl PRO and CamControl PLAYER each with GPS Data Viewer the most recently installed GPS Data Viewer software can only be uninstalled once For further uninstallations the following procedure must be used 2 7 69 _02 311 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 8 10 2 2 Uninstallation via direct call to the file unins00 exe e Inthe program directory of yourCamControl PRO software locate the uninstallation files uninsO0 exe Here serves as a placeholder for a digit from 0 to 9 e uninsO00 exe This uninstallation routine is associated with the main application here CamControl PRO e uninsO01 exe This uninstallation routine is associated with the first additional application here generally GPS Data Viewer e Select the uninstallation routine for GPS Data Viewer software and start the program e Check the window title for the following security question The title should read GPS Data Viewer Uninstall GPS Data iewer Uninstall x 2 j 4re you sure you want to completely remove GPS Data Viewer and all of its components GPS Data Viewer Uninstall x e GPS Data Viewer was successfully removed From your computer e This dialogue box will inform you when the uninstallation p
347. mplify operation by extending the transmitter name to include the connection window through which the transmitter can be accessed e g Petrol Station X Port C 6 9 1 Dialling into a transmitter Select the transmitter you want to connect to from the transmitter list in the Transmitter index dialogue box Clicking Dial y initiates a call to the selected transmitter Double clicking the desired transmitter entry also initiates dialling If you click the small button to right of the Dial button an additional menu with the 27769 02 97 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis ten last dialled transmitters opens Clicking one of these entries also starts dialling the transmitter in question Demo CamDisc syvrl0 1 IP Demo Cambise svrl0 2 IP PTZ Demo Cambisc svr4 3 IP Demo CamDisc svr4 4 IP Demo Camel svri0 1 IF Demo Camel svri0 2 IP Demo Camel syvr4 3 IP Demo Camel svr4 4 IF Demo Kiel CamBisc swr IP PTZ 10 Demo kiel CamTel swr IF I 2 3 Sho 3 6 T a J Showing reference images If necessary you can enhance the view of the Transmitter index with an overview of reference images This makes it easier to find a specific transmitter when working with a large number of transmitter entries If you want to see the overview of reference images for the transmitter entries click the Show reference images button o This overview will then be displayed on the right of the Transmitter
348. ms due to detection of small objects An object will only generate an alarm if its height is greater than the specified value The value is expressed in metres For detecting humans a typical minimum height is 0 3 metres because the person could be crawling Minimum time To avoid detection of momentary motion e g a bird crossing the scene Minimum distance To avoid detection of small motion e g of the leaves of a tree moved by the wind 7 11 2 Calibration To calibrate the scene click the Calibration button in the Intrusion configuration dialogue window Calibration A Unit of measure Live video Calibration is mandatory as the detection is based on 3D measures Make sure calibration is done carefully at a point near the camera and further away in the detection area Speed and size calculations in the areas closer and further than these points will be less accurate and can lead to false alarms and missed targets there Correct calibration will eliminate many false alarms and allow reliable detection as intended 156 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual First select the desired unit of measure feet or metres and define the actual height of the reference object preferably a person Then you can use a snapshot from live or recorded images to draw the measure of the persons Image A shows the image of the object near the camera Image B shows the image of the same object far from the camera
349. n Windows 7 For the video systems CamDisc HNVR 10 CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2 and CamServer 2c no valid Windows 7 driver is available Open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of yourCamControl PRO software Run the file pl2502win732bit exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions 8 9 3 Installing the USB driver for the VG series The USB direct connection requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 12 MBit s The USB direct connection rate with a CamDisc VG HNVR offers a maximum nominal transfer rate of 480 MBit s This function can be used with the following devices of VG series with firmware version 4 02 or higher e CamDisc VG HNVR serial number VNxxxxx e CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4s and CamDisc VG 10s Serial number STXxxxxx SFxxxxxx und SXXXXXXX e CamDisc VG 4 and CamDisc VG 10 serial number VFxxxxxx und VXxxxxxx e CamServer VG 2c 4c and CamDisc VG 2c 4c serial number CCxxxxxx und DCxxxxxx e CamTel VG 4 and CamTel VG 10 serial number CFxxxxxx und CXxxxxxx e Cam4mobile VG 2c 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 and Cam4mobile VG 10s serial number MCxxxxxx MFxxxxxx and MXxxxxxx Driver installation in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 Step 1 Turn on the VG device also applies to SVR SVR s HNVR devices and plug the USB cabl
350. n an IP address IP address Subnet mask HeiTel by Xtralis With the function Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP the automatically DHCP transmitter receives the option of obtaining an IP address dynamically from a DHCP server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Within the network where the configured transmitter is used the respective service must be available By activating this function the settings for IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway are deactivated and displayed in grey To have changes of this option become effective you must confirm twice by clicking OK Thereafter close the connection When changing the IP address settings the device will restart Enter an available IP address or an IP address allocated to you by your internet service provider in the IP address box factory setting 192 168 31 95 Your digital image transmission system can be dialled at this address Check this address with your network administrator to ensure that it is and will remain a unique address within the network If you are planning a new local network user addresses should be in the address range from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 255 254 the standard range for private network addresses The range could be 192 168 31 1 to 192 168 31 254 for a network covering 254 addresses for example If your network is connected to the Internet via router by dedicated or dial up line or if it is part of your company intranet enter the subn
351. n overview of the IP ports used by CamControl PRO press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page 253 come Note Requirements for communication between the CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer or CamDisc SVR device and the respective POS ATM Adapters is that the devices are in the same IP address range e g 192 168 31 x and that the IP port of the POS ATM Adapter corresponds with this value for the destination This IP address including the port address is programmed on the POS ATM Adapter as Target Recorder After changing the IP port your CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer or CamDisc SVR device will restart The following table lists all POS ATM Adapters currently connected to your recorder with the following data e Name amp Version Device name version status and serial number are displayed e P address The IP address is displayed This IP address including the port address is programmed on the POS ATM Adapter as Source POS Adapter e Type The adapter type is currently distinguished between POS and ATM The following number in brackets provides details on whether it is a POS ATM Adapter with one channel 1 or with four channels 4 7 13 7 Audio recording Open the Audio tab from the menu under the Site Archive node This menu item is only available for Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series
352. names the selected relay can be connected The switching of the relay controlled via alarm panel messages fails if a fixed function such as Closed while alarm enabled Closed while alarm Closed while recording Closed while connected or Closed on error was assigned to the relay In the Trigger event column choose between On and Off standard setting If the On option is activated then event controlled recording of video images takes place according to the programming for the respective camera track in the Site Archive For CamTel SVR CamTel VG series devices this function is not available due to the absence of a hard drive 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 20 Logfile Starting with CamControl PRO Software V4 12 the Logfile dialog box includes a menu for logfile functions J7 nderung der Eing nge E nur loqgen wenn Gerat scharfaeschaltet JV Temperatur Videosignalausfall I Logfile l schen Digital image transmission systems equipped with hard disks log all important events in a transmitter logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 For CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices among others you can configure settings so that certain parameters are saved in this logfile All video systems of the VG Series have a battery buffered logfile which stores logged events independent of a hard disk or other storage medium Logfile L
353. nd display time of reference images REFIMAGEHEIGH REFIMAGETIME HTCONNECTSVR HTCONNECTSVRPORT HTCONNECTOWNPORT HTconnect UDP source port HTCONNECTTARGETPORT HTconnect UDP target port RESERVEDALARMPORTS Minimum number of reserved ports for alarm connection FIMAGEMODE FIMAGES ONLINEMOTION ON ONLINEMOTIONCAM JOYSTICK Activate HTconnect Server HT connect connection port Deactivation Activation of the Image Viewer Number of images for the Image Viewer sequence Configuring online motion detection Selecting cameras for online motion detection Deactivation Activation of the PTZ control via one or two USB joysticks REDFRAME Indication of active camera alarm inputs in multi views only for an armed video system IPCAMSIZE Determination of upper limits for the display of live images from IP cameras IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT Extended function for optimised display of PAL and NTSC cameras DYNAMICPTZSPEED Disabling enabling dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras CBLOG ENABLED Save the transmitter logfile 27769 02 25 O1 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Section pey peston oO ONLINESCR MODE CAMO Specify the initial view SMRESOLUTION Adjust the picture size at 128 x 80 resolution DEQUMODE Adjust the image quality for quadscreen or 10 screen viewing mode K TMESYNC hw MIDTE moo Reselavdiomodetocessioview PATH LO Define the saving of logfiles and certain INI files locally or globally REMOTEPATH Global storage
354. nd recording types in the calendar in this tab Note Recording is not possible without the corresponding timer setting 194 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Weekly calendar Holidays Copy and insert Copy to all timers CamControl PRO Software Manual One field corresponds to a time slot of 30 minutes Use the mouse to set times Left click or right click and hold to activate deactivate or change the recording mode for the time slot in question This depends on the current selection settings e Continuous recording blue e Event recording red e Norecording grey The display field immediately below the weekly calendar displays the time of the time slot currently being pointed to by the mouse This helps orientation Timer operating mode provides two independent sets of holiday rules in line with the two holiday types See Date and time on page 126 The rows Type 1 and Type 2 in the weekly calendar represent these two holiday types Each camera track can therefore accommodate time controlled recordings for two sets of holidays For example assigning national holidays to Type 1 and company specific holidays to Type 2 allows you to define individual and separate recording times for each group Clicking Copy allows you to conveniently copy weekly profiles to other camera tracks To apply the profile click Insert in the associated Video X in tab Clicking Copy to all timers inserts the weekly profile of the c
355. nder the Alarm node This tab is not available if you are using CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices Continue reading from the next section see Camera control inputs on page 167 CamTel VG and CamTel SVR transmitters have their own pre alarm archives As long as there is no connection established to a receiver the transmitter unit continuously stores video images in this archive The oldest images are continuously overwritten Once a connection is established recording stops The pre alarm image archive now contains video images that were recorded just before the connection and therefore just before an alarm see Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG on page 52 Alarm inputs Pre alarm RAM Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication Date amp Time Camera name Enabled Interval s El Connec tions Camera settings 1 Camera 1 Iv 1 eel Camera groups Motion detection zones r Privacy zones 2 Camera 2 m Ez 3 Camera 3 Iv fi Motion detection 4 Camera 4 Iv f Video loss Camera position authen anf Audio 5 Camera 5 Iv 2 Relays PTZ control 6 Camera amp v 2 Serial channel i i Video out 7 Camera 7 v 2 A 8 Camera 8 Iv 2 ican Cancel 9 Camera 9 Iv 2 im 10 Camera 10 IV 2 as No pre ala
356. necting a latch momentary motion detector or similar device to one of the image recording inputs If the control input is unswitched i e open and if this contact status has been configured as Recording mode Trigger Permanent this corresponds to easy mode continuous recording see Easy mode on Operating modes of the image recording inputs The recording behaviour of the different input states can be defined using the drop down list Closed Opening Edge Open Closing Edge 27769 02 203 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Permanent z The device ignores the state or state change of the image recording input This camera does not record any images If you set all switch states Closed Open Opening Edge Closing Edge to Off image recording is completely deactivated for the camera in question Permanent and On Permanent means the device detects the state of this input Closed or Open while On means that it detects a state change Opening Edge or Closing Edge Depending on the values in Recording interval s and Number of images video images are recorded by the associated camera The integrated software motion detector can be activated for input states Closed or Open Recording takes place if the device detects the relevant input state and motion in the video image Define recording details in the Recording Interval s and Number of images boxes The integrated so
357. net LCD M e Prefix 1 ATDI force ISDN connection e Prefix 2 ATDN force analogue connection 27769 02 91 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 7 Serial Channel The transparent serial channel provides a simple way to transfer any kind of data between receiver PC and transmitter during image transmission e g control of pan tilt cameras Transmitter with transparent data interface Device with RS 237 remote control interface RS 23 Device with RS 232 remote _ control interface R amp S 232 e g remote adapter eg operator console tere ISDN analogue LAN nam 1 i 1 oi M O A AO G a E 1 l E 1 l T C PA P In order to be able to use the transparent channel you must be using a transmitter with an additional external interface such as CamDisc SVR or CamTel SVR see Serial channel on page 212 m External serial channel Mode 8 N71 x Select On to activate the serial channel on the PC From the Port drop down list select an available COM interface for the transparent channel Select an appropriate transmission speed Refer to the manufacturer s specifications of the external device that you want to connect You can choose from a variety of transmission data formats Transmission data format 8 N 1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 8 N 2 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 8 E 1 8 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 8 O 1 8 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit
358. ng configuration menus Alarm inputs Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication and for CamTel VG and CamTel SVR devices only Pre alarm In the case of CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 only the Alarm inputs Camera control in put and Video loss dialogues are available El Alarms Alarm inputs Pre alarm a Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication 7 12 1 Alarm inputs Open the Alarm inputs tab from the menu under the Alarms node The digital image transmission systems are equipped with several inputs that can carry out various control and notification functions In addition to the camera control inputs described in Camera control inputs See Camera control inputs on page 167 every transmitter is equipped with e analarm enable input e analarm input and e atamper input All of which you can configure in this dialogue window Alarm inputs Pre alarm Site Archive Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position aut_4 gt wm User Arm Disarm input Date amp Time t Connections Camera settings Triggered by input Motion _ _Normally opened sss Peas wN ll d v Privacy zones lV _ Normally opene Alarms Alarm inputs Pre alarm Alarm input Camera control inputs iV Triggered manually or by software Motion detection Video loss iV Connect N
359. ng entries are possible in the SERVICE EXTRA and GPS sections SERVICE SERVICE This entry identifies the configuration section within the file Language setting LANGUAGE Selected language Example LANGUAGE GERMAN Write protection READONLY Open archives with or without write protection Examples READONLY 1 open with write protection READONLY 0 open without write protection Positioning and window size TOP y position of the top left corner of the program window on program start in pixels Example TOP 50 LEFT x position of the top left corner of the main panel on program start in pixels Example LEFT 50 WIDTH Width of the program window on program start in pixels Example WIDTH 1024 HEIGHT Height of the program window on program start in pixels Example HEIGHT 740 Password protecting the DELETE Delete CamControl PRO receiver archives No delete function receiver archives can be deleted if this entry is not present Examples DELETE YES Delete receiver archives DELETE TEST Delete only with password TEST Playback speed Set the playback speed 0 1 image sec 1 5 images sec 2 10 images sec 3 15 images sec 4 20 images sec 5 25 images sec 6 Max images sec Storage directory for SAVEPICPATHE Specification of a directory for the storage of individual images individual images Example SAVEPICPATH C PICTURES 27769 02 283 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis S
360. nition of partition sizes for event and continuous recording depending on total track size e Combined continuous and event recording see Combined continuous and event recording on page 193 e Specifying timer operation see Timer operation on page 194 for event and continuous recording e Saving preview images for optimised site archive access e Overwrite protection for stored images e Reporting underflow e Deleting any images older than a definable date Recorder settings ee x Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Video settings Passwords Event partion and continuous partition Continuous partition size gt lt Event partition size 27 37 GB 6 84 GB E Event recording always enabled __ 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 o7 08 09 10 17 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Sun HDD POS ATM IBIS Audio Track settings Video Tin Event recording 1 Continuous recordin Video 2 in 16 30h Copy Insert C No recording Copy to all timer OK Diverse Cancel Record preview images 5 ae M Overwrite protection Warning at f0 ea ite archive state Report period less than 30 a days Help 7 Delete all pictu
361. nly via a connected IBIS Adapter with appropriate configuration of the serial interface Another node in the tree structure of the event list indicates the availability of IBIS data Click the button in front of the IBIS data node to open a dialogue box in which you can access these data Only Camera track 1 with IBIS data has its own node and therefore its own access dialogue The IBIS data dialogue box offers the same buttons as operating elements as are found in the Transaction data see Control Elements on page 40 dialogue box CamControl PRO provides you with two ways of accessing recorded IBIS data On the IBIS data dialogue box 1 the search options Date amp time search and Text amp price search are offered Simple Date amp IBIS data 1 i Type IBIS aata time search IBIS dat Date Time Wagon number Line Course Station DAMPERHOF STRASSE 3g 080090 Text amp price search Date amp time search Date 03 12 2008 x Time 11 23 14 Syncronization Update picture from data C Update data from picture Enter the Date of the search or select it using the calendar function You can enter the Time of the search start in hours minutes and seconds using the buttons next to the time input box or using the keyboard Click Search to start the search The first sales receipt recorded after the specified search start is returned If there are no sales receipts after this specified time the
362. nnection in the main panel click Hang up If at least one transmitter is active then clicking Close once ends all connections both in the main panel and in the side panels Hang up 4 5 Software screen displays The following section describes major functions views and display variations available during an active connection 4 5 1 The main panel The details of this view on your screen may vary from the one illustrated depending on the transmitter model in use 27769 02 23 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis i CamControl PRO 3 xx CamDisc syri0 1 Hang up View Setup Site Archive Log file Offline Offline ee TS E Error relay Relay 1 g Device armed 21 12 05 15 44 41 0001 Program started by demo HeiT el Digital Video GmbH AE 21 12 05 15 44 45 0020 Receiver settings Sobran 25 PC Archive 2 21 12 05 15 46 06 0020 Receiver settings EMONSA Image quality Offline You can adjust the quality of transmitted images in line with your requirements using the slider Select a lower image quality for a higher refresh rate If you need high detail definition then select a correspondingly higher image quality Image quality is configured separately for each camera Once a connection has been established the image qualities configured in the transmitter are used see Video settings on page 176 Adjusting the image display Depending on the disp
363. nnel Allow access the via serial channel Manually alarm Allows the user to manually activate or deactivate alarm enable enabling Internal relays Allows the user to control internal relays Disconnect incase of Prevents a connection established by the receiver from being alarm disconnected in the event of an alarm see Hang up and redial on alarm on page 226 Authorises the user to view the transmitter logfile applies to CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices only Archive access Authorises the user for Evaluation with optimal speed of the Site optimal speed Archive Only applies for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices Archive access Authorises the user for Evaluation with optimal functionality online optimal functionality player of the Site Archive Only applies for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices Note If Modify setup is not selected the Setup button will not be available greyed out to the user in question during active connections If you have created users for your device at least one of them must have permission to change the setup so that someone can access the transmitter s settings Deleting a user Click Delete User to delete the user selected in the Registered users list from the User Management of your VG and SVR device 2 169_02 125 CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 3 Date and time Internal device time Device HeiTel b
364. not use this type of alarm message for PTZ or dome cameras or for cameras mounted on pivoting or tilting heads Applicable If you have stored at least one applicable reference image in the cameraspecific configuration dialogue See New reference image on page 173 for camera position authentication a Yes is displayed in the Applicable column and the option On in the Connect see Connect on page 175 column can be activated if necessary If no applicable reference image exists then No is displayed in the Applicable column in which case the option On in the Connect column cannot be activated and is grayed out Triggered The Triggered column contains information as to whether movement of the camera out of position has already been detected compared to one of the stored reference images e No The current camera image again matches the stored reference images or the original position The device can if necessary trigger an alarm again e Yes Movement of the camera from the original position has occurred compared to one of the stored reference images If this is not a temporary change the camera must be adjusted and a new reference image created using the Configure See New reference image on page 173 function 174 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Notes e So that the device can set this parameter the option On in the Connect see Connect on page 175 column must have been a
365. notification via the PC loudspeaker or an installed sound card a message window also opens Acoustic notification of tours only stops when you close the message window From the drop down list select the port through which you want to establish the connections during the tours If the desired transmitters must be accessed via different networks ISDN analogue make certain that the configured port is suitable for connections to the transmitters in question oo i On Select On to activate the tour selected in the drop down list 001 to 100 Start time Enter the start time for the tour in these two boxes hour minute M T W Th F Sa S Select the days on which you want the tour to be carried out 27769 02 93 94 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis The drop down list above the lt Add button contains all the transmitters currently in the Transmitter index If you want to include a transmitter in this tour then select the transmitter in question in the list and then click lt Add Note Only transmitters that are in the transmitter index can be included in a tour Transmitters that have been removed from the transmitter index or that have been renamed can no longer be dialed during future tours If a transmitter is deleted from the transmitter index even though it is still supposed to be ina tour the failed attempt to access these transmitter data will be noted in the CC4LOG TXT event file with
366. nswered Accept call automatically This is without doubt the most frequently used setting Incoming calls alarms are automatically accepted Once a connection has been established image transmission starts 78 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Camera selective alarm activation Alarm triggering image If you have selected Accept call automatically or Accept call automatically and are using SVR series devices CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile or CamServer as transmitters transmission begins with the image that triggered the alarm If the alarm was triggered by a camera control input the associated camera is automatically activated Accept call and automatic operation This operating mode allows you to carry out completely automated call and alarm processing Incoming calls are automatically accepted and processed in line with the settings When the fixed period of time has passed the connection is closed again No user intervention is required Time limit of connection In the Time limit of connection field enter the maximum connection time in minutes When this period of time has passed the connection is closed immediately Camera 1 10 In these boxes you can specify the number of video images that you want to receive from each camera In such a way you can weight the cameras differently Example The settings displayed under Automatic operation on the previous page would result in the following 1 Two
367. ntinuous recording depending on the state of the control input see Advanced configuration on page 202 Either of these configuration modes can be selected individually for each camera track 7 13 11 1 Easy mode Select Use easy mode to configure in easy mode The Easy mode recording process corresponds to the mode Contact status Open Permanent in the Advanced configuration see Continuous recording without external switching on page 203 The option Record only when device armed stops the continuous recording when the device is not armed This feature increase the overall recording time and or protect the privacy 27 69 _02 201 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Recorder settings ComDicc NVR Dera E a Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Camera settings Camera groups Motion Privacy zones M Use easy mode Alarms E Site archive Video settings Passwords Record image every 0 4 seconds HDD a POS ATM IBIS Audio Track settings Average image size fa 46 za KE 7 Manual input Video 1 in Video 2 in Video 3 in Video 4 in Video 5 in Video 6 in Video 7 in Video 8 in Video 9 in Video 10 in Frames per second 2 50 Estimated recording period 1 week s 4 day s 9 minute s Ce Ge E Cancel Site archive state Help Record image every This field defines the recording interval seconds Specify how often every x seconds you want an ima
368. ntrol PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 1 Structure The structure of the configuration file is described briefly below The file is broken down into sections for clarity The actual settings are saved in keys in each section Exactly one value is assigned to each key The setting is defined by the value Example PORTA Section MAXONLINETIME 1 key value EXTRA Section REFIMAGEWIDTH 1 key value REFIMAGEHEIGHT 1_ key value 8 2 2 How to modify the configuration file You will find the configuration file in the program directory C CAMCONTROL_PRO default installation location or YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_PROGRAM_NAME You can modify the file with a text editor Double click the file in the folder window or in Windows Explorer to open it with the editor that is associated with INI files in your Windows system e Close the receiver software if open e Open the CAMCTRL INI file e Find the section containing the key you wish to change If the section is not present you must create it Note All keys must be in the section to which they are assigned If a key is not in the correct section it will not be recognised by the software and the setting will not take effect e Find the key you wish to change If the key is not present you must create it e Enter the desired value e Repeat the steps indicated above for all other keys that you wish to change e Once you have made all of the necessary changes save the file
369. o groups that group two or three cameras for one view Camera groups are defined in Recorder settings see Camera groups on page 147 Left mouse button You can also change the viewing mode by clicking one of the image windows in the main panel This allows you to toggle quickly and easily between Fullscreen and Mainscreen viewing mode Left click in one of the images of the Quadscreen Camera groups or Ten screen displays to switch back to Mainscreen viewing mode and switch to the selected camera Note Please note that the images are always saved in the receiver archive in the configured quality and size Image quality in Quadscreen Camera groups and Ten screen viewing mode is less compared to the other viewing modes in order to facilitate a quick overview of the connected cameras You can adjust the live image quality for SVR devices in Recorder settings see Live video settings on page 141 Transparent data The CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR Cam4mobile and transmission CamServer models also have a serial interface that you can use to transparently transfer data between the transmitter in the main panel and the receiver PC During image transmission you can transparently transfer any data between a device connected to the external serial interface of the transmitter See Serial channel on page 212 e g a P T head and a device connected to the receiver PC see Serial Channel on page 92 e g operating p
370. oftware Manual The video systems use the following protocols during time alignment e RFC 1305 see hitp tools ietf org html rfc1305 e RFC 4330 see hittp tools ietf org html rfc4330 GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Upload 7 Download Firmware update PC m Extra holidays KE July 2010 gt Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 12 3 4 Add as type 1 gt 3512 mis 7 8 93 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Add as type 2 gt a 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 sakle 26 27 28 29 30 3 Toggle Type Delete Entry NTP Settings On With the On option you can activate time alignment via NTP Note When activating time alignment via NTP synchronisation of the time via alarm panel IBIS serial control or CamControl PRO is no longer possible Please be sure to check the video system s time after deactivating the NTP function As the time basis for NTP is the coordinated world time UTC Universal Time Coordinated there may be differences depending on the time zone of the video system s place of installation Correct the time manually where required see Set recorder to PC time on page 126 Synchronisation With the Synchronise every function you can set the time interval in which the video system is to set the time via NTP The standard setting for the synchronisation interval is 6 h NTP Server Address The address of an NTP Time Server can be stated as an IP add
371. ogue appears Select Browse my computer for driver software Step 5 How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually Select Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer on the next dialogue 302 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location C Users v Browse Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This lst will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device Step 6 Select Network adapters in the device list of the next dialogue Select your device s type from the list below Common hardware types F Mice and other pointing devices Mobile devices Modems amp Monitors Li Multifunction adapters YF Mutti port senal adapters 1 Network Client Network Protocol B Network Service a Non Plug and Play drivers PCMCIA adapters Step 7 Select Microsoft in the Manufacturer list and as Network Adapter Remote NDIS Compatible Device
372. ok in lo trpicint gt fe a g EJ 432x324 Entrance upper floor Bes Main entrance T Training room Floor administration B Parking area PTZ Floor development Bu Relay demo Floor management Bu Service area Floor production Bt Stock Floor sales Test pattern HeiTel a File name Parking area PTZ ipa Files of type JPEG file ipg Bitmap file bmp E Cancel Note You should always use images that are located on a local hard drive if possible as loading images over a network can sometimes impair image transmission significantly Clicking Open opens the Edit image name dialogue box Edit image name es Image name Parking area PTZ m Camera 1 amp amp amp O es amp C8 oe 10 none Cancel This dialogue box also opens when you select an existing reference image in the Transmitter data dialogue box and click Modify You can change the name of the image the file name is suggested automatically and assign it to one of the cameras from 1 to 10 If you select none for the camera this image is not displayed as a camera hint during an active connection It will only be shown as an object reference image for the transmitter in the transmitter list If you wish to remove a reference image from the list in the Transmitter data dialogue box select the desired image and click Delete The image will then be removed from the image list and will no longer be available as a camer
373. ol PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Configuration reference images Size and display during REFIMAGEWIDTH 200 Initial reference image width of reference images REFIMAGEHEIGHT 180 Initial reference image height REFIMAGETIME 4 Reference image display time e Values Initial width 1 Pixels Initial height 1 0 Pixels e Specifying a value of 1 for initial width and height means that a reference image will be displayed with a minimum output width of 149 pixels and a height scaled in line with the original image During an active connection you can have reference images which have been assigned to individual cameras shown as camera hints These images are shown as soon as the mouse pointer is positioned over the camera button The reference image is displayed until the configured display time elapses The image is also shown for as long as the left mouse button is held and the magnifying glass is positioned over the picture regardless of the configured display time The initial size and display time of the reference images can be specified in the corresponding keys Hang up View Setup Site Archive Log file 4 00002 CamDisc svr A ro a 30 12 05 12 55 14 1500 CQ500002 CamDisc svr PC Archive 30 12 05 13 02 40 0002 Program over by HeiTel T 02 01 06 09 10 41 0001 Program started by Heil Setup amp 02 01 06 09 10 53 1500 C 500006 CamDisc svr E amp 02 01 06 09 11 07 1500 C 500004 CamDisc s
374. ol functions page 224 e Upload Download Loading and saving of configuration profiles to the receiver PC page 229 e Firmware update Dialogue driven procedure for firmware update page 230 e Cl Adapter Matrix for allocating additional control inputs page 232 e IP Camera Including IP cameras page 237 e HYBRID Card 4 Programming and activation of DSP functions for the HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR page 246 118 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Underneath this menu the Recorder settings dialogue box has four Cam4mobile VG CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG CamServer VG 4c CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer or three CamTel SVR and CamTel VG buttons Clicking OK confirms the modified settings The configuration data are then sent to the digital image transmission system Clicking Cancel exits the Recorder settings without applying any changed settings to the device OK Cancel Site archive state Help Online help Help opens the online help where necessary as a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat Reader Site archive state The Site archive state button is only available for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices and for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG 2c VideoGateways The Site archive state dialogue box tells you the recording processes continuous or event recording used by each camera track and when
375. ommend that you first test the data transmission device connected to your PC using standard Windows software e g Hyper Terminal for modems or Telnet for TCP IP networks You should test your ISDN card using the application software that came with the card Observe Display on Modem Data transmission between the PC and the modem ISDN TA as well as the connection status are often signalised by an LED display on the modem ISDN TA Monitor programs are often delivered for internal ISDN cards these programs show the status of the CAPI interface When operating please observe these displays they can be very helpful in locating the problem When using an internal ISDN card please use a fossil driver which makes the ISDN resources available as virtual COM interfaces General Errors Faults Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Initialise modem Modem ISDN TA is 1 Switch on the modem message freezes for 15 not switched on ISDN TA 20 seconds and is Modem ISDN TA is 2 Replace the modem ISDN terminated with an error defective or incorrect TA or carry out an update message Firmware Check the commands in the Initialisation string is init string not accepted by the Test the COM port with Modem ISDN TA another device and program COM port is e g mouse or modem and defective Hyper Terminal Incorrect or defective 5 Replace the cable V 24 cable 27769 02 319 CamCont
376. on Paketolaner Minip 192 168 31 66 Realtek ATLS133 Famie PCl Fast Ethermnet NIC 2 Paketpla 192 168 715 656 Using this selection menu you can select the network segment to be searched by selecting the corresponding network card Current notebooks in particular often have a WLAN interface for a wireless local network in addition to a LAN interface for a cable based local network Note Please note that the following device detection is only limited to the local network segment that you have selected via the network adapter e Network card 1 IP address 192 168 31 66 Search area network segment 192 168 31 0 to 192 168 31 255 e Network card 2 IP address 192 168 115 66 Search area network segment 192 168 115 0 to 192 168 115 255 Start search Via the button Start search you will initiate another search Choose one or more devices from the list in order to use the offered options see Options for the chosen transmitter on page 110 Device selection You select a device by left clicking on the desired entry If there are several devices to choose from that follow one after the other check the first of the desired entries by left clicking then click and hold down the shift key thereafter check by way of another left click on the last entry of the desired devices All entries in between are also checked For optional selection click on the control Ctrl key and hold it down With a left click check all desir
377. on the following additional information can be displayed Field v connection established by e IM internal remote data transmission adapter e g ISDN card EM external remote data transmission adapter e g MODEM NW Network NM Null modem UB USB UN Unknown Field y Reason for connection e R Receiver dialup e A Alarm call triggered by device e S Service call triggered by device every 24 hours Status messages to the multipolar terminal block messages to the Status messages to the multipolar terminal block terminal block D amp T Control input x The control input indicated in field x has been yes closed closed D amp T Control input x The control input indicated in field x has been yes no opened opened D amp T Alarm input closed The alarm input has been closed D amp T Alarm input opened The alarm input has been opened D amp T Alarm enable input The alarm enable input has been closed yes no closed D amp T Alarm enable input The alarm enable input has been opened yes no opened D amp T Aux input x The Aux input indicated in field x has been yes no closed closed D amp T Aux input x The Aux input indicated in field x has been _ yes no opened Opened D amp T V out input closed The control output V out has been closed D amp T V out input opened The control output V out has been opened Status messages for serial control D amp T External Se
378. on authentication check to a certain degree e Green Green fields are used to mark image areas that are highly applicable to the camera position authentication check A video image is applicable to the camera position authentication check and can be stored as reference image 1 or reference image 2 if at least four image areas can be detected as applicable for analysis If not the Store button is deactivated and is grayed out Under different lighting conditions different relevant edges can be used as the basis for camera position authentication It is therefore possible to store up to two different reference images for each camera track These reference images show for example different lighting situations such as day and night for the analysis me VLW W7 28 WYi12 D4 1U For this analysis the camera image is divided up into eight fields and are checked for usable vectors If at least four fields contain usable vectors the reference image is classified as Applicable see Applicable on page 174 Applicable edge vectors of the reference images are stored in the flash memory of your device This ensures that even after a loss of power shutdown and subsequent restart the reference images found and stored for each camera can continue to be used Note Camera position authentication and alarm should not be activated for cameras that have main functions including a change in image section due to pivoting inclination and or zooming Do
379. on refers to additional texts that may contain important information on the object under surveillance You can provide operating personnel for example with the address of the property alarm lists or action plans To enter site specific information such as key holder details phone numbers emergency procedures etc place the mouse in this window and double click This will allow you to tepe information directly into ithe window xl Adding transmitter specific information To save new transmitter specific information or expand existing information activate text input for the active transmitter by double clicking this text field The information will be saved in the TRINFOS sub directory of the program directory The file format is YZxxxxxx INF and contains the serial number of the transmitter as the file name Offline amendment If you want to save additional information on a transmitter and you know its serial number but there is no active connection to it then using a text editor create a file in the TRINFOS sub directory of CamControl PRO in line with the following example Y ZXXXXXX INF with YZxxxxxx transmitter serial number In this file record the information that you want CamControl PRO to show you when displaying the transmitter in question in the main panel This text can be up to 8000 characters 8 KB with a maximum viewable line length of 58 characters 4 4 7 Closing the connection If you want to end the co
380. on to delete all entered positions on the map Google Earth is closed Google Earth or OpenStreetMap update interval The default setting for the Google Earth or OpenStreetMap update interval can be adjusted 34 Locate the GPSTr0100 ini file in the program directory of your CamControl software Open the file with an editor In the Options section locate the entry msGooglelInterval Options msGooglelInterval 1000 lf necessary change the default setting of 1000 milliseconds Save the file 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 4 6 Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer HeiTel uses removable hard drives in its CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and Cam4mobile devices to save image sequences These can be continuous recordings or event recordings In the case of event recording not only are the alarm triggering images saved In transmitter configuration you can define a pre alarm sequence and a post alarm sequence to be saved with the alarm images as a complete event With the exception of removable hard drives the statements in the above paragraph also apply to CamServer This device is only equipped with a fixed installation hard drive In order to keep the instructions concise the section below refers only to CamDisc SVR devices although the statements are also applicable to CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer In cases where there are more significant differences this is indicated
381. ones are defined by clicking in one corner of the area to be defined as a privacy zone and then dragging the mouse over the desired rectangular area while holding the left mouse button You can define up to five Privacy zones per camera input If the defined Privacy zones have not yet been transmitted to your HeiTel device you can remove these again by right clicking on the corresponding marking Note Privacy zones should not overlap if at all possible and should also not be too large as this can reduce the processing speed of your device When using CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices you can specify whether the Privacy zones only apply to live images or to live images and recording for each camera input This option is not available for CamTel VG and CamTel SVR transmitters The pre alarm images will also include blocked out areas if Privacy zones are defined Colours You can select from one of 15 colours to indicate the Privacy zones for the transmitter CE 152 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis Deleting Privacy zones 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual To delete these zones click Delete privacy zones This removes newly defined zones from the image immediately Please note that any Privacy zones that were defined and confirmed in a previous configuration procedure will remain in effect until you confirm your new configuration by clicking OK and then copy th
382. onnections including CamControl MV CamControl WM and CamControl iPhone These applications must be programmed accordingly For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl PRO press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page253 cml Note To connect to the Web Server the device s symbolic name e g http webserver1 heitel com or IP address e g http 62 214 6 12 must be entered in the Web browser address bar Examples with modified Web Server port 81 e http webserver1 heitel com 81 e http 62 214 6 12 81 If the Web Server is active you can select the time period for Automatic disconnect after from the drop down list The options range in different increments from Off to 24 h The default setting is 30 min If the Web Server is not active then you cannot configure a timeout Deactivating the Web API option prevents access to the device internal web interface This goes beyond the functional scope of the Web Server The Web API describes a programming interface Application Programming Interface and is an extension of the device internal web interface for httpbased integration in third party applications Note Ensure that you enable the Web API if you want to access the relevant transmitter using the HeiTel software CamControl Android CamControl iPhone and or CamControl MV The activation of the function LAN auto detection support is a requirement for the transmitter to be found during
383. ons In the CAMCTRL INI configuration file you can instruct CamControl PRO not to automatically detect a null modem in Normal mode This may be necessary for proper operation with certain modems under some rare circumstances Further information on changing this entry can be found in the relevant section See Switching off automatic null modem detection on page 258 This mode involves a continuous connection to a transmitter CamControl PRO attempts to reach the connected transmitter about every 20 seconds This kind of operation requires a direction connection via a dedicated line or also a null modem for example If you have selected this type of connection for one connection channel the Transmitter index see Configuring the transmitter index on page 96 does not open when you click the Port button In some rare cases a connected null modem cable may not be properly detected in Normal mode If you select Nullmodem the receiver software assumes that there is always a null modem connected and acts accordingly Note Don t forget to switch off Nullmodem mode again if you want to establish a connection using a different method via modem for example If you only establish connections via TCP IP you can deactivate the serial interface by selecting Off in the Mode drop down list CamControl PRO then stops using this COM interface thus making it available for other applications or the serial channel Error Port A E X 3
384. ons Extras HTconnect PC Archive C Do not accept call C Accept call manually Serial channel C Accept call automatically 7 genic Accept call and automatic operation Time limit of connection 4 min Camera 1 2 Camera 2 jo Camera 3 i Camera 4 jo Camera 5 jo Camera 6 jo Camera 7 lo Camera 8 jo Camera 9 lo ase Cancel Help Do not accept call Dial from PC only Select Do not accept call if you do not want incoming calls to be accepted No acoustic or visual notification whatsoever is given in this case Accept call manually Call notification Port 4 Call If you have selected Accept call manually incoming calls are initially only notified visually and acoustically in the Call dialogue box You decide whether you want to accept or ignore the call by clicking Accept or Ignore If your PC has a sound card installed the RING WAYV file is played as acoustic notification You can replace this file with your own sound file if you wish If this file has been deleted or the PC does not have a sound card short warning tones are emitted by the PC loudspeaker as acoustic notification Notes e If you are operating via TCP IP it is not possible to accept calls manually e Please note that for technical reasons a call must be answered within a limited period of time This time can vary depending on the connection type and network operator After this time has passed the call can no longer be a
385. ons a maximum of 150 characters are available 27769 _02 243 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Examples Vendor XYZ Model SBC Add to Generic 1 Add to Generic 2 Close Display of the Examples button is optional and depends on the GenericExamplesIPCam txt file This button is only displayed if for this file valid examples exist for Generic GET instruction in the program directory of your CamControl PRO software Click the Examples button to open a dialogue box in which to select from examples of Generic GET commands e Select the desired camera model e Use Add to Generic 1 and or Add to Generic 2 to copy the relevant example string to the field in question e Exit this dialogue by pressing Close Note The inserted string is only an example Authentication may be necessary depending on the model and configuration of your IP camera For more information on authentication methods please refer to the camera documentation An example of a common procedure is the Basic Authentication Scheme in accordance with RFC 2617 HTTP Authentication see http tools ietf org html rfc261 7 section 2 Example of a generic GET command GET cgi bin encoder USER demo amp PWD demo amp SNAPSHOT HTTP 1 1 r nHost 192 168 31 74 r nKeep Alive 300 r nConnection keep alive Ww yn rT n Note To create a Generic GET command you will normally require the SDK Software Development Kit or API Ap
386. ont connector of the device and the other side into the USB port of the computer only after you have switched the PC on Windows 7 tires to install the driver for Ethernet USB RNDIS automatically If there was no previous driver installation done or the driver was uninstalled a corresponding driver error message appears Step 3 Got to the Device Manager you can find it in the Control Panel System Device Manager and select in section Other devices the node RNDIS Ethernet Gadget or Ethernet USB RNDIS depends on the connected HeiTel device Ea Device Manager File Acton View Help Pr i H F i Pr a g martin elare gt Batteries 7 Computer coe Hak des E Display adapters el DVD CD ROM drives cg IDE ATASATAPI controllers Imaging devices Keyboards al Merce and other pomting devices E Monitors a Network adapters a fp Other devices Jp Ethernet USB RNDIS D Processors Sound video and game controllers 7 System devices Universal Seral Bus controllers oe Click with the right mouse button on the selected device and select Update Driver Software from the popup menu a ifm Other devices Dy Ethernet USR RAMIS By Processors Update Driver Software amp Sound videna Disable tem device Uninstall Universal Sena Scan for hardware changes Properties Step 4 A new dialogue appears Select Browse my computer for driver software 27769 02
387. ontrol PRO also allow you to access the receiver archive offline If configured accordingly CamControl PRO saves all received video images in the PC Archive You can make this setting under Receiver options PC Archive options see PC Archive on page 84 There are extensive search functions available for accessing the receiver archive offline You can also export image sequences and print out or save individual images Alternatively you can use the CamControl PLAYER for offline access 5 1 Receiver archive PC archive Notes on the receiver archive e Video images are only saved when the receiver archive is activated e The PC system time is used as the time basis for the saved images Image quality and resolution in the receiver archive All video images are saved in the quality and resolution with which they were received In Fullscreen or Zoom viewing modes this corresponds to the slider setting underneath the video image The video images in the overview modes Quadscreen Groups and Ten are transmitted and saved with low live image quality by default in SVR and VG devices You can adjust the quality of live images for individual cameras and the overview modes under Recorder settings Live video settings Live transmission quality See Live video settings on page 141 Storage concept Unlike CamControl LITE CamControl PRO does not save the video images received from different transmitters in one single archive file Instead it cr
388. ontrol inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position aut_4 gt Device User Date amp Time Camera name Connect H Connections Camera settings Camera groups 1 PTZ Camera a Motion rechenes 2 Main Entrance a E Alarms Alarm inputs Pre alarm 3 Xtralis Building E Camera control inputs Motion detection 4 Xtralis Parking a Camera position authen SROarcnive 5 PTZ IP cam backyard E Audio Relays PTZ control 6 PTZ Strecke 1 5 Serial channel E Alarm panel D 4 m p 7 Ez OK g m Cancel g m Site archive state _Sitearcive state 10 E Help Connect Activate the option in the Connect column if the transmitter should establish a connection to your receiver when the video signal for the corresponding camera has been lost Symbol for Video loss 7 Note Even if the option Video signal lost detection is disabled the integrated error relay is triggered if a signal is lost see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 47 172 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual When an alarm message is given the corresponding camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same manner as the reporting of camera alarms Note In order to establish a connection to your receiver when the video signal is lost you must enter the phone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers See Phone and IP numbers on pa
389. or link PTZ control a ae hae i faa Text or link b r alarm report transmitter location http 4 192 168 31 170 OK Destination in case of Alarm Destination email address 1 Cancel Jinfo your_domain com JV Alarm image as attachment Site archive state Destination email address 2 Jalarm control_centre qmx net Alarm image as attachment Help Activate the Send email in case of alarm See Send email in case of alarm on page 144 option if in addition to the alarm notification by modem ISDN or network connection See Phone and IP numbers on page 139 amessage should be sent via email 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Send email incase of Activate the Send email in case of picture warning threshold is reached picture warning see Send email in case of picture warning threshold reached on page threshold is reached 144 option if in addition to standard notification see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 a message should be sent via email is Note Requirements e Ensure that the IP addresses for Gateway and DNS Server see Network TCP IP on page 129 have been correctly configured If possible you should maintain a dedicated email account used only for HeiTel device alarm notifications The following information is required for the programming Outgoing mail server SMTP user name or email address of the account and the corr
390. or suitability of the products for your purpose You acknowledge that you have not relied on any oral or written information representation or advice given by or on behalf of Xtralis or its representatives Total Liability To the fullest extent permitted by law that any limitation or exclusion cannot apply the total liability of Xtralis in relation to the products Is limited to i in the case of services the cost of having the services supplied again or li in the case of goods the lowest cost of replacing the goods acquiring equivalent goods or having the goods repaired Indemnification You agree to fully indemnify and hold Xtralis harmless for any claim cost demand or damage including legal costs on a full indemnity basis incurred or which may be incurred arising from your use of the products Miscellaneous If any provision outlined above is found to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of law such invalidity or unenforceability will not affect the remainder which will continue in full force and effect All rights not expressly granted are reserved 27769 02 i CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Document Conventions The following typographic conventions are used in this document Italics Used to denote references to other parts of this document or other documents Used for the result of an action The following icons are used in this document Caution This icon is used to indicate that there is
391. order for incoming connections to be recognised e The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol e Ifthe ISDN terminal adapter is connected to multiple ISDN data devices with an SO bus all the ISDN devices must be assigned their own MSN generally the phone number without prefix Operation with a telephone system In this case you may have to prefix the telephone number with the outside line number s In some cases there may be problems with the modem s dial tone recognition In this case turn off the modem s dial tone recognition frequently ATX3 Alternatively you can insert a pause after the outside line number s e g We wait for dial tone 90 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual ISDN network operation e It is generally recommended entering the MSN for trouble free operation e The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol Note Many of the above settings are factory defaults and can be activated with AT amp F If you are still experiencing problems consult your modem manual Below you will find some examples for correct initialisation of selected modems and ISDN TAs The configuration of the MSN is italicised in the initialisation commands for the ISDN terminal adapters However the MSN does not have to be entered in every case Sample initialisations Analogue modem AT command initialisation prefix GREATIX V 90 GSM adapter Due to discontinuations or
392. ormally opened M be Camera position authen Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Alarm panel Log file wo Normally opened v ui OK Cancel Site archive state Help Tamper input Note A switching state at the inputs must last at least 0 5 seconds to be certain that the transmitter detects it 27 69 _02 161 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Note on CamServer 2c and video systems of the VG Series a Normally opened Normally opened _ F Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normally closed BS 8418 Besides the conventional wiring of the following control inputs as normally closed contact and normally open contact CamServer 2c and the video systems of the VG series also support the voltage monitored circuit variants resistance monitoring 10k and the BS 8418 compliant normally closed contact For more information refer to section Specification of the control inputs on page 312 Arm Disarm input You can control connection establishment in the event of alarm with the Arm Disarm input designation on the video system Al a d If you use this function the status of the alarm enable input e g with a connected key switch determines whether a connection will be established to one or more receivers in the event of alarm i e when the alarm input or one of the camera control inputs has been triggered You may
393. ossil driver cFos which is available on the Internet Internal ISDN cards from AVM If you are using internal AVM ISDN cards you do not need to use cFos because AVM products have a CAPI port driver that allocates the ISDN resources virtual COM ports virtual modems Notes on installing cFos e Always determine what serial connections COM ports your PC actually has in the Windows Device Manager e Determine the MSN at which CamControl PRO is to be accessed on the ISDN SO bus e Start installing cFos During the course of the installation you will be asked to select the interfaces you want to be available in the future as virtual COM ports As an ISDN card is generally connected to an SO bus which allows two simultaneous connections you should also specify two COM ports Do not select any COM ports that are physically present or that have already been configured as virtual ports by other programs COM1 and COM2 are often the only physical serial interfaces available COM3 and COM4 should then be selected as virtual COM ports e You can also assign an MSN Multiple Subscriber Number during cFos installation In general this is the telephone number without prefix your transmitters use to dial the receiver software in the event of an alarm Using the MSN the driver identifies calls intended for CamControl PRO thereby avoiding conflicts with other ISDN devices connected to this ISDN connection Enter an MSN in the corresponding field for eac
394. otion detection Open the Motion detection tab from the menu under the Alarm node The devices are equipped with one integrated software motion detector per camera input The sensitivity of this detector can be set to three Linked with Motion CamControl PRO Software Manual levels You can define detection zones in the relevant camera image in the Motion detection zones tab see Motion detection zones analogue cameras on page 150 If a motion detector is active the associated video image or the defined detection zones are checked for movement every 300 ms This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Note Ensure that the scene used for motion detection is adequately lit under all operating conditions this is an essential requirement Ensure that no image noise shadows or similar have a negative influence on the motion detection function Alarm inputs Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication Camera name Motion alarm enabled internal cameras only Sensivity Camera 1 Camera settings Camera groups Iv Motion detection zones Privacy zones Camera 2 B Alarms Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Camera 8 Ean Camera 9 Site archive state Camera 10 Help Motion alarm activ
395. ou have to do is set the Baud rate of your transmitter to the correct value Please refer also to the appropriate sections in the modem or ISDN TA manual 136 xi Network TCP IP Extemal modem intemal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai 4 gt Device User Date amp Time H Connections Network TCP IP Baud rate 115200 y Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Tone dial Sipsetii Number of rings Pulse dial Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Initialisation prefix ATEO So 0 Dial prefix ATD Last caller Cancel Site archive state Help Baud rate Select a suitable transmission speed for the transmitter s serial interface from the Baud rate drop down list You can select 115200 Baud in most cases You may have to select a different rate for some analogue modems for example If you are using channel bundling with ISDN operation you should set 230400 Baud as the interface speed Select this option for tone dialling Pulse dial Select this option for pulse dialling Number of rings Number of rings allows you to determine the number of rings before the transmitter replies and initiates a connection 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Initialisation You can enter an AT comman
396. ou specify which connection types are available for the respective port The letters NIGA can be used individually or in combination to define the possible connection types Specification of the A_ALARMS 1 Acceptance of incoming alarms activated acceptance of e Range O off 1 on default incoming alarm calls e By means of an exact assignment of the parameters 0 or 1 you can for the respective port define at which connection ports incoming alarms will be accepted Specification of A_REMOTE 1 No relevance for CamControl PRO outgoing calls initiated outgoing calls initiated via command activated via command for the e Range O off 1 on default respective port Specification of A_AUTOREMOTE 1 No relevance for CamControl PRO outgoing patrols outgoing patrols initiated via command activated initiated via command e Range O off 1 o0n default for the respective port 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Specification of A_AUTOALARMENABLE 1 No relevance for CamControl PRO arm disarm function outgoing arm disarm functions initiated via command initiated via command Range O off 1 on default 8 2 4 3 Archive ARCHIV Snapshot pictures SNAPSHOTPATH D IMAGES snapshot pictures from the transmitter archive You can save the current image in the transmitter archive in JPEG format with CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4
397. out 2 minutes plug in the USB cable first to the USB jack on the HeiTel device printer interface Then connect the other end to the USB port of your PC and follow the installation instructions If necessary anew manual driver installation is needed If necessary use another USB port of your computer Note that a new USB driver installation may be required In some cases it is recommended rebooting the PC During the restart make sure that the USB cable is not plugged in Only after a complete restart the USB cable should be reconnected again If you are still experiencing problems with the USB connection is recommended using the network interface default IP address 192 168 31 95 to establish a connection to the device Consult also the CamControl LITE PRO manual to get more information 8 10 Additional software GPS Data Viewer 8 10 1 Installation of the GPS Data Viewer If with the installed CamControl PRO software you want to use the additional control elements from the GPS window see Extended GPS Live window on page 31 please install the GPS Data Viewer During the installation you can choose whether to use Google Earth or OpenStreetMap to represent the position data on the map Note Starting from April 2012 the GPS Data Viewer V1 2 which is included in the scope of the Software delivery starting from CamControl PRO V3 85 will no longer provide a map view when using OpenStreetMap This is due to changes in the map structu
398. ows you to create individual user profiles that specify what each user can do in and to the device in question Recorder settings xi Device Date amp Time Registered users Enter new user Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays E Add new user DRE Delete User V Password expires after 12 weeks Warning 3 days in advance PTZ control Serial channel Video out E EMA Extras User password Password confirmation fro Live cameras Archive cameras Upload Download IP Camera C Camera 2 C Camera 3 C Camera 4 C Camera 5 _ Camera 6 _ Camera 7 Cancel Site archive state C Camera 8 _ Camera 9 Camera 10 KIS IIIS D Options Remote functions Audio Transparent channel Manually alarm enabling Internal relays Disconnect in case of alarm Log file Archive access optimal speed Archive access opt functionality Managing users Creating new users In the Enter new user box enter the name or identification of a new user max length 20 characters Click lt Add new user lto add the new entry to the list of Registered users If at least one user is registered in the transmitter and this user was not created in the User Management of the receiver software
399. pe of data transmission you are using Analogue Operating an analogue dial modem at your PC page 324 ISDN ISDN card or external ISDN TA page 324 TCP IP Connection via local network cards page 324 324 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Analogue Telephone Networks CamControl PRO Software Manual Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection Modem 1 synchronisation noises followed by dropped line No Carrier Connect message followed by Cancel No connection possible Bad connection contact problems or bad line Incorrect modem configuration Defective modem cable Other device fax accepts the call Incorrect modem configuration Defect at the modem cable or bad plug connections Incompatible modem Port speed at the transmitter has incorrectly been set to 230400 baud End of Step 2 analogue telephone network ISDN Networks Check the telephone connection cable contacts and modem cable at the transmitter Switch off the modem and transmitter for a short time and then back on switch modem back on first Check the modem init string at the transmitter add SO 0 Reduce the port speed at the receiver modem Reset the transmitter to the factory settings then enter the special modem init string for the modem being used Disconnect other devices or use a modem switch Check the subscriber s line and modem cable Check the modem init string
400. pears Search text could not be found 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis Text amp price search ATM data Saving transaction data FE 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual Transaction data of camera 8 Type Transaction data TN 0002 BCN 22222222 AN 2222222222 0e2 0e Text amp price search Date amp time search Time window ATM search Start Transaction number Date V Account number 2222 Bank code number Amount General arg Iv Select all Items combined by AND t J gt Syncronizatiorr Update picture from data Update data from picture If you are using a HeiTel POS ATM Adapter as the source for transaction data you can specify the type of data recording A distinction is made between POS and ATM data Depending on the data type the search options are different e POS data see Text amp price search POS data on page42 e ATM data see Text amp price search ATM data on page43 Using ATM search you can define the criteria you would like to use for the search Transaction number Account number Bank code number Amount and or General When checking the amount you can choose between the operators lt less than or equal to equal to or gt greater than or equal to You can link all the selected parameters for the ATM search in the transaction data either using the logical operators AND or OR by making th
401. peed up the operation of the receiver software on slower computers under certain circumstances TCP IP port for ONLPLPORT x TCP IP port for the Online PLAYER Evaluation with optimal functionality e Range x valid port number which is not used by CamControl PRO for example Port 3081 The Evaluation with optimal functionality is carried out using the specified TCP IP port Make sure that this port is open in any firewalls that you have installed because the Online PLAYER communicates with your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer or Cam4mobile over this port Note If you do not supplement the parameter ONLPLPORT in CAMCTRL INI the connection or alarm port of the receiver software increased by one is used to connect the Online PLAYER Example e The transmitter alarm message is carried out via Port 3000 e The Online PLAYER connects with this transmitter through Port 3001 27769 02 257 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 4 2 PortA B C D 5 6 7 8 9 PORTA to PORTD and PORT5 to PORT9 258 Maximum connection MAXONLINETIME 3600 Maximum connection duration duration e Range 1 2678400 s 31 days 1 off connection not automatically terminated default You can specify a maximum connection duration to prevent against operating errors If you specify a value for this key it also applies to tours and automatically processed alarms The time required to load the settings and establish the
402. ping see Device grouping cascading on page 104 6 9 3 Inserting and editing reference images You can add up to eleven reference images for every transmitter entry in the Transmitter index The images assigned to the selected transmitter are shown as small thumbnails in the reference image list The currently selected reference image is also shown as a larger image in the picture window beneath the list The first reference image is shown automatically when a transmitter is selected Any picture in the list can be activated by clicking it The pictures can be shown as camera hints during an active connection Transmitter index UX Transmitter name Reference images oer CamDisc svri0 1 IP il IP address Phone number dial pretis camdisc1 avr O demo heitel com Prefiv 1 M CAFI CamDisc svr10 1 IP pribeag Prefix 2 Serial number AKOOO Username amp password Auto passwords Username Password demo k Add Modify You can add or modify reference images in the Transmitter data dialogue box by clicking Modify or Add in the Transmitter index 27 69 _02 101 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 102 Delete If you want to add a new reference image to the Transmitter data click Add beneath the list of reference images You can then select a suitable JPEG or bitmap image in the Reference images dialogue box Reference images E 2 x Lo
403. plication Programming Interface documentation for the IP camera Without support from HeiTel the user will not normally be able to use this function Integration via the ONVIF protocol Starting with firmware version 2 12 HeiTel video systems support the ONVIF protocol Problem free integration of IP cameras that support the ONVIF standard is not guaranteed Advance testing is strongly recommended Instant integration is based on ONVIF Standard 1 02 Due to the fact that the ONVIF standard is being constantly enhanced the backward compatibility of future versions cannot be guaranteed Furthermore there are differences in the video formats supported and their resolutions The resolutions and the performance of the relevant video formats JPEG MJPEG and H 264 may therefore differ Due to their higher device performance requirements video formats MJPEG and H 264 are available for the ONVIF protocol only for the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR device series A list of tested IP cameras can be found in the compatibility summary for the IP camera list See Help button for retrieving the IP camera list on page 240 Models marked as ONVIF have already been tested and can be operated over the ONVIF protocol Simply select ONVIF protocol as the manufacturer and enter the IP addresses and related usernames passwords The functional scope of ONVIF integration includes image display using video formats JPEG MJPEG or H 264 as well as the control of P
404. porary disturbances the last determined positioned data and the speed is shown in red Use the toggle switch to the right below the globe to switch from the standard display of GPS information to an enhanced GPS window see Extended GPS Live window on page 31 You can only switch between both display modes if valid GPS data has been received or saved Otherwise the button will be deactivated 4 5 3 2 Extended GPS Live window The extended GPS Live window contains the controls for use of Google Earth or OpenStreetMap Notes e Concerning the Google Earth application e Please note the licence terms and conditions of use for Google Earth e Forcommercial use Google Earth Pro software is available for which a charge is payable There is also Google Earth Enterprise which is offered as a company solution e Please consult the Google Earth user manual for further information on usage e Please note that HeiTel Digital Video GmbH has no influence over and assumes no liability for the function and availability of services obtained from other parties e Concerning the OpenStreetMap application e Please note the licence terms and conditions of use for OpenStreetMap e Please consult the OpenStreetMap user manual for further information on usage e Please note that HeiTel Digital Video GmbH has no influence over and assumes no liability for the function and availability of services obtained from other parties 27769 02 31 CamControl PRO
405. pports this Baud rate Channel bundling with the required X 75 protocol is not possible for CAPI devices and their virtual COM interfaces Use a suitable ISDN TA if necessary Init prefix Modem ISDN TA initialisation In the Init prefix box you can enter an AT command to initialise your modem ISDN TA The modem ISDN TA is reset and initialised with this command on program start after the receiver settings have been changed and every time after an active connection has been established receiver call In many cases all you need to do is reset the modem or ISDN TA with AT amp EF in the factory settings Maximum connection duration In the Maximum connection duration area you can define the maximum possible connection duration for the respective port e Ifthe On option is not activated no restriction on the connection duration is specified The entry field shows 1 e If you activate the On option you can specify the connection duration with values ranging from 0 to 2 678 400 seconds 0 seconds means the connection is terminated immediately The maximum value is equivalent to 31 days General notes on modem configuration e The modem ISDN TA must be configured for RTS CTS flow control e The DTR signal interrupts a connection or the establishment of a connection e DCD or M5 must indicate an active connection e The modem ISDN TA must not accept calls automatically ATSO 0 e The modem ISDN TA must send verbal messages ATV 1 in
406. proper health and safety precautions must be taken during the installation commissioning and maintenance of the product The system should not be connected to a power source until all the components have been installed Proper safety precautions must be taken during tests and maintenance of the products when these are still connected to the power source Failure to do so or tampering with the electronics inside the products can result in an electric shock causing injury or death and may cause equipment damage Xtralis is not responsible and cannot be held accountable for any liability that may arise due to improper use of the equipment and or failure to take proper precautions Only persons trained through an Xtralis accredited training course can install test and maintain the system Liability You agree to install configure and use the products strictly in accordance with the User Manual and product documents available from Xtralis Xtralis is not liable to you or any other person for incidental indirect or consequential loss expense or damages of any kind including without limitation loss of business loss of profits or loss of data arising out of your use of the products Without limiting this general disclaimer the following specific warnings and disclaimers also apply Fitness for Purpose You agree that you have been provided with a reasonable opportunity to appraise the products and have made your own independent assessment of the fitness
407. py of certain archive files to a different medium for example the structure will now be described in brief 64 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual oxi Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae aaraa aeaaaee Q peck sd D Tz wi 4 Search ey Folders BAe Address jo C Programme CamControl PROFARCHIVETOS00001105_08_29 gt Go Folders x Name Size Type Ge ndert am al W 12_26 57 12 526KB HDRFile 29 08 2005 12 28 12_26_57 39KB HIRFile 29 08 2005 12 28 e 15_08_29 105 370KB HDR File 29 08 2005 15 27 15_08_29 441KB HIRFile 29 08 2005 15 27 E O CamcControl PRO E G ARCHIVE O coso0003 cvso0005 i 05_08_29 gt 05_08_30 050831 D 05_09_01 E G Tesooo01 2 Us 29 G 05_09 01 O 05_09_06 G 05_09_07 H O Ty500001 Archive directory CamControl PRO has an ARCHIVE sub directory in the program directory of the software by default You can however specify a directory of your choice in Receiver options PC Archive options see PC Archive on page 84 Transmitter directory A further directory level contains the directories of the individual transmitters The name of each directory is the serial number of the transmitter in question Day directory Each transmitter directory has a further level containing directories named according to the date of recording These directories are named according to year month and day 05_08_29 corresponds
408. r IBIS recording The Set values for IBIS recording button is used to set the following parameters for the initial POS ATM IBIS data track All other POS ATM IBIS data tracks are set to 0 Confirming with OK causes existing POS ATM IBIS data to be overwritten 186 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Note To record IBIS data only the first POS ATM IBIS data track can currently be used If you reduce the track size of this data track you can assign free percentage values to additional tracks proportionately and use these where necessary to record POS data The following IBIS data is recognised and can also be evaluated Date Time Wagon number Line Course and Station The IBIS data is accessed in the same way as POS data see Accessing IBIS data on page 44 The Set values for IBIS recording button may be disabled greyed out Set values tonl ES recording To record IBIS data select IBIS in Serial channel Function If necessary follow the information positioned to the right of the button and change the programming for the Serial channel See Serial channel on page 212 Setting parameters for SOYAL The Set values for SOYAL recording button is used to set the following parameters for the initial POS ATM IBIS data track M Soyal Card 100 57 Reader All other POS ATM IBIS data tracks are set to 0 Confirming with OK causes existing POS ATM IBIS data to be overw
409. r devices in local area network Selected network adapter IntelA PRO1000 MT Network Connection Paketolaner Minip 192 168 31 66 Serial number __ Mame Pot Faddes T CYo47015 CamDise swr 10 H S000 192 168 31 170 CYS2901 F CD sv 7 PT22 S000 192 768 317 221 CYS47016 CO sv 8 S000 192 168 351 222 MOQ620030 CM 4413 S000 192 166 5122 MYVESTOIS CM 10 14 3000 192 168 317 226 ug Start search Select all ae Options of selected transmitters ae te If Update existing transmithers in transrnitter list ance I Add new transmitters to transmitter list Device detection The device detection returns the serial number port and IP address of the transmitters found A name is displayed if this has been programmed with the recorder settings see Device name on page 122 Allocation by serial number Using the two letters in the serial number it is possible to allocate the device to a device type The following table contains an overview of the current devices which support device detection see LAN auto detection support on page 132 You can allocate the devices found to a model series even if the name is missing or if the name provides you with little information VG Device series aise VE NVR VN SVR Device series 27769 02 109 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Selected network adapter Selected network adapter IintellA PRO1000 MT Network Connecti
410. r his executives but from other agents then the liability of the licensor is limited to damages that are foreseeable at the time the contract is made and that are typical for such contracts This exclusion and these limitations do not apply in the case of culpable infringement by the licensor or his agents of important contractual obligations in cases where guaranteed properties of the software package are missing as well as in cases of compelling liability according to the product liabilities law Where guaranteed properties of the software package are missing the licensor is not liable for such subsequent damages that are not contained in the guarantees made The liability of the licensor is limited within commercial trading to the replacement for typical foreseeable damages Liability claims must be asserted by the customer to the licensor in writing immediately after they are known Inasmuch as liability claims do not expire at an earlier time according to the legal regulations they expire at the latest three years after the claim arises Protective Rights 7 1 All rights to the software delivered remain with the licensor unless they have been expressly granted to the customer Place of Jurisdiction Final Regulations 8 1 8 2 8 3 The location of the licensor is the exclusive place of jurisdiction for all possible complaints of the licensor as well as for all possible complaints of a customer against the licensor
411. r shell You can give the individual groups a name in these two four fields Meaningful group names make it easier to select the desired group in the central control panel later The camera groups Entrance areas and Exterior shell have been defined in this example Note To be able to select a group as a view in CamControl PRO it must consist of at least two cameras To assign the cameras to individual groups just drag and drop them like you would in Windows Select a camera from the Pool or from another Group and then holding the left mouse button drag it to the desired Group You can move a camera from a Group back into the Pool in the same way Note Each camera can be allocated to one group only Multiple allocations are not possible 7 f Motion analogue cameras As of the device firmware V 1 96 HeiTel video systems have an enhanced video motion detection function Only the CamControl PRO software V4 01 or later should be used to configure the relevant video systems Note Use of a software version older than CamControl PRO V4 01 may result in the faulty configuration of video systems with firmware V1 96 or later In case of VG VideoGateways a CamControl PRO version V4 12 or higher is needed Note When using IP cameras the adjustable settings for Motion Motion detection zones and Privacy Zones are camera specific The Motion functionality is for indoor use only The IntrusionTrace functionality See Analytics IntrusionTra
412. r signalling arming e For signalling alarms Recorder settings i Relay Device User Relay 1 Date amp Time Connections Hama Door opener Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones M omentary I Closed while idle Privacy zones Gy Alarms J Reset offline Site archive 10 Audio Closed PTZ control Serial channel Relay 2 Video out EMA Name flitting Extras Latch Upload 7 Download Firmware update IP Camera Closed while idle IV Reset offline Closed 2 5 OK Cancel Site archive state Help Relay names in the central control panel Relay functions You can give the relays a name which is then used to label the buttons A relay configured as a latch changes its state every time the button is clicked e g lighting on off Closed while connected Closed on Error Closed while alarm enabled Momentary Closed while connected 208 A relay configured as amomentary changes its current state when clicked for the period specified under Closed s e g for electromagnetic door openers If you select this option the relay is switched for the duration of the connection It reverts to idle when the connection terminates 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Closed on error If you select this option the relay signals a device malfunction or failed attempt to establish
413. r specific configuration files All the settings necessary to operate the digital image transmission systems are saved in the individual devices themselves This means that all the transmitters work completely independently of the receiver PC used to configure them Furthermore a transmitter device is fully operational and accessible even if it is connected to from another PC workstation Transmitter dependent control files R01 and R02 files have also been introduced for even greater flexibility These files allow you to extend the functional scope of your image transmission system to almost any extent see Function and structure of R01 files on page 272 and also to customise automatic alarm processing for specific individual transmitters See Function and structure of R02 files on page 276 These files are created and saved on the receiver PC Many additional functions and enhancements for operation connection control and automatic alarm processing can be configured in these files on a specific transmitter basis 2 7 69 _02 2 1 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Note You can create edit the R01 and R02 files with a text editor Before editing these files always create a back up that you can re apply later if necessary 8 5 1 Function and structure of R01 files VG series SVR series devices CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer have a remote control concept that supports the connection of dome cameras pan
414. r these various tasks to be clear to the user you can assign each of the ports a separate designation in the Name field These names are then displayed on the buttons for establishing a connection in the main and side panels In such a way for example you can give a port configured to establish analogue connections only an appropriate name If you want to reserve one port for carrying out tours then you identify it accordingly Note Instead of the names Port A through Port D the individual connection ports can also be labelled Port 1 through Port 9 Depending on the number of connection channels selected it is also possible to have a mixed standard description For example Port A to Port D and Port 5 Network operation TCP IP TCP IP Activate TCP IP if you want connections to be established to one or more transmitters over the network see Connecting via network TCP IP connection quick start on page 14 27769 02 87 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Port In addition you directly set the communications port through which the HeiTel devices communicate with the CamControl PRO software The standard value for HeiTel devices and software is 3000 This port number is always set globally for all connection ports Note This value should now only be programmed through this program window The configuration file CAMCTRL INI should no longer be used to edit the port number see Port number on page 257 Req
415. r to define the parameters for automated alarm processing e Number of alarm camera images number of images which shall be received from the alarm camera e Number of live images To define the number of live images from the respective camera 1 to 10 Repeatings of live job To define the number of repetitions for the recording of the live images defined above e Number of pre alarm images To define the number of pre alarm images only CamTel SVR devices from the respective camera 1 to 10 e Maximum connection duration The connection will be interrupted after at the latest elapse of this time The connection will be automatically interrupted earlier if the transfer of all images has been completed according to the definitions e Use the Copy these values to all alarm reasons button to apply the programming of the current alarm reason to all other alarm reasons of the current transmitter e Use the Copy button to copy the programming of the current alarm reasons to the clipboard 282 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e Use the Insert button to insert a previously copied programming from the clipboard to the current alarm reason e Use the Save file button to save the current R02 file 8 6 Program parameters SERVICE INF The file SERVICE INF located in the program directory allows you to make a variety of pre settings for the CamControl PLAYER as an integral part of CamControl PRO The followi
416. ralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Step 4 Your receiver can be called by other transmitters but can not be called by your own transmitter alarmed Consult See Error at Transmitter Outgoing Call Step 4 on page 327 Steps 1 to 4 each refer to a chapter that can be consulted for troubleshooting when an error or fault occurs If the error fault can not be assigned to one of the four possibilities listed above then begin with the reference in Step 1 9 5 1 Error at Receiver PC Outgoing Call Step 1 If you can not dial your transmitter then you should first test your receiver by selecting a known working transmitter Your dealer should be able to name you an appropriate transmitter demo transmitter If you are able to establish a connection to a demo transmitter then the error may be in your transmitter See Error at Transmitter Incoming Call Step 2 on page 324 Check correct functioning of your transmitter by having your dealer call your transmitter Testing the Null Modem Connection If you have access to a transmitter with an external V 24 interface then you can begin by testing your transmitter with a null modem connection to your PC see No null modem connection possible on page 317 In this way you can make sure that the transmitter is functioning correctly without modem Testing the Data Transmission Equipment If you have experience in using data transmission equipment and PC applications then we rec
417. rawing from the last line end point To delete a detection zone select it and click the Clear selected button Clear all will delete all mask and detection zones defined for the camera Note The detection zone relates to the ground zones not the image zones If e g a person steps into the detection zone it will be sufficient that the feet are in the detection zone to trigger an alarm Hence do not extend the polygon beyond the ground surface you wish to monitor 27769 02 159 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Area direction For example movement on an adjacent road may result in false alarms In such cases use a directional area directed perpendicular to the roadway Click on the detection area to select it Then click on Unidirectional and drag the arrow to the desired motion direction which shall result in alarms The arrow s position on the area does not have an effect on the function LA Intrusion configuration Select camera Selected Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Dewarping Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Default Drawing tools Q New Area In the example above an alarm will only be released if an intruder enters the premises in the direction of the arrow Any vehicle or person leaving the area will not trigger an alarm The Bidirectional option will rel
418. rding Select Display camera of latest image recording if you want to switch to the camera that last recorded an image to the monitor output 27769 _02 217 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 19 Alarm Panel For its current devices HeiTel offers a connection to alarm panels in accordance with the standardised protocol VdS 2465 supplement S3 protocol enhancement for interface connection of video monitoring systems on alarm systems This protocol enables a functional interconnection of HeiTel image transmitters with alarm panels via the TCP IP network protocol Core functions of both systems are illustrated on both sides via this network interface In addition the availability of the systems is continuously checked by both sides Alarm panel Messages to be sent Messages to be received 4larm panel not connected JV Enabled Port E666 I Synchronise device time with alarm panel Site archive state Help This dialogue box shows whether or not a connection to an alarm panel exists A distinction is made between the following messages e Alarm panel not connected There is no connection to an alarm panel e Connected to alarm panel 192 168 31 208 A connection exists to the alarm panel with the specified IP address here 192 168 31 208 Note The specified IP address of the alarm panel was selected as an example Enabled The Enabled option allows you to enab
419. re Version 1 3 of the GPS Data Viewer which is supplied with CamControl PRO V4 12 will fix this problem 308 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Installation You can find a corresponding installation program for this selection in the subdirectory Install_ GPSDataViewer of the CamControl PRO software starting with Version 3 85 1 Find the subdirectory Install_ GPSDataViewer and open it 2 Start the program GpsDataViewerSetup exe The installation will take place exclusively in English With Next you can continue the installation with Back you can jump back one dialogue box and with Cancel you can cancel the procedure iG Setup GPS Data Viewer f Ioj x Welcome to the GPS Data Viewer Setup Wizard This will install GPS Data Viewer 1 2 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup 3 Select the target directory for the installation of GPS Data Viewer To do this it is mandatory that you install this additional software in the program directory of your CamControl PRO software Please verify the suggested program directory and if necessary correct the path by using the function Browse iG Setup GPS Data iewer Select Destination Location Where should GPS Data Viewer be installed J Setup will install GPS Data Viewer into the following folder CAUTION You MUST
420. re see HT connect on page 145 For this the TCP IP leased line is always initiated by the transmitter The correspondingly configured HeiTel devices establish a resting permanent connection to the receiver for this For this leased line via TCP IP each transmitter which is connected with a receiver generates a data volume of around 6 bytes per minute for the resting connection Intended use The use of the TCP IP leased line is suitable for transmitters with DSL UMTS connections with dynamic IP addresses thereby eliminating the need for DynDNS entry Dynamic Domain Name System entry with the corresponding providers and for devices within company provider networks where the firewall restrictively prevents incoming calls Requirements e One of the above mentioned devices with firmware 1 52 or newer e CamControl PRO software 3 73 or newer e The possibility for a direct connection to the receiver PC via TCP IP using a fixed IP address ora symbolic name where dynamic IP addresses are assigned Note The relevant information can be obtained from your internet provider or from the responsible system administrator 6 9 6 1 Setting up HT connect The set up for HT connect is carried out in three steps e Activate the receiver software function using an entry in the corresponding configuration file CAMCTRL INI or via the configuration menu Receiver options HTconnect see Step 1 on page 111 e Preparing the transmitter pr
421. releasing the buttons e Youcan configure commands that are sent when a button is clicked and repeated at variable intervals until this button is released e Instead of the buttons having a toggle function you can also define them as switches Configuring the button panel You can configure and customise the button panel using so called R01 files See Function and structure of R01 files on page 272 4 8 3 Global switching procedures In addition to PTZ control and the R16 adapter which are generally camera specific you can also define global switching procedures Position of control elements If you define global switching procedures i e switching procedures that are to be available irrespective of the selected camera in the transmitter specific R01 file the corresponding control elements are shown to the right of the relay button of devices These control elements involve a drop down list for selecting the function and a button for activating deactivating the previously selected function Light on First select the required function for the button from the dropdown list You can then switch this function on and off by clicking the button With the exception of Zoom viewing mode the control elements for global switching procedures are available for the entire duration of the connection Once you switch to a side panel no other control elements are shown 58 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual
422. res older than E days 192 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Event partition and continuous recording partition Every camera track can be divided into an event partition and a continuous recording partition Partition size depends on total track size see Track settings on page 191 and can be set using the slider Changing the size of the partition of one recording mode automatically causes the size of the partition of the other recording mode to change The maximum partition size of one recording mode can equal total track size You can therefore use the slider to configure the track for event recording only continuous recording only or a combination of both recording modes The sizes of each individual partition are indicated as you move the slider to make things easier Once you stop moving the slider and allow the cursor to rest on it the division of the track is shown as a percentage for about three seconds If you do not configure a period of time for either event or continuous recording in timer mode but allocate space to these recording modes using the slider a corresponding warning will appear Within the Timer there i no penod of continuous recording defined Within the Timer there i no period of event recording defined Note If a camera track is dedicated to only one recording mode then the special settings of the other recording mode cannot be changed or will be of no consequence
423. ress or as a symbolic name without quotation marks e 195 145 119 188 e Q de pool ntp org Note Symbolic addresses can only be processed directly if at least one valid DNS server and the gateway to the network settings were set see Network TCP IP on page 129 The Check Server button is used to verify the previously entered NTP server After pressing the button the entered NTP server is checked for its suitability Relevant status messages are displayed to the right of the button Possible status messages 2 7 69 _02 127 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis e Checking please wait 0x02 The NTP server is being checked This process may last for symbolic names in particular with unsuitable NTP servers approx 40 to 60 seconds The message is displayed in blue e The NTP server is OK 0x01 If the NTP server was assessed positively during the check this message is displayed in green e The NTP server is not applicable 0x00 If the NTP server was assessed negatively during the check this message is displayed in red e Under certain circumstances the NTP server did not provide a sufficient reply The server may be assessed as suitable after a further check e Check for the server addresses set as a symbolic name whether at least one DNS server and the gateway in the network settings see Network TCP IP on page 129 were set correctly NTP time servers can be available in a local network or
424. rial channel on your HeiTel device To do this connect your CamControl PRO receiver software to the transmitter and select Setup In the Recorder settings Serial channel see Serial channel on page 212 dialogue box perform the following configuration e Baudrate 115200 e Mode 8 N 1 e Function Serial Control Next transmit the configuration data to your HeiTel image transmitter with OK Following this programming when the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter is connected the Recorder settings dialogue box will display the CI Adapter menu item Note If correctly configured and if the image transmitter is ready for operation the Cl Adapter or CIO Adapter should have been recognised by your image transmitter 60 seconds after switching on The Cl Adapter tab allows you to allocate the 50 control inputs of the Cl Adapter or CIO Adapter In the CamControl PRO software V3 85 or newer and the device firmware V1 78 or newer the alarm function has been extended by the following options e Entry Exit Arm delay e Fire Panic Continuously armed e Alarm e Off For more information on this topic please refer to the section Extending the alarm functions on page 168 With the CamControl PRO software V3 97 or newer and the device firmware V1 94 or newer the additional functions of the ClO Adapter are supported This affects both the voltage monitored control inputs See Contact CIO Adapter only on page 237 and the eight relays
425. rial command XXXX has been successfully no command XXXX OK processed XXXX four digit command no D amp T External Serial command XXXX has not been command sucessfully processed XXXX four digit XXXX ERROR command Status messages for CI Adapter CIO Adapter CamControl PRO Software Manual 289 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis D amp T External input xx Input for the Cl Adapter CIO Adapter has cam yy closed been closed Input for the CI Adapter C IO Adapter 01 50 yy Camera number configured in the sender setup at the time the camera is triggered 01 10 D amp T External input xx Input for the Cl Adapter C lO Adapter has cam yy opened been opened Input for the CI Adapter CIO Adapter 01 50 yy Camera number configured in the sender setup at the time the camera is triggered 01 10 Status message for the HDD safe power down functions is deactivated via one of the HDD safe power down functions Positive messages D amp T Video signal ok on This message is written if a valid video signal was detected following a video signal error for video input x 8 8 Configuring data transmission devices The next section explains how to set up devices for transmitting data using selected examples 8 8 1 Analogue dial up modem Creatix V 90 The Creatix V 90 modem is an external adapter for analogue dial up It can be used on the side of both the receiver P
426. rint Clipboard W Select all Start End 2011 05 09 2011 06 08 Restricting the time window Once you have disabled the Select all option you can limit the Time window using the date and time settings for Start and End Changes to the date and time have a direct effect on the number of events displayed Note To limit the number of events the Filter and Time window functions can be combined Searching in the logfile Using the Search function you can search for event texts in large logfiles To do this enter the search term into the input window Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard Power off Whole word Search from start Seach next Clear Search next With the Search next button you start a search from the current cursor position within the logfile or continue a search The search stops at every search term found A counter underneath the button shows how many hits there are Event texts that contain a hit are highlighted in dark blue A change to the search criteria clears the display of the hits Clear Clicking the Clear button removes the current search term from the input window The display of the number of hits is cleared at the same time Whole word If the Whole word option is enabled you restrict the search to a term that must match the search term as a whole word 27769 02 49 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Search from If the Search from start option is enabled
427. ritten Using this configuration the video system allows up to 2 000 000 transactions of the Soyal Card Reader to be logged Note For recording Soyal data only the first POS ATM IBIS data track can be used If you reduce the track size of this data track you can assign free percentage values to additional tracks proportionately and use these where necessary to record POS data The following Soyal data is recognised and can also be evaluated Armed status Time of the card reader Card ID Card Reader ID and Card valid invalid The Soyal data is accessed in the same way as ATM data The Set values for SOYAL recording button may be disabled greyed out Set values for SOYAL recording If necessary follow the information positioned to the right of the button and change the configuration for the Serial channel See Serial channel on page 212 27 69 _02 187 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 13 5 Keywords You can call up the Keywords dialogue window via the selection menu under the POS ATM IBIS node which is subordinate to Site archive This menu item is only available for devices of the CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer and CamDisc SVR series POS ATM Keywords Adapter Keyword POSZATM IBIS Keywords Adapter Audio Track settings E Video 1 in E Video 2 in E Video 3 in OK Cancel Site archive state Help
428. rm enable input ALARMO019 Alarm armed ALARM0020 Alarm disarmed Service calls ALARMO021 Routine call every 24 hours ALARMO022 HDD error message ALARMO0023 Automatic callback Tamper input ALARMO024 Tamper alarm contact Aux in1 Alarm triggered by Power on ALARM0025 Alarm message optional by switching on the video systems Alarm triggered by internal motion detection ALARMO0031 Motion alarm camera 1 to ALARMO040 Motion alarm camera 10 Alarm triggered by video loss ALARM004 1 Video loss camera 1 to ALARMO050 Video loss camera 10 Alarm triggered by serial control ALARMO051 Serial control triggered alarm camera 1 to ALARMOO060 Serial control triggered alarm camera 10 Alarm triggered by camera position authentication ALARMO07 1 Cam pos authentication camera 1 Camera position authentication to ALARMO080 Cam pos authentication camera 10 Alarm triggered by alarm panel ALARMO0081 Alarm panel triggered alarm camera 1 to ALARMOO90 Alarm panel triggered alarm camera 10 Tamper alarm ALARM0O11 1 Tamper alarm camera 1 or CIO adapter tamper alarm camera 1 switching variant normally closed BS 8418 to 2 8 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual ALARM0120 Tamper alarm camera 10 or CIO adapter tamper alarm camera 10 switching variant normally closed BS 8418 Note These camera specific tamper alarms are only trig
429. rm images can be stored for IP cameras This option is not enabled for these cameras Configuring recording Enabled Selecting Enabled allows you to activate recording for all desired cameras Interval s Determine the minimum interval between two images in the Interval s box Entering 0 seconds as the Interval results in maximum recording speed Note The interval between two images can be longer than specified in Interval s This depends on average picture size image quality and number of activate cameras Image quality and storage capacity Image quality All images are stored in the pre alarm archive with the pre set live image quality see Live video settings on page 141 Storage capacity The internal memory can hold about 1000 high quality images from a camera If you enable all 10 cameras therefore about 100 images can be saved per camera The actual number of stored images largely depends on image content and image quality Deleting the pre alarm archive The pre alarm archive is deleted if 164 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e the Pre alarm or Transmitter settings are re set e g after a change or e the device is switched off 27769 02 165 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 12 3 Pre Alarm viewer User interface The PreAlarmViewer is started automatically by the CamControl PRO software in case of an alarm and an available pre alarm archive A
430. rmats given to each respective user see User on page 80 The selection referred to above is only displayed where there is an authorisation for both types of evaluation 4 6 1 1 Evaluation with optimal functionality This extended access to the archive provides all CamControl PLAYER functions You can access the archive over a TCP IP connection using virtually all functions that are available when locally accessing a removable hard drive The access speed is limited by the bandwidth of the TCP IP connection File Picture Selecton Event View Statistic Audio Tools Info The menu bar has an additional symbol e in the top right hand corner indicating a network data transfer A rotating two colour ring in the online version of the CamControl PLAYER indicates the data transfer Evaluation with optimal functionality uses a discrete TCP IP port This port can be changed if necessary in the file CAMCTRL INI See TCP IP port for Evaluation with optimal functionality on page 257 27769 02 35 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Note If you select Evaluation with optimal functionality archive evaluation always takes place using the maximum available bandwidth of the connection The bandwidth limit programmed in the device see Maximum transmission speed on page 131 is ignored when this function is selected If necessary select Evaluation with optimal speed see Evaluation with optimal speed on page 36 since
431. rocess ends End the uninstallation by selecting OK 8 11 Specification of the control inputs Besides the conventional wiring of the following control inputs as normally closed contact and normally open contact CamServer 2c and the video systems of the VG series also support the voltage monitored circuit variants resistance monitoring 10k and the BS 8418 compliant normally closed contact Normally opened e Normally opened A Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normally closed BS 6418 Standard switching for control inputs The CamDisc VG 4c has a number of control inputs Al a d Control in1 Control in2 Aux in However these inputs are not galvanically isolated from the operating voltage of the device Depending on the configuration these can be activated by Normally closed or Normally opened contacts Note The control inputs must always be activated such that they are potential free Input circuits of control inputs Activation with Activation with Normally closed Normally opened Circuit Circuit external internal external internal Ub 5V Ub 5V 1 5 kQ de 312 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Wiring variants for voltage monitored control inputs In addition to standard wiring of control inputs the related Video Gateways permit different types of voltage monitoring Normally terminated 10k The wiring variant Norm
432. rol PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Transmitter list does not 1 Faulty receiver 1 Receiver settings Port A to appear setting D 2 Null modem cable is Activate TCP IP depending connected on the remote communication device being used or set the Mode to normal Connect the modem ISDN TA using the original model cable Dial button is deactivated Incorrect configuration Receiver settings Port A to D Activate TCP IP depending on the remote communication device being used or set the Mode to normal Errors Faults sorted by Type of Transmission No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Please read the section for your application or for the type of data transmission you are using Analogue Operating an analogue dial modem at your PC page 320 ISDN ISDN card or external ISDN TA page 321 TCP IP Connection via local network cards page 322 Analogue Telephone Network After you have excluded general sources of error see General Errors Faults on page 319 and your PC is obviously able to communicate with the connected modem Checking the Modem with a Telephone Please check your analog
433. rol inputs are used they have to be activated in their menu Motion will be activated automatically If a camera input is linked with motion this will result in triple knock If double knock is combined with another PIR this PIR must be enabled in the PIR list It is not necessary to activate the PIR detail Alarm events F1 gt for help Alarm FIR 1 Creep zone ch 1 Camera 2 95 00 K eee In case of an alarm event CamControl PRO will display a detailed alarm information in the status line This message will contain the PIR number Address the alarm detail of the PIR and the associated camera 27 69 _02 251 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Presets using IP cameras Recorder settings SFY9U1U1 j T IP Camera DI l e Device User Manufacturer Protocol IP address gt xtralis Date amp Time Connection Configure Camera sett Hang up Camera gral AXIS Type 1 Motion Privacy zoni View Alarms User Site archive ti lt i CS C Audio Relays Password PTZ control Serial chant Video out Alarm panel Number of Presets Video format Motion Server Port Log file tr Extras 4 JPEG 7777 E Upload Dd Firmware up IP Camera Corfigwatewith Browser PIR OK Cancel fdhaGSAclevwveqbaeqb fate Generic GET command 2 vow fdhaGSAclevwvegbaeqb paca
434. roups x Name Seti number CamDisc HNVR 10 1 IP NV 900444 CamDisc HNVR 10 1 ISDN N 900444 CamDisc SYR10 1 IP CV 651028 CamDisc SYR10 1 ISDN CV 651028 If necessary please check these entries for a valid user name and a valid password Accidentally created multiple entries should also be deleted or corrected where necessary 116 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and VG devices CamControl PRO is a tool that allows you to configure CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR simply and conveniently The type of transmitter device you have switched on is detected automatically and simple dialogue boxes help you configure the specific features of each device All settings are stored in the transmitter and can be recovered in the event of power failure Notes CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR transmitters are each available with four or ten camera inputs e CamDisc SVR devices unlike CamTel SVR transmitters have a hard disk for local image archiving Once a connection has been established to a CamDisc SVR you can access the image archive on the local hard disk by clicking Site Archive in the central control panel provided you have the relevant user permissions see User on page 123 The Site Archive menu item see Site archive only CamDisc VGHNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG and CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and
435. rror image has been successfully backed up its complete path is displayed The first time a mirror image is backed up CamControl PRO creates the sub folder SVR_IMAGES in the program directory 229 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 23 Firmware update The Firmware update tab gives you the option to update the device firmware If the menu item Firmware update is not available in the selection list this may be due to one of the following Causes e CamControl PRO is not at version 3 65 or later e There is no DEVICEUPDATES subdirectory e Nocorresponding firmware for the selected device type is available in the DEVICEUPDATES directory Before carrying out a firmware update you must disconnect the existing connection to the device so that any configurations previously set up and already sent to your HeiTel video system are permanently saved Current firmware The current firmware at the time of creating your CamControl PRO software is integrated into the Setup file Information about the current firmware status and links to download firmware files are available on our website at http www heitel com en service upgrades firmware After downloading save the firmware in the DEVICEUPDATES subdirectory of your CamControl PRO software This ensures that the corresponding file is available for a firmware update Firmware update Firmware update FIRMWARE 01 56 ALL 01 56 ALL 01 58 JV Update devic
436. rt over which your video system communicates with the corresponding IP cameras for camera Video Motion Detection VMD The concerned IP cameras are marked with the abbreviation VMD in the IP camera list See Help button for retrieving the IP camera list on page 240 Please note that the camera VMD feature is not always available on all IP camera models For an overview of IP ports used by CamControl PRO click on the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on Page 253 242 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Configure with Click the Configure with Browser button to open the Web interface of Browser your IP camera in the standard Web browser To enable this the previously defined IP address or the symbolic name entered is transferred to the Web browser as shown in the following examples e http 192 168 31 223 e http ipcam01 your_domain com Note An IP camera can only be configured via the Web browser if it can be reached directly from the receiver PC If only the HeiTel device can be reached directly and if the IP camera is located in a local network that this device can reach access from the receiver PC via a Web browser is not possible If the receiver PC is also located in this local network access to the IP camera is also generally possible via the Web browser Click OK to save the User name and Password in the HeiTel device If you have additionally selected a Number of Presets for an I
437. s Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms H Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Cancel Site archive state Help The version number provides information on the version status of the ISDN Card or PSTN Card Note If no ISDN Card or PSTN Card is installed instead of displaying the version number you will receive the following notification No internal ISDN TA or Modem installed Enter your MSN Multiple Subscriber Number in the MSN box This is a telephone number without prefix used to dial into the transmitter If this box is blank the MSN in the internal ISDN TA module will be deleted The associated AT and dial commands will be assigned automatically so that no further ISDN TA initialisation is required When using the PSTN Card no entry is provided in this field Reset Adapter Every This drop down list menu allows you to specify how often you want to reset the internal ISDN adapter Certain installations may require the ISDN TA to be reset at periodic intervals in order to ensure the availability of the device Please note that this interval is reset after each connection and that the adapter cannot be reset during active connections 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 7 4 5 Phone and IP numbers One of the most important features of HeiTel image transmission systems is their ability to automatically establish successively conn
438. s POS function for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer With CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer devices you can use the serial channel as well as an input for transaction data in POS mode see POS ATM IBIS on page 184 POS recording Recording protocols CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer protocols devices use the HYDRA protocol from AVE ora simple serial line protocol with lt CR gt carriage return as the end of line identifier to record POS data The HYDRA protocol operates on a POS camera selective basis Only camera 1 is used for the line protocol CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer selects the protocol automatically Every line may contain 57 characters You can configure line length in the POS ATM IBIS see POS ATM IBIS on page 184 tab while keywords are set in the same named tab see Keywords on page 188 Note To operate the HeiTel POS ATM Adapter the configuration of the serial interface for the POS function is not relevant as the POS ATM Adapter communicates exclusively via network connections with your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer see Adapter on page 188 IBIS function with Cam4mobile The IBIS function was primarily designed for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG devices The Cam4mobile is connected via the IBIS Adapter with your vehicle s IBIS vehicle bus Configuration of IBIS The IBIS function serves to synchronise date and clock time of HeiTel devices with the IBIS vehicle
439. s the recording quality cannot be adjusted using the function described above Generally speaking image size and format can be adjusted with IP cameras via an integrated configuration menu In exceptional cases these parameters can be adjusted via a Generic GET command see Generic GET commands on page 243 Conditional refresh Conditional refresh mode only requires the differences between successive images to display the full image In many cases only parts of a scene changes Certain areas of the image such as a background wall do not change at all or only very little e g due to changes in lighting Recording in this way often requires less than half the hard disk storage capacity of working with full images which in turn increases recording speed by up to twice as much in some cases Select On to increase recording capacity and speed Note Conditional refresh mode applies to all cameras and therefore to all hard disk tracks IP cameras When IP cameras record images the following conditions apply e CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Images are recorded depending on the programming for the conditional refresh mode Image size and format depend on the IP camera e CamDisc VG CamDisc VGs CamServer VG Cam4mobile VG CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs CamServer Cam4mobile e The recording of images by analogue cameras depends on the programming for the conditional refresh mode e Image recording by IP cameras always takes place as fu
440. s logo test you can skip this by selecting Continue Anyway a 1 pele JA CUNY mam eel 6 Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated diver software for your device Install this driver software anyway Only install dover software obtained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software frorn other sources may harm your computer or steal information wW See details Step 7 After the driver has been successfully installed you will see a final dialogue box Complete the driver installation by selecting Finish Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the dver software for thes device Video Gateway USB Remote NDI Network Gadget 27769 02 307 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Driver installation in Windows Vista Depended from firmware and software version you are requested to install an USB driver after having plugged in the USB cable Follow the instructions in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 295 Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions A reconnection of the USB cable might be necessary after having run the
441. s not necessary since the device updates the PIR list latest after 60s Delete packet errors This button deletes packet and time outs errors These errors are set to zero also when the device reboots A limited number of these errors seem to be normal When pressing the info button the PIR state of the marked PIR is shown in an additional PIR state window see below PIR State Window The PIR state Windows shows the state of the PIR marked in the PIR list Active events are shown in red color Events that are not supported by this PIR are shown greyed Any change will be displayed automatically When another entry will be selected in the PIR list the window will be actualized with its data 2014 03 31 18 38 r PIR state 1 PRO 18H J Port 5555 gt General alarm Relay PIF state z Alarm infrared 0 0 001 00001 4 0x00000000 ao oo eo oc G amp G 1 4 Delete packet errors 1 0 Cover Vandalism Alarm rejection Heating system error Detector in startup phase Power failure olinput1 0001 Presence PIF lost PIR Details Using this control elements allows to configure the PIR in detail that is actually marked in the PIR list 1 PRO E 18WH IR867 Tamper Presence oft Ott 4 oft f f f V General Of oft ott Camera Preset Ey 3 Of D Double knock General lt gt Camera control input 1 0001 In this caption line the PIR number that represent the PIR ad
442. s setting has no effect on tours The automatic processing of alarms remain unaffected e If you select the Ten screen viewing mode for the initial view the Ten viewing mode will only appear as the initial view for transmitters with ten camera inputs The connection will be opened in Quadscreen viewing mode for transmitters with fewer camera inputs Predefined cameras In the Predefined cameras area you define the camera number s that are to be displayed once the connection has been established in the selected mode of operation respectively e Mainscreen amp Fullscreen Select a camera using the pull down menu e Quadscreen Select four cameras using the pull down menu These settings correspond to the parameters in the configuration file CAMCTRL INI in the section ONLINESCR see View during active connection ONLINESCR on page 257 Applications window By activating the option Application as on top window you ensure that CamControl PRO is always kept in the foreground USB Transmitter index with USB Node Activating the Transmitter index with USB Node option causes the CamControl PROsoftware to display the USB direct connection node in the transmitter directory see USB node and device grouping on page 96 The USB direct connection is used to select HeiTel devices that are connected via a USB cable with the receiver PC Note Please note that a corresponding device driver must be installed for the USB interface con
443. same transmitter name several times IP address Phone Enter the complete telephone number or IP address of the new number dial prefix transmitter in this box Telephone number No letters or special characters should be entered in this box when a connection is established over a telephone line Only in exceptional cases may it be useful to include a modem or dialling control character such as a dialling pause in the telephone number IP address You must include the associated separators when entering an IP address e g 123 123 123 123 27769 02 99 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 100 Port number Symbolic IP addresses Prefix 1 Prefix 2 Serial number Automatic passwords You can also enter a port number at the end of the IP address e g 123 123 123 123 5000 CamControl PRO will then establish a connection using this IP address and the port number indicated This function together with a router that forwards external calls to the unit in question via assigned port numbers allows you dial into different transmitters at a single IP address Symbolic IP addresses can also be entered in this box For the system to recognise the entry as asymbolic IP address the entry must start with three dots e g www yourdomain com This box can contain up to 59 characters The symbolic IP addresses can also be completed by adding a port number e g www yourdomain com 5000 Note
444. select the directory where the receiving software is already installed To continue click Next If you would like to select a different folder click Browse Browse At least 1 1 MB of free disk space is required lt Back Cancel 4 Select the display mode for the GPS Data Viewer e Google Earth e Open Street Map 27769 02 309 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 6 Setup GPS Data iewer 2 5 x Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed M Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing GPS Data Viewer then click Next Select the mode Google Earth O an must install aoe Earth for this mode you will find it at ae wivrerermrvarrrrierire citeine r rt rirtiirt i tree rir er ree eeee ete irrnns C epee Street ne EZEN 5 Before beginning installation of the files you will be shown a summary of the previously selected options Select Install to start the copy process i Setup GPS Data Yiewer Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing GPS Data Viewer on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location a C CCPRO Additional tasks Select the mode Google Earth You must install Google Earth for this mode you will find it at http earth google cor Bs i Cancel la xl
445. settings Passwords HDD POS ATM Audio Track settings Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recordin Cancel Site archive state Help CamControl PRO Software Manual Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 M Use easy mode a Closed Contact status Opening Edge Open Permanent v m fi li i Closing Edge Rec method trigger hai 10 Recording intervall s Number of images Record Don t record Note If the Event recording always enabled function is used see Combined continuous and event recording on page 193 the extended configuration of the continuous recording can only be set to a limited degree A control input is assigned to each connected camera i e each video input This control input controls image recording in detail It can assume two states and can therefore report two changes This results in the following situations with regard to contact status State Input is closed i e switched to ground Opening Edge State change Input has been opened A change from Closed to Open has occurred Open State The input is open unswitched Closing Edge State change Input has been closed A change from Open to Closed has occurred Configuring continuous recording Continuous recording without external switching Video images can be recorded without con
446. smission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 3 Dial up connection with internal ISDN card or LAN CAPI quick start Connection e Install your internal ISDN card in your computer in line with the manufacturer s instructions and then install the drivers with CAPI support If using LAN CAPI install the driver for this type of CAPI support on your computer Requirements Due to the fact that CamControl PRO cannot use internal ISDN cards and LAN CAPI applications directly via CAPI you must use a special driver for virtual COM ports see Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers on page 293 Assign your communication device a virtual COM port 27769 02 13 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Configuration Start CamControl PRO and click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens In the Options list click one of the connection channels for example Port A Deactivate the TCP IP option if necessary From the dropdown list in the Modem group select Mode Normal From the Port drop down list select the COM port to which you connected CAPI as a virtual COM port From the Baud drop down list select a suitable serial transmission speed 115200 Baud In the Init prefix field you can enter an AT command to initialise your virtual modem see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 In the Prefix 1 field enter ATD Then click OK The dialogue box closes and the
447. splays the calculated result for the date and time of the image Time for the device transmission system taking into account the selected time zone and automatically adjusted summer winter time as the case may be Set recorder to PC If you want to set the internal clock of your digital image transmission time system select Set recorder to PC time Once you exit setup by clicking OK and the settings are transferred to the device the device time will be synchronised with the receiver PC time taking the selected time zones into consideration Note Ensure that the time on the receiver PC time is correct if you are synchronising your transmitter with it Summer time settings Select Set automatically to summer time if you want the internal clock to be adjusted to the selected summer time automatically You can select the location of the transmitter from the drop down list Note If time synchronization can take place via alarm panel or IBIS the device internal automatic summer winter time changeover is not carried out see Summer time settings on page 126 Time alignment via NTP Time Server NTP HeiTel video systems can be set for an automatic time alignment via the NTP Time Server NTP means Network Time Protocol and is a standard for aligning the clocks of computer systems in network environments minimum requirement CamContro l PRO V3 88 and device firmware 1 88 126 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO S
448. st click Extras Check in the USB section whether the option Transmitter index with USB node is activated or switch it where necessary to be active Then click on the OK button Standard settings for the USB direct connection The USB direct connection is made available upon activation at the top of the list in the transmitter index of the CamControl LITE PRO software The default data for this transmitter data is as follows and cannot be changed e Transmitter name USB direct connection e P address and port 192 168 138 95 3000 This connection data cannot be changed If a non standard port number has been used in the transmitter e g 3001 an additional entry for USB connection will need to be added The IP address would be 192 168 138 95 3001 Please note the network settings of your device and consult the product guide if necessary Additional USB connection Only one HeiTel device can be connected to a receiver PC via a USB connection at any one time This is because the device IP address for the USB connection is always 192 168 138 95 and cannot be changed Simultaneous use of two devices via USB will inevitably result in IP address conflicts Additional driver installation If you are trying to connect to your HeiTel device using the direct USB connection but using a different USB port on your PC Laptop Windows may require that the driver be loaded again particularly on XP 8 9 1 2 Requirements 1 PC Laptop with USB 2
449. switch the potential free control input V out to ground for at least 10 seconds To do so connect a push button with the relevant contacts on the back of the device Both procedures are equivalent in this case HOO safe power down functions Stop writing to HOD when Aux 2 was switched Timeout immediately Es Normally opened z J Stop writing to HDO when Y out was switched for 10s restart after 3 minutes or power off Write logfile entry Before the HDD is put into standby mode the device writes the logfile entry HDD deactivated including date and time HDD safe power down The HDD is put into standby mode and does not record any more data The video system signals this state by means of the flashing yellow video signal LEDs depending on the device type V1 V2 V4 V10 The device remains in this mode for 3 minutes e If you do not switch off the video system during this time after 3 minutes the HDD is reactivated and recording is started again according to the device programming In this state HDD in standby mode the device can be safely powered down without this hindering the functionality of the HDD Switching off the video Switch off the video system before removing or replacing the HDD When the HDD is in standby mode neither video data nor audio data where applicable is recorded Nor are any logfile entries written Additional functions of your video system will also be deactivated while the HDD is inacti
450. t be activated simultaneously If you select Connect a receiver is dialled whenever the state at the Arm Disarm input changes from armed to disarmed This depends on whether Normally opened or Normally closed is selected Normally opened Select Normally opened from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to be armed when the Arm Disarm input is closed 162 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis Normally closed A CamControl PRO Software Manual Select Normally closed from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to be armed when the Arm Disarm input is open Alarm input If configured accordingly a status change at the Alarm input designation on the video system Al in can cause your transmitter to establish a connection to a receiver PC or a control station As a rule image transmission starts with the image that triggered the alarm Then camera 1 will be switched on Normally opened n a Normally closed A Alarm only when trigger level stable for x s seconds Tamper input Select Connect to enable the alarm function Select Normally opened or Normally closed to specify which input state will trigger the alarm _ _ Normally opened Select Normally opened from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver when the Alarm input is closed Select Normally closed from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver wh
451. t recording For event triggered recording the associated camera is switched to the video output if triggered Continuous recording For continuous recording four status changes can cause switching to another camera e The image recording input is closed Switched to ground and Motion Motion or Motion has been selected in the Closed drop down list Once a movement is detected the transmitter switches to the corresponding video input If motion is detected at different cameras the camera with the highest number is switched example motion for edge recording on camera 1 and camera 3 camera 3 will be switched to the monitor output e The Opening Edge drop down list is set to On to record images when the closed recording input is opened Once this happens the relevant camera is switched to the monitor output e The recording input is open and Motion Motion or Motion is selected in the Open drop down list Once a movement is detected the transmitter switches to the corresponding video input If motion is detected at different cameras the camera with the highest number is switched example motion for edge recording on camera 1 and camera 3 camera 3 will be switched to the monitor output e The Closing Edge drop down list is set to On to record pictures when the open recording input is closed Once this happens the relevant camera is switched to the monitor output 7 18 0 3 Camera of last recording Displaying image reco
452. t the TCP IP option Then click OK Enter telephone number e Click Dial The Transmitter index opens Click Add The Transmitter data dialogue box now opens Give your transmitter a name in the Transmitter name field In the IP address Telephone number dial prefix field enter the IP address of a HeiTel compatible transmitter e g IP address 62 214 6 11 or symbolic IP address camdisc1 svr10 demo heitel com Make sure to separate the individual fields of the IP address with dots If you are using a symbolic IP address there must be three dots before the address Now confirm your details with OK The Transmitter data dialogue box closes and you find yourself back in the Transmitter index Connection e The Transmitter index is still open The desired transmitter is highlighted in the Transmitter list Now click Dial The software starts to establish a connection 14 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Online e Once a remote connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 5 Connecting via the USB connection quick start Requirements e In order to be able to operate a HeiTel transmitter only CamDisc VG 4 and 10 CamTel VG 4 and 10 or Cam4mobile VG 4 and 10 using a USB link you need a PC with a USB connection and the driver which has been supplied needs to be installed see Installa
453. t you specify for the corresponding connection duration connection channel also applies to tours and automatically processed alarms see Maximum connection duration on page 90 Alternatively this setting can be defined using the configuration file CAMCTRL INI see Maximum connection duration on page 258 Camera 1 10 In these boxes you can specify the number of video images that you want to receive from each camera In such a way you can weight the cameras differently Example in the In the configuration illustrated the Building transmitter is one of the dialogue box transmitters in Tour 001 Tour 001 is carried out on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday and Friday starting at 11 55 When connected to the Building transmitter two images will be received and archived from Camera 1 four from Camera 2 two from Camera 3 and ten from Camera 5 This procedure will be repeated until a Time limit of connection of 10 minutes has elapsed and the connection is closed Minimum If the Time limit of connection is 0 minutes the specified number of connection duration images would be received and archived from the relevant cameras once Then the connection would be closed Notes on tours CamControl PRO can only carry out tours if the software is not blocked from doing so in Receiver options and if the port selected for tours is not occupied by another connection Note CamControl PRO does not support any tours for transmitters
454. tadeosemeusdutdsmassdencidaneesees 83 6 5 PC Archive nc oc2cc6c5 5 ioide tent ate eh Aah teats neue ele Lhe dee LLALL oaaao nonan 84 6 6 PornAto Porn Dor Porn 110 POM 9 sirsie isis sede BL ctl ee Coulee 1h 87 O7 2Seiial Channel sesir eaa a e aA e a 92 OO TOU eae T EE TTE EEES 93 6 9 Configuring the transmitter index 2 2 22 2 e cece eee cence eee ec eeeeeeeees 96 7 Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and VG devices 2 2 2 2 22 clei cece cece cece cece cece ee eeeeeeseeseees 117 fs OOOO eee ee ee ee ae ee TE eee tone ee 122 Te ROG ra espe eee Gate at see eee tals basa ese cease cea ote me niaaes 123 725 gt Dave am MMe seiren aa ten seed te eta ceueutaeiaen e eaS 126 TA COMMECHONS se i5 2 oi 3 see a sat noe oa ca hth it RESTR 129 Ao WCAMeha SCUNAGS redness ae ae leer arp usaten alah oe ste lye atu peau diccta Dede Seu Od tee 146 LO Camera Glows 5 orcas cept ae ee navi tomatic nace 147 7 7 Motion analogue cameras 2 0 cee ec cece cc ceccecccecccecccecceeceeeceeees 148 7 8 Motion detection zones analogue cameras _ 2 22 2 0e eee eee ceeceeeeeee 150 7 9 Privacy zones analogue cameras 2 2 2022 cee eee ee eee cece ceeccceeceeeeeees 151 7 10 Analytics Allocating IntrusionTrace Licenses 2 22 222 222 eee eee 154 7 11 Analytics IntrusionTrace Configuration 0 20 22 c eee eee eee e cece ce eeees 155 FAZ A e eee Roe ak
455. tain connection channels are configured in such a way that they use neither a dial up nora TCP IP connection but instead are connected to a transmitter either via the HeiTel specific null modem cable or via a dedicated line see Port A to Port D or Port 1 to Port 9 on page 87 the Transmitter index dialogue box does not open before the connection is established because it is not needed for direct connections To establish a connection to a transmitter click Port A Port B Port C Port D Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 or Port 9 Select the desired transmitter from the alphabetically sorted Transmitter list in the Transmitter index dialogue box T Demo CamDisc evr 0 1 IF FH Demo CamDise svr 0 1 ISDN Demo CamDise sv 10 2 1P PTZ Sas Demo CamDise sv10 21SDN PTZ ERE Demo CamDise svd 4 IP POS 7 Demo CamDise svi4 4 1SDN POS Dema CamDise srg s H3 IF H Demo CamDisc svr s 3 ISDN FH Demo CamTel svi 1 IP I Demo CamTel evr10 H ISDN ERE Demo CamTel svr10 2 IP Demo CamTel svrl0 2 ISDN p TE Demo CamTel evrd 3 1P EE Demo CamTel svr4 3 ISDN Se Demo CamTel svr 4 IP L R Dema CamTel surd tt ISAM x Modify Add Delete Cancel Select the transmitter you want to connect to from the transmitter list in the Transmitter index dialogue box Clicking Dial initiates a call to the selected transmitter Double clicking the desired transmitter entry also initiates dialing If you click the triangle next to t
456. tandby mode before the device is switched off The standby mode for the HDD is activated by switching off the vehicle ignition taking into account the programmed delay before switching off Write logfile entry Before the HDD is put into standby mode the device writes the logfile entry HDD deactivated including date and time 27769 02 183 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis HDD safe power down The HDD is put into standby mode and does not record any more data The video system signals this state by means of the flashing yellow video signal LEDs depending on the device type V1 V4 V10 The device remains in this mode for as long as it remains activated via the switched off vehicle ignition e If activation is interrupted by switching on the vehicle ignition the HDD is reactivated and recording is restarted in accordance with the device programming Independently of this the HDD remains in standby mode for at least 10 seconds Automatic switch off The Cam4mobile device is switched off once the device internal delay to of the video system switch off has expired Note When the HDD is in standby mode neither video data nor audio data where applicable is recorded Nor are any logfile entries written Additional functions of your video system will also be deactivated while the HDD is inactive such as for example the set up of alarm and receiver connections Safe powering down of the CamServer 2c or safe removal of
457. ter x weeks With the Password expires after x weeks option you specify the term of validity for user passwords The term of validity can be between 1 and 52 weeks The standard setting is 12 weeks Warning x days in advance In addition you can define how many days in advance you wish to be informed of the expiry of the relevant password The prior warning can be between 0 and 14 days The standard setting is 3 days If this function is added to HeiTel video systems with existing users via a firmware update firmware 1 88 or later for the first time the users must be newly created or their password will have to be changed alternatively in order to save a valid reference date in the device Warning window on expiry of a password s term of validity CamDisc HN R 11 N 900444 X The user password of demo expires in amp days Current password New password Confirm password Ehange The above dialogue box informs you where applicable once after every connection on the expiry of a user password s term of validity To change the user password the current password a new password and a repetition of this password as confirmation is required If the new password and confirmation differ a relevant warning is displayed Only on correct entry in the three text boxes is the Change button activated in order to change a password The password can either be changed via this dialogue or alternatively users with authoris
458. the device Next connect the other end of the USB cable with a corresponding socket on your receiver PC only after you have switched the PC on As soon as your device is ready the hardware assistant automatically displays a welcome dialogue Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device Click Next to continue ck lt Ba Select the option No not this time and confirm the selection with Next gt 296 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Step 3 In the following dialogue screen select the option Install from a list or specific location Advanced Confirm your selection with Next gt Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for RNDIS Ethernet Gadget If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue coos Step 4 In this dialogue screen select the options Search for the best driver in these
459. the entry Data not available Transmitter name see Event list on page 22 The following illustration shows you an excerpt from the CC4LOG TXT event file The entry highlighted in pink for illustrative purposes indicates the failed attempt to reach the Parking site transmitter during a tour because it is no longer in the transmitter list P CC4L0G Editor Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht 14 54 03 CamDisc svr 10 1 cv500006 Oonline Timer 4 54 14 CamDisc swr 10 1 cv50 offline ng site online sTimer ine v 1 0006 14 54 21 Data not available Parki 14 54 23 CcamDisc svr 4 2 ca5s00003 14 54 25 CamDisc svr 4 2 ca5s00003 off The drop down list above the Delete button contains transmitters to be called during the currently selected tour If you don t want a transmitter to be in the tour anymore then select it in this list and then click Delete 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Transmitter specific tours The following fields are configured separately for each transmitter in a tour In such a way you can receive a different number of live images from different cameras from various transmitters Time limit of In the Time limit of connection box enter the maximum duration of the connection connection 0 999 minutes for the selected transmitter list above the Delete button When this period of time has passed the connection is closed immediately Maximum The maximum connection duration tha
460. the internal network adapter You can integrate the digital image transmission system into your local network e g company intranet or a higher level network e g Internet using the adapter Please note the special features concerning the two network interfaces of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR see Special network configuration with CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 133 Recorder settings x Device User Date amp Time H Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HT connect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Cancel Site archive state Help Network TCP IP External modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_4 gt 100 MBit 00 30 26 16 cc 1c Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Maxi t at Maximum transmission speed gt 400 KBs 3 13 MBit s Latta 3 MBit s J Web Server Automatic disconnect after fio min x Port 80 IV Web API J LAN auto detection support Information field with details of the maximum transmission speed of the network interface and the MAC address 27769 02 129 CamControl PRO Software Manual 130 Obtai
461. the transmitter list TELEFON INI The additional storage of Username and Password as part of the transmitter data see Username amp Password on page 101 requires a different saving of these data If these data were formerly saved in TELEFON INI they are saved now in TELEDATA DAT Note Transfer of the TELEFON INI The TELEDATA DAT may under no circumstances be manipulated If in the CamControl PRO program directory no TELEDATA DAT file is found then the receiving software will provide the option to import the data from of the TELEFON INI file available in this program directory Click the button PORT 1 in order to open the transmitter directory A dialogue window will offer you the opportunity to import the data from an existing TELEFON INI using OK With Cancel the import is stopped and an empty transmitter directory is displayed 27769 02 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Attention ee Do you want bo import the old TELEFON IMI Cancel 10 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 4 Working with CamControl PRO CamControl PRO is a further development of CamControl LITE with additional functions The software therefore meets more demanding requirements particularly in the professional operation of security or control centres CamControl PRO HeiTel Digital Video GmbH Heilel Digital Video USA Corp www heltel com www heltel_com info heitel com infoUSA heitel com
462. the width values listed in the table the program window is displayed in 4 3 format Window size selected WIDTH 1920 program window width by width and height H E1GHT 1080 program window height e Range e forWIDTH gt 1280 e for HEIGHT gt 767 e If the program window size is defined by the width and height values the program window can be adjusted to other monitor formats Layout of side ROWS 4 number of rows of the side windows windows via rows and COLUMNS 2 number of columns of the side windows columns Range e for ROWS 2 1 e for COLUMNS 21 Dependent on the number of side windows the software will automatically arrange them For another layout the ROWS COLUMNS values can be used Window position XPOS 0 Horizontal positioning of the program window YPOS 0 Vertical positioning of the program window e XPOS This entry lets you define a horizontal displacement of the application e YPOS This entry lets you define a vertical displacement of the application e The position 0 0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the first monitor 27769 _02 267 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 4 9 Audio mode AUDIO Classic audio mode MODE 0 Set audio mode to classic display e Range O off 1 o0n default e In classic audio mode the Push to talk button is no longer available The Listening and Speaking buttons are available in this mode see Audio transmission on page 60 8 2 4
463. ther the transmitter in question has an R02 file and if this is the case accesses it You can use the R02 files to specify the images you want to be recorded in the event of an alarm You can specify various recordings for various alarm messages You can define a separate section with specific commands for each alarm message Headings in square brackets mark the beginning of the sections in the R02 file You can define the following sections Differentiating between alarm calls General alarm ALARMOOOO0 General or unspecific alarm Alarm triggered by camera control input ALARMO001 Alarm indicator camera 1 to ALARMO010 Alarm indicator camera 10 Tamper alarm ALARMO01 1 Tamper alarm general alarm input contact Al in switching variant normally closed BS 8418 to ALARMO013 Tamper alarm general alarm input contact Aux in1 switching variant normally closed BS 8418 Note These camera specific tamper alarms are only triggered by tamper of the related detector line for camera detector inputs CIO adapter CamServer 2c VG device series which have been wired and parameterised in conformity with BS8418 normally closed BS 8418 Independent of the alarm enabling state of the video system an alarm will always be output in case of tamper 27769 02 277 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Alarm input ALARMO001 7 Alarm general alarm input contact Al in Alarm enable input ALARMO018 Change at ala
464. this function takes the bandwidth limit into account 4 6 1 2 Evaluation with optimal speed When you select this option the following classic evaluation dialogue opens Transmitter archive CamDise swr i0 1 x 25 November 2005 14 00 00 0g O10 OO Pre rrr rere rer rrr errr a o LA Petals bathed Ee oa 5g ad Q So Q s Ee E 1 Camera 1 os EE Transaction data bai O Continuous recording ae E 2 Camera 2 ua Continuous recording Ee 3 Camera 3 ME Gs Continuous recording 5 4 Camera 4 a ts Continuous recording Et 5 Camera 5 io B g Continuous recording et 6 Camera 6 poo he i gt Continuous recording T Camera 7 ine Eb Continuous recording r 8 Camera 8 i ok i gt Continuous recording z 9 Camera 9 foie h Continuous recording E a Bangi 10 Classic evaluation dialogue Once you have established a connection to your transmitter in the main panel you can open the Transmitter archive dialogue box by clicking SE CnIvE CamControl PRO first loads the event list The Transmitter archive is divided into two areas The top section contains functions for navigating the extensive archive The middle section contains the archive tree with camera track nodes and a breakdown according to recording type for each camera track Nodes for recorded transaction data of POS systems can also be shown Notes on archive access In conditional refresh mode paging backwards is signific
465. tings 7 1 Device Recorder settings x Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Version 01 68 Camera groups Motion detection zones Serial number C 547015 Privacy zones Alarms MAC address 00 30 26 15 be Of Site archive Audio Device name CamDise svrl0 1 Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Download Firmware update OK Cancel Site archive state Help Version The version number of your device s firmware is displayed here This number allows you to verify that your device is up to date Current firmware versions can be found on our website organised by device type e CamTel VG 4 CamTel VG 10 CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4c CamServer VG 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s Cam4mobile VG 4c www heitel com e CamDisc VG HNVR www heitel com e CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 Cam4mobile 10 www heitel com e CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c www heitel com e CamDisc HNVR 10 www heitel com In addition the firmware versions current at the time of your version of CamControl PRO was released are available in the subdirectory DEVICEUPDATES To perform a firmware update please use the Firmware update dialogue see Firmware update on page 230 Serial number Every transmitt
466. tinuous and event recording works The Event recording always enabled function enables contact controlled recording of events For control purposes only the input contact is required for the relevant camera track for example Control in1 for Camera track 1 e If in accordance with the timer settings See Timer operation on page 194 a continuous recording takes place or no recording at all event recording is started by triggering the relevant input contact 27769 02 193 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis e No pre alarm images are recorded for these events The image sequence consists only of alarm image and post alarm images e The trigger level Normally opened or Normally closed is specified in Event recording Trigger via contact e f necessary continuous recording takes place only when the switching state of the input contact is inactive e f event recording is to take place in accordance with the timer settings see Timer operation on page 194 full event recording including pre alarm images will be started by triggering the relevant input contact Application example for a contact controlled switching Scenario Input circuits Timer operation In this example recording is to switch from continuous to event recording at the push of a button and an event for Camera track 1 triggered at the same time Activation with Normally opened Circuit Device contacts t Control in1
467. tion is checked Note If at the same time as the alarm Alarm call in case of reboot a notification of a defective missing hard drive is given the hard disk error alarm see Alarm call in case of defective hard disk on page 225 is handled first Hard Disk of Recorder defective Report again N If this option is selected the telephone number or IP address saved in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 139 is dialled if there are problems with the hard disk The receiver must confirm the message after a connection has been established If appropriate action has already been taken to check your CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer on site or you do not want to receive any further hard disk malfunction messages for another reason click Do not report again The error message will only appear again after you switch the device off and on again If you cannot take appropriate action to check your device on site right now or if you want to deal with the message at a later point in time click Report again The message will be displayed again after 6 minutes or your device will be dialled again if the connection has been closed in the meantime The call is saved in the event tree see Event tree on page 22 225 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Routine call every 24 hours Extra Use without hard disk driv
468. tion of the USB driver for HeiTel Video Gateways on page 294 Requirements CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamDisc HNVR e Inorder to be able to operate a HeiTel transmitter only CamDisc SVR 4s and 10s CamDisc HNVR CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 produced from 2009 onwards using a USB link you need a PC witha USB connection and the driver which has been supplied needs to be installed see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s on page 300 Requirements VG devices A requirement for USB operation with HeiTel Videogateways CamDisc SVR 4s and 10s serial no WS206xxx WV206xxx and higher CamDisc HNVR serial no NV206xxx and higher and CamServer 2c serial no WC211xxx and higher and CamServer 2 serial no WD206xxx and higher is aPC with a USB port and correctly installed USB driver see Installing the USB driver for the VG series on page 301 Configuration e Start CamControl PRO Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens Now in the Options list click Extras Check in the USB section whether the option Transmitter index with USB node is activated or switch it where necessary to be active Then click on the OK button Connect e Click onthe Port A or Port 1 button The Transmitter index opens In the top position on the Transmitter list you will find USB direct connection Select this and then click on the Sel
469. to 29 08 2005 Receiver archive CamControl PRO creates two corresponding files in the day directory for each call of the day in question These two files together constitute a valid receiver archive The files have the same time saved in the file name but they have different file endings Possible combinations include e HDA and HIA Alarm call e HDT and HIT Tour or timer call e HDR and HIR normal receiver call Note When backing up individual archives make sure that they each consist of two corresponding files You will always need these two files to access backed up archives Always save the two archive files together 5 1 1 Accessing receiver archive To access the PC receiver archive click pe CIES in the lower control panel A separate program window opens with the CAC O4 Archive Browser dialogue box in which you can select a specific archive The left hand side of the window shows the next higher level while the next lower level of the level selected on the left is shown on the right 27769 02 65 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Archive selection it Ti Loading an archive 66 EEE Tow jris zi 8a BEB o we BOOM E a CADH Archiv Briei r emilee wl al OS alne awd Ha OO UPUT ara If you select the archive node Transmitter the transmitters with transmitter name and serial number that have archive files in the receiver archive are shown on the right If no tr
470. to the filter clipboard without taking the filter function into consideration See Filtering the logfile on page 48 Note Please note that the symbols indicating the event type are converted into corresponding letters when copied to the clipboard see Filtering the logfile on page 48 50 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual 4 6 3 Pre recorded Audio Tracks CamControl PRO allows to transmit pre recorded audio tracks to a connected transmitter The transmitter will play these tracks on site 201 3 12 11 17 44 49 64 Hang up View Setup site Archive Log file Toggle to speaking 5 fdhaGSAclevwvegbdeqb Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Quadscreen Site Archive Setup Log file Relay 1 Relay 2 Audio tracks gt Alarm sound Alarm sound Help will arrive soon Original Help will arrive soon Leave building Leave building Hang up Notes e Upto 16 audio tracks are possible e The audio tracks must be stored in the subdirectory AudioTracks that is generated automatically during the installation of CC LITE e Incase CC LITE is used as CC Client within EMS v 1 70 or higher Audiotracks are provided via EMS DB and stored on the Server PC not in the sub directory AudioTracks The configuration must be done using the data management module e Audio tracks can be selected in the normal view lt main screen gt via a button located on the left panel e Audio
471. to the event tree there is also a list of events in file format Important events are permanently saved in this file thus making them available for subsequent analysis The event list with the file name CC4LOG TXT is located in the CamControl PRO program directory Note If you want to access the event list while CamControl PRO is running create a copy of CC4LOG TXT for further processing In such a way you prevent loss of data because as long as this file is being used exclusively by another program CamControl PRO cannot continue to add entries to the list The following events are logged together with time and date Program start with user name if available Program over with user name if available User change Connection start with transmitter name transmitter serial number and reason for connection if available e Online normal receiver call e Online Timer Tour e Online Alarm Alarm call triggered by alarm input e Online Alarm camera name Alarm call trigger by camera input or motion detection 22 27769 _02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual e Online Recall Transmitter callback e Online alarm enable input Change to the status of the alarm enable input e Connection closed e Offline All the entries in this list are saved in a unified Excel compatible format so that you can edit it using a text editor or import it into a spreadsheet 4 4 6 Transmitter specific information Transmitter specific informati
472. track in question see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 Recording is only possible if times for event recording have been defined in the timer for the track in question see Timer operation on page 194 Event trigger and Event size can be modified 196 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Recorder settings z Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Video settings Passwords HDD H POS 4TM Audio Track settings El Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recordin E Video 2 in o Cancel Site archive state Help Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Event trigger Trigger via contact Trigger via motion detection Trigger via serial command Off Motion bad On v IV Retrigger at E6 mu Event size Desired number of events 4500 Duration s Possible number Interval s of events Speed fps Number of images 1 Current allocated size for events 6 84 GB Estimated required size for events 5 69 GB Possibly there could be more than 4500 Events stored of the configured size Either re allocate disk space for another track or for continuous recording or increase the number of events Event trigger You can define how events are to be triggered for each connected
473. tray Icon eq shows that the application is running You can close it by clicking with the right mouse button on the tray icon and select Exit in the pop up menu If an pre alarm archive is available a new window does pop up and shows the pre alarm archive Up to 3 cameras are simultaneously shown depends on the device configuration The alarm camera is always the first playback starts automatically for it and the linked cameras will be added after the transmission of their pre alarm archives has started The window contains a control bar for archive evaluation at the bottom and there is also an pre alarm bar with slider available for graphical visualization and quick picture access green pre alarm area red alarm area yellow post alarm area corresponding frames around the camera pictures show also these areas To control individual cameras check or uncheck the Enabled checkbox next to the pre alarm bar i Alarm date time Gamera no and name Date time of actual shown picture i Picture no Picture count 210628 1203 06 Enabled 7 20 08 28 1405 03 Enabled avr i z ETAN Ki 4 Se i j i 7 F i First date time Y oF d hs Last date time i F Fa a jo f F Fa i F F i a gs f 1 an k k Fi Mi fi Alarm can af First picture Previous picture Start Stop playback Next picture Last picture f j fa y Fi j Pre alarm bar Slider Playbackspeed Loop playback Enable D
474. trol PRO CTPOSWIN INI C CamControl PRO FAVOURITES INF C CamControl PRO COMPRESSOR CFG C CamControl PRO RMCTRL YZxxxxxx R01 various files for controlling P T heads PTZ systems relay modules or similar C CamControl PRO RO2 Y Zxxxxxx RO02 various files for transmitter specific processing of alarm and service calls C CamControl PRO TRINFOS Y Zxxxxxxx INF C CamControl PRO DEVICEUPDATES BIN C CamControl PRO HELPFILES contains software guides where applicable and the file HLPINDEX INI C CamControl PRO Drivers contains device drivers where applicable C CamControl PRO ARCHIVE ARCHIVE contains further sub folders and files The program path C CamControl PRO is the default setting You can change it as you wish during software installation so it could be different for your application The receiver archive contains additional sub directories and files Before installing an update always back up the entire directory including subdirectories and files If your hard drive does not have sufficient space for a copy of the receiver archive you can also move the archive if necessary If the receiver archive is not a sub directory of the CamControl PRO program directory you do not have to back it up when updating see Archive directory on page 65 Once the configuration files of the previous installation have been applied the archive path used to date will be used for CamControl PRO Transfer of
475. trol PRO from a second PC If the receiver is reachable using this method data is of course not transmitted in this case and the connection is terminated after a short time then the error may be with the transmitter In this case please continue with Step 4 as follows see Error at Transmitter Outgoing Call Step 4 on page 327 Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Alarm call is not received 1 Incorrect modem 1 Check the modem init string error at the receiver end initialisation and add the AT command Incorrect receiver S0 0 when required settings Check whether the option PABX system automatic call acceptance requires an MSN or automatic operation is Second data device ticked in the Receiver accepts the call at Settings Call Acceptance the same SO bus box Allocate an MSN to the TA if the PABX system requires one Make sure that all additional data devices have been allocated an MSN To test this disconnect all other devices at the receiver end End of Step 3 ISDN network 9 5 3 Error at Transmitter Incoming Call Step 2 No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Please read the section for your application or for the ty
476. ttom list box 214 2 169_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Camera specific button panel Camera 1 You can use the camera specific button panel to control certain camera functions e g fixed positions and or to control the relays of the R16 adapter When a button is clicked it remains active for as long as the mouse button is pressed Different commands can be defined for pressing and releasing the button You can also specify how often you want the command to be repeated when the button is pressed in SWNUM Number of buttons range 1 to 16 SWNAMEx Button label max 20 characters SWCMDONx Command when the button is activated SWCMDOFFx Command when the button is deactivated SWT Repeat time for the command SWCMDONx Interval in 1 10 second This command is used for R16 adapter relays configured as momentaries Variables for global control elements Global control elements Light on Regardless of the camera selected these relevant control elements are shown to the right of the relay buttons of devices Up to 99 different functions can be controlled with the global control elements You can make the relevant entries for the list box and then have their corresponding commands activated deactivated with the button While the previous control elements are used on a camera specific basis the following variables apply to the section GRELAY NUMBER Number of entries in the list box r
477. twork TCP IP on page 129 Using the On option activate the receivers to which a HT connect connection is to be established by the transmitter For HTconnect connections invalid entries such as telephone numbers are greyed out No connection to these receivers can be made with HTconnect Camera settings The Camera settings tab allows you to make the following settings for transmission and recording for the individual cameras e Activation Camera name Brightness Contrast Colour In the case of CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Series devices without HYBRID Card 4 you can only program the Activation and Camera name options see Activation on page 146 146 Activation Camera name E Connections Device User Date amp Time Lamera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Download Firmware update OK Cancel Site archive state Help Recorder settings Camera settings Camera name 4 Contrast Camera 1 mr o oC Brightness merg Camera 2 b o Co o Camera 3 pan o Co o oC I Camera 5 pry m Co e o Co Camera 6 Camera 7 oa oC ary o Co mery o Co Camera 8 o oC Camera g
478. ty Copyrights and Liability as well as a General Warning are available in an earlier section of this document Document No 27769_02 by Op Xtralis
479. ty after specifying the port for the video format minimum requirement device firmware 1 94 Examples e 192 168 31 100 The IP camera is located in the standard IP address group of the HeiTel video systems and is activated via port 80 62 214 6 17 81 The IP camera is located in an external network and is activated via port 81 Ilpcam015 meinedomain com 93 The IP camera is located in an external network and is activated via a symbolic name or a symbolic IP address at port 93 Note Symbolic addresses can only be processed directly if at least one valid DNS server and the gateway to the network settings were set see Network TCP IP on page 129 e 62 214 6 18 8008 In some circumstances it may be necessary to select an image port other than port 80 possibly for the Video format MJPEG 62 214 6 18 554 Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to use an image port other than port 80 possibly with video format H 264 only applicable to CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR 62 214 6 18 8008 80 For video systems with the device firmware V 1 94 or later it is possible to specify a different PTZ port as well as a different image port Up to and including device firmware V 1 92 the following setting applies e Image port PTZ port Click on the button to access the IP camera lists containing information on the programming of the selected camera IPcam list pdf http iiey heitel com upload downloads miscellaneous IPcar
480. ual e F and F The camera focus functions are controlled by pressing the left mouse button when these pointers are shown e Default mouse pointer The default mouse pointer is shown when the pointer is located in the middle of the image When you press the left mouse button the view changes from full format to Zoom or vice versa e Right clicking When you right click within the live or zoom view this opens the PTZ window which contains corresponding PTZ controls and a miniature view of the live image see Classic PTZ control on page 56 Alternative zoom control using the mouse wheel Zoom in Zoom out From version 4 41 CamControl PRO supports zoom control using the mouse wheel Zooming zoom in or zoom out occurs for 0 5 seconds after the mouse wheel is operated once Operating it again within this timeframe extends the zooming by a further 0 5 seconds The window with the video image to be zoomed in out must be active in order for the mouse wheel to be used in this way If necessary the window may have to be selected with a mouse click Note The PTZ functions on an IP camera do not occur continuously but must be repeatedly called up with a mouse click This behaviour may also be reflected in the use of the mouse wheel for the zoom function 4 8 1 2 PTZ control via USB joystick CamControl RU In order to use the PTZ control via the USB joystick CamControl RU it is necessary for this functionality to be enabled via t
481. ual operation you have to carry out all aspects of operation including establishing a connection You cannot switch back to automatic operation 27 69 _02 21 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis The different ways of accepting calls are described in more detail in the chapter on Receiver options see Take a Call on page 78 4 4 4 Starting connection in different views In manual mode you can also start CamControl PRO in a view other than full screen mode You can choose between zoom quadscreen or 10 screen viewing mode The initial view is configured with Receiver options Extras see View at start of connection on page 81 or via CAMCTRL INI See Specifying the initial view on page 265 4 4 5 Event tree The event tree contains an overview of the last max 4000 events The entries consist of event nodes that may contain lower levels of additional information Each entry consists of asymbol the time and date of the event a code number which may also include the serial number of the connected transmitter and the actual message in plain text The following events are saved A e Program start with user name e User change Program end i e Connection start e Alarm i I s e Tours e Manually established connection e Callback e Status of the alarm enable input Change to recorder settings e Connection closed e Configuration of receiver options iT p Ea e So Event list In addition
482. ue modem by dialling a mobile telephone or normal telephone as transmitter telephone number The telephone should ring and you should hear the carrier signal just as with a fax machine Some of the following errors faults can be excluded by making this check 320 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection possible error message No Dialtone or even No Carrier depending on the type of modem Connect message but screen remains black connection is established 2 Tone dialling is not Supported Outside line required e g predial 0 Modem is set to Wait for dial tone Defective connection or connection cable Incorrect modem initialisation string Other data device is accepting the call e g fax Bad connection End of Step 1 analogue telephone network ISDN Network Set the modem to pulse dialling see modem manual AT commands Correct the telephone number or the dial prefix to 1 or 2 e g ATDO Add the ATX3 command to the init string so your modem does not wait for a dialling tone Check the connection with a telephone Replace the connection cable Enter the correct modem init string in the receiver settings usually the factory setting Disconnect all other data devices from the line Reduce the port speed i e to 57600 from 115200 After you have excluded
483. uirements e The receiver PC must be equipped with a network card and connected to a network The TCP IP protocol must be correctly installed The transmitter can be reached at a valid IP address within this network or through a gateway e Alternatively Internet access may be sufficient Notes e Youcan enter the TCP IP addresses of your transmitters like a telephone number in the IP address Phone number Dial prefix box under Transmitter Index Transmitter Data The separating points must be entered between the segments of the address e g 123 123 123 123 You can also enter symbolic IP addresses in this box See Configuring the transmitter index on page 96 e If you only wish to connect to your transmitter via TCP IP select Off from the Mode drop down list This releases the serial port for other applications or for the serial channel Operation with ISDN cards CAPI or CAPI sharing over the network CamControl PRO does not support the direct use of ISDN cards via the CAPI interface or CAPI sharing solution in the network The settings CAPI 2 0 and MSN are therefore disabled and greyed out If you still want to address CAPI based devices however use a Fossil driver that contacts CAPI solutions via virtual serial interfaces Once you have set up these virtual interfaces see Communicating with CAPI devices via Fossil drivers on page 293 these devices are operated in the same way as via the serial interface Requirements
484. urrent timer into all other timers You do not need to apply the profile by clicking Insert Note The Copy to all timers function automatically replaces the weekly profiles of all tracks Track specific timer settings are lost as a result Timer controlled recording is the ideal solution if you only want to record at certain times of day or only on certain days of the week holidays because you don t have to change the circuit or any settings Actual recording is controlled in line with the settings of the individual image recording inputs See Event recording 1 2 4 10 on page 196 and see Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 on page 201 Saving preview image for the site archive Preview images 27769 02 If you select Record preview images additional smaller sized images of 256x128 pixels are saved These are required for displaying preview sequences in the site archive transmitter archive These sequences provide a quick overview of images saved in the transmitter archive because they play back more quickly Select Record preview images if you want to use the preview feature in the archive See Accessing the Site Archive on page 35 No preview images are recorded for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 The option is not shown in the device settings For devices of theCamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series with HYBRID Card 4 preview images can only be recorded for act
485. usly used at several computer workstations The customer must take measures in the form of access protection mechanisms to ensure that multiple use of the software does not exceed the number of purchased licences or that by multiple use of the software additional licences are purchased 1 5 If acustomer changes the hardware at a workstation on which the licensed software product is being used then he must delete the software from the mass storage of the previously used hardware Simultaneous storage stocking or use of the software on more than one computer per workstation is prohibited Backup Copy 2 1 The customer is entitled to make one backup copy for each purchased licence of a full version of the software This backup copy must be marked accordingly Limitations 3 1 The customer is forbidden to decompile reverse engineer or disassemble the software or to manipulate the software in any other perceptible manner 3 2 The software product may be transferred to third parties when the customer passes the software on in its entirety to the recipient without keeping any copy for himself and only after the recipient of the product agrees to all of the regulations contained in this licence contract 27769 02 329 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 3 3 3 4 3 5 The customer may not change modify or process the software product in any way without previous written agreement from the licensor The customer is not author
486. ve Video settings Command Passwords a Delete Track 1 Delete Track 6 POS ATM IBIS i Delete Track 2 Delete Track 7 a Il Delete Track 3 Delete Track 8 Track settings Video 1 in Delete Track 4 Delete Track 9 H Video 2 in Delete Track 5 Delete Track 10 E Video 3 in Video 4 in 7 Delete all images and passwords Video 5 in H Video 6 in l Format HDD Video F in Video 8 in Video J in Video 10 in X Boot mode v E OK HDD safe power down functions Bales F Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched ee aaa immediately _ Normally opened Help Stop writing to HDD when Y out was switched for 10s restart after 3 minutes or power off L General information This field displays the name of your hard disk Total Size This field displays the size of your hard disk drive in GB Please note that this value is calculated using the binary system 1 KB 1024 Byte 1 MB 1024 1024 Byte 1 GB 1024 1024 1024 Byte Hard disk manufacturers often specify size using the decimal system conversion factor of 1000 instead of 1024 so in some cases the displayed storage capacity may be lower than specified by the manufacturer Hard disk configuration commands Save Recorder Settings x Warning The new settings will cause all stored pictures to be deletetdl Save nevertheless Save as configuration profile Cancel You must confirm changes to hard disk settings by click
487. ve such as for example the set up of alarm and receiver connections Video systems without Video systems with no V out button on the front of the device V out button CamServer 2 and CamDisc HNVR 10 also do not have a control input of the same name on the back of the device Alternatively and depending on the device type you can switch a different potential free control input on the back of the device to ground using a button for at least 10 seconds e CamServer 2 serial number WDxxxxxx control input nc Pin 8 e CamDisc HNVR 10 serial number NVxxxxxx control input Aux in3 Pin 8 27 69 _02 181 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis Safe powering down of the recording system and safe removal of the HDD using Aux in2 If the procedure using V out described in the previous section see Safe powering down of the recording system and safe removal of the HDD using V out on page 181 cannot be used because the relevant control input and or the button for sequencer control is in use control input Aux in2 may alternatively be used Note Although the software option Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched refers to Aux 2 the name of the control input on the back of the device is in fact Aux in2 If the system is programmed as follows the HDD is put into standby mode via Aux in2 HOD sate power down functions I Stop writing to HOD when Aus 2 was switched Timeout immediately wz Normally op
488. ve been designed for Cam4mobile devices Transparent Serial Control IBIS GPS Sopal Card Reader Transparent Transparent data transmission from the receiver PC to the serial output of the transmitter is possible POS Point of Sale The interface is used as an input for serial transaction data see POS function for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer on page 214 Serial control It is possible to control certain device functions by means of serial commands via the interface IBIS The date and clock time on Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG devices are synchronised via the IBIS vehicle bus Wagon number line course and station are also recorded see IBIS function with Cam4mobile on page 214 GPS GPS data received is stored with the recorded images and transferred if there is a live link to CamControl software see GPS function for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG on page 214 Soyal Card Reader The Soyal Card Reader function allows access to the card reader by the video system to be logged image recordings continuous or event recording to be controlled and the video system to be armed disarmed see Soyal Card Reader in conjunction with a HeiTel video system on page 215 Note Once you confirm the new settings in the Function menu with OK you must terminate the connection to your device in order from them to take effect 2 169_02 213 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtrali
489. very state 120 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Resetting configuration profile The configuration profile can only be reset when the removable hard drive is operated in offline mode When a HeiTel video system is running the configuration profile cannot be reset The following step by step instructions describe how to reset the configuration profile 1 Turn the video system off and if desired switch the hard drives 2 If desired carry out an evaluation of the removed hard drive with the CamControl PLAYER in offline mode inaPC Kit CamDisc USB and save relevant archive information e g video sequences or logfile entries in another medium 3 Leave the removable hard drive in the connected PC Kit CamDisc USB 4 Toreset the hard drive configuration select the program option File Write configuration profile from the CamControl PLAYER software File Picture Selecton Event View Statistic Tools Info Open archive Close archive Delete pictures Write configuration profile Save Sequence Strg E Save picture Strg 5 Save picture with on screen information Print picture Strg FP Configure printer 1 MWV814003 C00 Exit 5 After confirming the security question with Yes the configuration profile for the removable hard drive will be reset For this process all recorded images will be deleted and archive passwords that have been set will be overwritten SS ti i
490. ves no feedback notification regarding transmitters which it may not have been possible to add USB node and device grouping The transmitter list can include a supplementary USB node USB direct connection for individual transmitters In addition to this you can create a grouping of several devices 96 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual USB node You activate or deactivate the USB node io USB direct connection by going to Receiver options Extras see Transmitter index with USB Node on page 82 With integrated drivers for the USB interface see Installation of the USB driver for HeiTel Video Gateways on page 294 a connection to the transmitter can be established This corresponds to a network connection with a maximum transfer rate of 9 7 MBit s For the CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s devices please observe the conditions of use of the USB connection see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s on page 300 The transmitter data USB direct connection cannot be edited as regards its name and IP address including port If you wish to set a USB connection to a transmitter which is not to be addressed via the standard port 3000 for IP connections to HeiTel video systems supplement the transmitter index by an additional entry see Adding changing
491. via the internet third party services When using an NTP Time Server on the internet a pool of these servers should always be accessed As part of the NTP Pool Project see http www pool ntp org you can find a relevant list of these servers Examples e 0 de pool ntp org Germany e 1 de pool ntp org Germany e 2 de pool ntp org Germany e 3 de pool ntp org Germany e O uk pool ntp org UK e 3 ie pool ntp org Ireland e 0 us pool ntp org USA SS N S Global parameters The following parameters are configured globally for the Date amp Time menu Time zone Select the time zone of the location of your digital image transmission system The associated time appears immediately in the Calculated Date and Time for the device box If necessary you can configureCamControl PRO in such a way that every time a connection to the transmitter is successfully established its internal clock is synchronised with the time of your receiver PC see Time synchronisation on page 81 see Time synchronisation TIMESYNC on page 266 Extra holidays CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer only and the same devices of the VG series Add as type 1 gt The calendar in these devices allows you to select a total of 25 days to be saved as special holidays in the timer see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 192 of the digital image transmission system Each selected day can be allocated to one of two holiday
492. via which you can output the connected cameras directly to a monitor and thus obtain an overview of the premises being monitored whilst on site Note Since CamDisc VG 2c CamDisc VG 2s Cam4mobile VG 2c CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR and CamServer CamServer VG devices do not have this universal video out these models do not have a Video out configuration menu Recorder settings i ad x Video out Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Sequencer mode Motion detection zones Privacy zones l Alarms vV Camera 1 2 Camera 6 Site archive j Audio MV Camera 2 2 s Camera Relays l j PTZ control Camera 3 2 Camera 8 Serial channel V Camera 4 2 s Camera 9 Estras Upload Download Camera 5 2 Camera 10 Firmware update C Display camera of latest alarm C Display camera of latest image recording OK Cancel Site archive state Help The video output can be operated in three modes e Sequencer mode e Display camera of latest alarm e Display camera of latest image recording 7 18 0 1 Sequencer mode Automatic camera Select Sequencer mode if you want to switch either one input or several switching video inputs in rotation to the output Camera 1 4 10 Select the cameras that you want to include in sequencer mode s Specify how long you want the output to be switched to each ca
493. vr1 a 02 01 06 09 11 39 1500 C 500005 CamDisc svr1 a 02 01 06 09 12 41 1500 CQ501398 Kiel CamDisc HTconnect configuration HTconnect should generally be configured with the settings in the receiver software See HT connect on page 83 One exception to this is the RESERVEDALARMPORTS parameter This parameter can only be set with an entry in CAMCTRL INI Activate HTconnect HTCONNECTSVR 1 Activate HTconnect Server Server e Range of values O Off HTconnect deactivated 1 On HTconnect activated standard 260 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual HTconnect connection HTCONNECTSVRPORT 3333 HT connect connection port e Range of values Valid port number not used by CamControl PRO standard port for HT connect 3333 HT connect source port HTCONNECTOWNPORT 4446 HTconnect UDP source port e Range valid port number not used by CamControl PRO default port for HT connect UDP source port 4446 HTconnect target port HTCONNECTTARGETPORT 4445 HT connect UDP target port e Range valid port number not used by CamControl PRO default port for HTconnect UDP target port 4445 CamControl PRO and HTconnect Server communicate with each other via the HT connect source and target port using the UDP network protocol User Datagram Protocol These ports can be configured if necessary If you change the value for the entry HTCONNECTTARGETPORT in the CAMCTRL INI the same port number must be
494. ware Manual HeiTel by Xtralis The side panels You can establish connections accept alarm calls and perform tours in the side panels just like in the main panel Generally speaking each side panel has the same functions as the main panel but not all of the controls for complete transmitter control are visible Switching between main and side panels Left clicking in one of the side panels automatically switches it to the main panel so that all operating features are available You can switch panels like this any time regardless of the connection status of the panel online or offline When you switch the view in the main panel the configured operating mode stays the same Live images from the selected transmitter also continue to be received in the side panel in the same size and quality Some operating modes are however adapted to the side panel For example the video images from multi image viewing modes such as Quadscreen Ten screen viewing mode or the display of camera groups are not shown in the side panel next to one another but one after the other Lower control panel Event tree and transmitter specific information Lower control panel Underneath the main panel and the side panels on the left you will find the three additional buttons PC Archive Setup and Close e Clicking E CE lepene the PC receiver archive see Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 e Clicking See opens the Receiver options dialogue box of
495. with Missing or incorrect Select a smaller screen resolution faulty gaudy pixels graphics driver 1024x768 27769 02 315 CamControl PRO Software Manual Remote Module Pan and Tilt Systems Relay 16 Error Fault Possible Causes No operating window appears in the software The remote system does not function although the software displays the operating window Control file RO1 is missing Control file RO1 has been named incorrectly Control file RO1 has been copied to the wrong directory Information contained in R01 file is incorrect Incorrect or defective connection cable from video transmitter to remote module or from remote module to system Archiving storing Pictures at the Receiver End PC Error Fault Possible Causes Receiver archive does not 1 record any pictures Archive has not been stored Hard disk is full archive file can not be created Live pictures are recorded Frame storage archive but not archive pictures from the frame storage unit No pictures are shown after the archive is called up in the CamControl PRO Software The Play button double arrow for transmitting pictures from the transmitter archive to the receiver archive has been pressed but transmission only lasts for a short time 316 online has not been played back using the Play button Incorrect archive file has been selected or there are not yet any pictures in memory Transmission
496. with the programming for the respective camera track in the Site archive For CamTel SVR series devices this function is not available due to the absence of a hard drive In the Contact column select between the options Normally opened standard setting or Normally closed for which change of status where applicable one of the above programmed functions Preset Alarm Trigger event is to be triggered 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual Contact CIO Adapter Normally opened only Mormall opened Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normally closed BS 5418 If the CIO Adapter is being used you choose between the Normally closed Normally opened default setting Normally terminated 10k and Normally closed BS 8418 options in the Contact column any change in status of which should trigger one of the functions configured above Preset Alarm Trigger event If the Normally closed BS 8418 option is selected a short circuit or interruption in the lines to the control contact will cause a tamper alarm The alarm is camera selective and CamControl PRO displays a corresponding message in the event tree e Online Tamper camera name triggered control input In the event of an alarm the relevant camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same way as the message syntax of camera alarms In addition to camera names the control input of the ClO Adapter th
497. xisting R01 file All previous entries will be deleted If you select this option PTZ control for this device is deactivated and the protocol for your external device deleted A status window is displayed during deletion The transmitterspecific control file R01 file on the receiver PC is also deleted Port A Connection Status Deleting Remote Adapter please wat Deactivating PTZ functions on the device in question means that PTZ control is no longer available to any of the transmitter s users PTZ control of IP cameras takes place independently of the functions described above The requirement for PTZ control of these cameras is the permanent implementation of the camera within the device firmware Please refer to the overview in this guide see Supported IP cameras on For IP cameras integrated via a Generic GET command see Generic GET commands on page 243 there is generally no PTZ support 211 CamControl PRO Software Manual HeiTel by Xtralis 7 17 Serial channel The transparent serial channel provides a simple way to transfer control data for remote control between receiver PC and transmitter during image transmission As shown in the illustration data can be transmitted via connected terminals See Serial Channel on page 92 The settings are updated immediately during the current connection when you click OK Redialling is therefore not required Receiver PC ISDN analog GSM LAN
498. y see Differentiating between alarm calls on page 277 e Automatic querying of pre alarm images with the number of images per camera specified Activating transmitter Transmitter related alarm processing is a special function of the Accept related alarm processing call and automatic operation setting You must select this function under Receiver options Take call in the receiver software in order to use automatic alarm processing via R02 files see Take a call on page 78 R02 files When R02 files are used for alarm processing the receiver software differentiates between two file types 1 Transmitter specific R02 files These R02 files are assigned a certain transmitter by the serial number in the file name e g CV542016 R02 Incoming alarm messages from this transmitter are processed in line with the defined specifications General alarm processing for transmitter without specific R02 file The file STANDARD R0O2 defines alarm processing for transmitters that do not have their own R02 file If there are no R02 files at C Program_directory RO2 the software uses the default settings that you specified under Receiver options Take call Automatic operation See Take a call on page 78 Structure of the R02 files In the event of an alarm the receiver PC receives information during connection that specifies which device serial number has been activated with which alarm message The receiver software checks whe
499. y Xtralis All current HeiTel devices are equipped with an internal clock This clock should be checked regularly and adjusted if necessary to ensure that images are saved with the correct time and date Recorder settings CamDisc 10 11 Date amp Time Device NTP Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones m Adjust Recorder Time Recorder Time 2010 07 05 10 26 54 Local PC Time 2010 07 05 10 26 48 Calculated Date and Time for the device 2010 07 05 10 26 48 Europe Belorussia Moscow March October Alarms Site archive Summer Time Settings Audio Relays J Set automatically to Summer Time PTZ control f S erial channel Green Video out H EMA Extras Upload Download GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Firmware update Extra holidays IP Camera Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 2 3 4 e 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 OK Cancel Site archive state Help 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Add as type 1 gt Add as type 2 gt Toggle Type Delete Entry Setting the recorder time Recorder time This field contains the current time of the digital transmission system Local PC time This field contains the current time of the receiver PC Calculated Date and _ This field di
500. you actually want to record and also what you actually want to evaluate later Check camera field of view and image quality Internal software motion detectors require considerable CPU power If multiple camera recording is to be controlled by motion detectors and recording time is slowed down considerably as a result consider replacing some of the internal motion detectors with external ones The device handles image recording triggered by changes in input states i e Opening Edge or Closing Edge with active recording on a priority basis If the device detects a status change at a recording 27769 02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl PRO Software Manual input it will always interrupt recording triggered by a different status a status change or the integrated motion detector e So that the device positively detects control input states and status changes switching time must be at least 0 5 s e If the Event recording always enabled function is used See Combined continuous and event recording on page 193 the extended configuration of the continuous recording can only be set to a limited degree Extended continuous recording with a Soyal Card Reader Triggering via the Soyal Card Reader is caused in the extended continuous recording by the falling edge for camera track 1 For the other camera tracks triggering is not possible via this card reader ne imam Contact status Closed Opening Edge Open Closing E dge R

CamControl PRO 4.41 Manual - bei der HeiTel Digital Video GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents